Service AND Installation Manual: CPI Canada Inc

CPI Canada Inc.
Indico 100 Rad Service Manual Ch # 740991-00 Rev. A Page 0-1

PRE-INSTALLATION

1

SERVICE
AND

INSTALLATION

2

INSTALLATION
MANUAL

CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING

3

P.N. #740990

ACCEPTANCE TEST

4

TROUBLESHOOTING

5

REGULAR MAINTENANCE

6

THEORY OF OPERATION

7

SPARES

8

SCHEMATICS

9

The original version of this manual (11 March, 2002)
has been drafted in the English language by:
Communications & Power Industries
communications & medical products division.

CPI Canada Inc.

Page 0-2 Rev. A Indico 100 Rad Service Manual Ch # 740991-00

(This page intentionally left blank)
CPI Canada Inc Pre-installation 1

Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-01 Rev. A Page 1-1
CHAPTER 1

PRE-INSTALLATION

1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Purpose

This manual applies to the Indico 100 family of generators and provides instructions for the installation
and maintenance of all models of that generator.

This Chapter contains the following sections.

SECTION TITLE
1A Introduction
1B Safety
1C Preparing for installation
1D Compatibility listing
1E Generator layout and Major Components
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc

Page 1-2 Rev. A Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-01

(This page intentionally left blank.)
CPI Canada Inc. Introduction 1A

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-00 Rev. K Page 1A-1
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1A

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS:

Section Title
1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................1A-2
1A.1.1 Purpose..................................................................................................................................................1A-2
1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION...................................................................................................................1A-2
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................................1A-3
1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS.........................................................................................................................................1A-5
1A.5.0 FEATURES................................................................................................................................................1A-5
1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL ...................................................................................................................................1A-6
1A.7.0 AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUTS................................................................................................................1A-6
1A.8.0 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION...................................................................................................................1A-6
1A.9.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS ........................................................................................1A-7
1A.9.1 Environmental Specifications.................................................................................................................1A-7
1A.9.2 Applicable Standards.............................................................................................................................1A-7
1A.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ..................................................................................................1A-11
1A.10.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS...............................................................................................1A-11

1A Introduction CPI Canada Inc.

Page 1A-2 Rev. K Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-00
1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION

1A.1.1 Purpose

This manual provides instructions for the installation and service of Millenia and Indico 100 X-ray generators.
This section of the manual applies to the Millenia and Indico 100 family of X-ray generators. Some of the
sections / chapters in the balance of this manual are common to Millenia and Indico 100 X-ray generators;
other sections / chapters are unique to each generator series.

1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION

Depending on configuration and options, the generator provides the power and interfacing to operate X-ray
tubes, Buckys, Rad tables, GI (gastro-intestinal) tables, remote R&F tables, tomographic devices, and digital
imaging systems. The generator consists of power supply and control systems housed in the upper and
lower cabinets, a control console, and an optional remote fluoro control along with the necessary
interconnecting cable(s).

Major items provided are:

X-ray generator housed in upper and lower cabinets.
Control console.
Optional remote fluoro control.
Interconnecting cable(s).
Operator's manual.
Service and installation manual.

1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Figure 1A-1 shows the outline of the Millenia series X-ray generator, control console, and remote fluoro
control. Figure 1A-2 shows the Indico 100 series X-ray generator outline.

Figure 1A-1: Generator outline drawing (Millenia)

1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT)

Figure 1A-2 shows the outline of the Indico 100 series X-ray generator.

Figure 1A-2: Generator outline drawing (Indico 100)

1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS

RAD SYSTEMS:
Bucky table, tabletop and off-table radiography.
Vertical bucky/cassette radiography.
Conventional tomography.

R&F SYSTEMS
Fluoroscopic and spot film applications.
Tomography with conventional and/or remote R&F tables.
Optional digital compatible.
Optional high-level fluoro for therapy simulators (Indico 100).

1A.5.0 FEATURES

High frequency generator.
One or two tube operation, Rad or Rad / Fluoro.
Single or dual filament supplies.
Low speed or dual speed X-ray tube stator supply.
Optimal matching of X-ray tubes by PROMs.
Repetitive self checks of generator functions, provides display of system faults and operating errors.
Optional AEC, up to four inputs.
Optional ABS with kV or kV/mA fluoro stabilizer.
Optional remote fluoro control box for tabletop use or SFD mounting.
Optional Dose-Area Product (DAP) display (Indico 100).
X-ray Tube protection. The generator allows setting the following limits:
a) Maximum mA, adjustable for each focal spot.
b) Maximum kV, adjustable for each X-ray tube.
c) Maximum kW, adjustable for each focal spot.
d) Maximum filament current limit, adjustable for large and small focal spots.
e) Anode heat warning and anode heat alarm levels.
Calibration features:
a) Microprocessor design allows all calibration and programming to be performed via the Console.
b) mA calibration is automated.
Messages and diagnostic information: For users and service personnel, the generator console
displays various messages indicating status or equipment problems. The user is prompted in case of
errors.
Error log stores last 200 errors and associated generator settings.
Service and diagnostic information available via a laptop computer (optional).
KV range: Radiography 40 to 150 kV.
Fluoroscopy 40 to 125 kV.
mA range: Radiography 10 to 320 mA (30 kW), 10 to 400 mA (32 kW),
10 to 500 mA (40 kW), 10 to 630 mA (50 kW), 10 TO 800 mA (65 kW)
and 10 to 1000 mA (80 and 100 kW).
Fluoroscopy 0.5 to 6.0 mA, 0.5 to 20 mA with optional high-level fluoroscopy.
mAs range: tube dependent, max 1000 mAs.
Time range: Radiography 1.0 to 6300 ms (Indico 100), 2.0 to 6300 ms (Millenia).
Fluoroscopy 0 to 5 or 0 to 10 minutes.

Refer to the compatibility statement / product description (end of section 1D) for compatibility and
features of this specific generator.

1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL

The generator will be equipped with a low speed starter, or optional dual speed starter.

DUAL SPEED STARTER
Number of tubes permissible: Maximum of 32 tube types. Tube type is switch selectable
Current monitoring Both stator circuits
Dual speed starter output
frequency
50 or 60 Hz (low speed)
150 or 180 Hz (high speed).
(Independent of line frequency)
Braking Dynamic braking when in high speed rotation
Rotor boost time Determined by tube selection plus incremental boost time
changes from 100 to 700 msec.
Duty cycle Not to exceed 2 high speed starts per minute.

LOW SPEED STARTER
Current monitoring Both stator circuits
Duty cycle Not to exceed 5 consecutive boosts, followed by a minimum 10
second wait period.

1A.7.0 AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUTS

The generator supplies the following power outputs for X-ray room equipment:

24 VDC, 4 Amp.
120 VAC, 2.5 Amp.
240 VAC, 1.5 Amp.

2.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 120 VAC OR 1.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 240 VAC, BUT BOTH ARE
NOT AVAILABLE SIMULTANEOUSLY.

The above voltage sources are not compatible with:

Collimator lamps (24 VDC 150 watts). These lamps exceed the 4 Amp rating of the 24 VDC supply.
Fluorescent lamps. These have high starting currents and generate transients when the tube strikes.
Some inductive loads may cause difficulties (some motors and solenoids).

1A.8.0 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION

The Millenia and Indico 100 series of X-ray generators includes the following documentation:

Operators manual.
Service and installation manual.
Insert and application notes as required.

1A.9.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS

1A.9.1 Environmental Specifications

OPERATING
Ambient temperature range 10 to 40 C
Relative humidity 30 to 75%
Atmospheric pressure range 500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg)

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
Ambient temperature range -20 to 70 C
Relative humidity 10 to 95%, including condensation
Atmospheric pressure range 500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg)

1A.9.2 Applicable Standards

A) SAFETY
The Millenia / Indico 100 family of generators comply with the following regulatory requirements and design
standards:

FDA Center for Devices & Radiological Health (CDRH) - 21 CFR title 21 subchapter J (USA).
Radiation Emitting Devices Act - C34 (Canada).
Medical Device Regulations (Canada).
EC Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices (European Community).
IEC 60601.1, IEC 60601.2.7, CSA 601.1, UL2601.1
-Type of protection against electric shock: Class I equipment.
-Degree of protection against electric shock: Not classified.
-Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: Ordinary equipment.
-Mode of operation: Continuous operation with intermittent loading (standby - exposure).
-Equipment not suitable for use in presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with
oxygen or nitrous oxide.
IEC 60601.1.4, ISO 14971.1

B) EMC (IEC 60601.1.2:2001)
Guidance and manufacturers declaration electromagnetic emissions
The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators are intended for use in the electromagnetic
environment specified below. The customer or the user of the VZW2926 or VZW2930 series should assure that
it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1 The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators use RF
energy only for their internal functions. Therefore, the RF
emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference
in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Class A
(The VZW2926
and VZW2930
series of X-ray
generators in
combination with
shielded location)
Harmonic
emissions
IEC 61000-3-2
Not Applicable
Voltage
fluctuations/
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
Not Applicable
The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators must be
used only in a shielded location with a minimum RF shielding
effectiveness and, for each cable that exits the shielded location, a
minimum RF filter attenuation of 40dB from 30 MHz to 230 MHz
and 47dB from 230 MHz to 1 GHz. (The minimum at 30 MHz is
40dB and the minimum at 230 MHz is 47dB).

The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series is suitable for use in all
establishments other than domestic and those directly connected
to the public low-voltage power supply network that supplies
buildings used for domestic purposes.
NOTE It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specifications.


Guidance and manufacturers declaration electromagnetic immunity
environment specified below. The customer or the user of the VZW2926 or VZW2930 series should assure
that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity
test
IEC 60601
test level
Compliance
level
Electromagnetic environment
guidance
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
6 kV contact
8 kV air
6 kV contact
8 kV air
Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile.
If floors are covered with synthetic material, the
relative humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast
transient/burst
IEC 61000-4-4
2 kV for power
supply lines
1 kV for
input/output lines
2 kV for power
supply lines
1 kV for
input/output lines
Mains power quality should be that of a typical
commercial or hospital environment.
Surge
IEC 61000-4-5
1 kV differential
mode
2 kV common
mode
1 kV differential
mode
2 kV common
mode
commercial or hospital environment.
Voltage dips,
short interruption,
and voltage
variations on
power supply
input lines
IEC 60601-4-11
<5 % U
T
(>95 % dip in U
T
)
for 0.5 cycle

40 % U
T
(60 % dip in U
T
)
for 5 cycles

70 % U
T
(30 % dip in U
T
)

<5 % U
T
(>95 % dip in U
T
)
for 5 s
<5 % U
T
(>95 % dip in U
T
)
for 0.5 cycle

40 % U
T
(60 % dip in U
T
)
for 5 cycles

70 % U
T
(30 % dip in U
T
)

<5 % U
T
(>95 % dip in U
T
)
for 5 s
commercial or hospital environment. If the user
of the VZW2926 and VZW2930 series X-ray
generator requires continued operation during
power mains interruptions, it is recommended
that the X-ray generator be powered from an
uninterruptible power supply or battery.
Power frequency
(50/60 Hz)
IEC 61000-4-8
3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
levels characteristic of a typical location in a
typical commercial or hospital environment
NOTE: U
T
is the A.C. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.


Guidance and manufacturers declaration electromagnetic immunity
environment specified below. The customer or the user of the VZW2926 or VZW2930 series should assure that
it is used in such an environment.
Immunity
test
IEC 60601
test level
Compliance
level
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Conducted RF
IEC 61000-4-6

3 V
rms

150 kHz to
80MHz

3 V
rms

150 kHz to
80MHz

The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray
generators must be used only in a shielded location
with a minimum RF shielding effectiveness and, for
each cable that enters the shielded location, a
minimum RF filter attenuation of 40dB from 30 MHz
to 230 MHz and 47dB from 230 MHz to 1 GHz. (The
minimum at 30 MHz is 40dB and the minimum at
230 MHz is 47dB.)
Radiated RF
IEC 61000-4-3
3 V/m
80MHz to 2.5
GHz
3 V/m
80MHz to 2.5
GHz
Field strengths outside the shielded location from
fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey, should be less than 3
V/m.
a

Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment
marked with the following symbol:

NOTE 1 These guidelines may not apply all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.

NOTE 2 It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specification.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the
VZW2926 or VZW2930 series of X-ray generators is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level
above, the X-ray generator should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is
observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the X-ray generator.

1A.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

In accordance with the intended use, this X-ray generator complies with the European Council Directive
concerning Medical Devices. The CE marking affixed to this product signifies this. One of the harmonized
standards of this Directive defines the permitted levels of electromagnetic emission from this equipment
and its required immunity from the electromagnetic emissions of other devices.

It is not possible, however, to exclude with absolute certainty the possibility that other high frequency
electronic equipment, which is fully compliant to the EMC regulations, will not adversely affect the
operation of this generator. If the other equipment has a comparatively high level of transmission power
and is in close proximity to the generator, these EMC concerns (the risk of interference) may be more
pronounced. It is therefore recommended that the operation of equipment of this type such as mobile
telephones, cordless microphones and other similar mobile radio equipment be restricted from the vicinity
of this X-ray generator.

1A.10.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS

KV: KV peak after any initial kV overshoot.
TIME: Time in milliseconds, (ms) that the high voltage (anode to cathode) is greater than or
equal to 75% of the desired kV.
mA: Average Tube Beam Current (in mA) during the exposure TIME.
mAs milliampere-seconds (mA x TIME).

Address any questions regarding X-ray generator operation to:

Mail: Customer Support Department
Communications and Power Industries Canada Inc.
45 River Drive
Georgetown, Ontario, Canada L7G 2J 4

Telephone: (905) 877-0161

Fax: (905) 877-8320
Attention: Customer Support Department

E-mail: marketing@cmp.cpii.com
Attention: Customer Support Department



CPI Canada Inc. Safety 1B

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-01 Rev. H Page 1B-1
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1B

SAFETY

CONTENTS:

Section Title
1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................1B-2
1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS........................................................................................................1B-2
1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS.......................................................................................................1B-2
1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNING LABELS - INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................1B-4
1B.4.1 Safety Warning Labels - Organization...................................................................................................1B-5
1B.5.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES COMMON TO MILLENIA AND INDICO 100..............................................1B-5
1B.5.1 Caution HV Behind Cover Label ............................................................................................................1B-5
1B.5.2 Weight Label ..........................................................................................................................................1B-6
1B.5.3 DC Bus Label .........................................................................................................................................1B-6
1B.5.4 Console CPU Board / Console Board....................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.5 Generator Interface Board.....................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.6 Room Interface Board............................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.7 AEC Board .............................................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.8 Power Input Board .................................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.9 Dual Speed Starter Board......................................................................................................................1B-8
1B.6.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO MILLENIA..............................................................................1B-8
1B.6.1 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Label................................................................................................1B-8
1B.6.2 Live Mains / Fuses / Ground Label ........................................................................................................1B-9
1B.6.3 Live Mains / Fuses Label .......................................................................................................................1B-9
1B.6.4 Caution - Hazardous Voltages Label ...................................................................................................1B-10
1B.6.5 Warning / Caution / Caution Label .......................................................................................................1B-11
1B.6.6 Tank Vent Label ...................................................................................................................................1B-11
1B.6.7 mA Test Jacks Label............................................................................................................................1B-12
1B.6.8 mA test Jacks.......................................................................................................................................1B-12
1B.6.9 F3 (Auxiliary Power Fuseblock) ...........................................................................................................1B-12
1B.7.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO INDICO 100.........................................................................1B-12
1B.7.1 Caution HV Exposed Label..................................................................................................................1B-12
1B.7.2 Caution HV Label .................................................................................................................................1B-13
1B.7.3 Danger HV Label .................................................................................................................................1B-13
1B.7.4 High Voltage Warning Label ................................................................................................................1B-13
1B.7.5 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals .......................................................................................................1B-14
1B.7.6 Danger High Tension...........................................................................................................................1B-14
1B.7.7 F1 (Primary of Auxiliary Transformer)..................................................................................................1B-14

1B Safety CPI Canada Inc.

Page 1B-2 Rev. H Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-01
1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This section contains important safety warnings and safety information required for installing and
servicing the generator.

1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS
The following advisory symbols are used on the safety warning labels, and/or on circuit boards, and/or on
the operator console and the optional remote fluoro control.

High voltage symbol used to indicate the presence
of high voltage.

Warning symbol used to indicate a potential hazard
to operators, to service personnel, or to the
equipment. It indicates a requirement to refer to the
accompanying documentation for details.

Radiation exposure symbol used on operator
console. Lights to indicate that an exposure is in
progress. This is accompanied by an audible tone
from the console.

Fluoro radiation exposure symbol used on operator
console and on optional remote fluoro control unit.
Lights to indicate that a fluoro exposure is in
progress. This is accompanied by an audible tone
from the console.
WARNING THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE
DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND
OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE
EXPOSURE FACTORS AND
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
ARE OBSERVED.
Radiation warning label on console, used in certain
jurisdictions.

Never allow unqualified personnel to operate the X-
ray generator.

1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS

WARNING: PROPER USE AND SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES WITH RESPECT TO X-RAY
GENERATORS ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF USERS OF SUCH GENERATORS. CPI
CANADA INC. PROVIDES INFORMATION ON ITS PRODUCTS AND ASSOCIATED
HAZARDS, BUT ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITIES FOR AFTER-SALE OPERATING AND
SAFETY PRACTICES.
THE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY GENERATOR NOT
MAINTAINED OR SERVICED ACCORDING TO THIS SERVICE AND INSTALLATION
MANUAL, OR FOR ANY GENERATOR THAT HAS BEEN MODIFIED IN ANY WAY.
THE MANUFACTURER ALSO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR X-RAY RADIATION
OVEREXPOSURE OF PATIENTS OR PERSONNEL RESULTING FROM POOR OPERATING
TECHNIQUES OR PROCEDURES.


SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS (cont)

WARNING: THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE
EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.

X-ray radiation exposure may be damaging to health, with some effects being cumulative and extending
over periods of many months or even years. Operators and service personnel should avoid any
exposure to the primary beam and take protective measures to safeguard against scatter radiation.
Scatter radiation is caused by any object in the path of the primary beam and may be of equal or less
intensity than the primary beam that exposes the film.

DO NOT CONNECT UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT TO THE REAR OF THE CONSOLE.
For the 23 X 56 (cm) console, J 5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main
cabinet, J 4 is not used, J 2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J 1 is for
connection of an optional printer.
cabinet, J 2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J 13 is for connection of an
external hand switch and / or foot switch.
For the Rad-only console, J 3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J 4 is a serial port
for use by an external computer, and J 8 is for the interconnect cable to the main cabinet.
For the touch screen console, J 2 on the touch screen interface board is for the interconnect
cable to the generator main cabinet, J 3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J 5
connects to the membrane switch assembly with the on / off and prep / expose switches, and
J 4 is a serial port for use by an external computer.
INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE..

CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED THE TUBE MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMITS. INTENDED LIFE AND
RELIABILITY WILL NOT BE OBTAINED UNLESS GENERATORS ARE OPERATED WITHIN
PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS.
No practical design can incorporate complete protection for operators or service personnel who do not
take adequate safety precautions. Only authorized and properly trained service and operating
personnel should be allowed to work with this X-ray generator equipment. The appropriate
personnel must be made aware of the inherent dangers associated with the servicing of high voltage
equipment and the danger of excessive exposure to X-ray radiation during system operation.

SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS (cont)

WARNING: HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES EXIST INSIDE THE GENERATOR WHENEVER THE MAIN POWER
DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. THOSE AREAS INCLUDE THE MAIN FUSEHOLDER AND
ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS IN THE HV POWER SUPPLY, PORTIONS OF THE GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD IN THE UPPER PORTION OF THE GENERATOR (MILLENIA AND
INDICO 100), AND THE TERMINALS ON THE LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IN THE
LOWER GENERATOR CABINET IF FITTED (MILLENIA ONLY).

THE CONSOLE ON/OFF SWITCH DOES NOT DISCONNECT THE MAIN POWER FROM THE
ABOVE AREAS INSIDE THE GENERATOR.

THE BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED IN THE POWER SUPPLY PRESENT A SAFETY
HAZARD FOR AT LEAST 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM
THE UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE SERVICING
THE GENERATOR.

1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNING LABELS - INTRODUCTION

NOTE: THESE LABELS AND WARNINGS ARE LOCATED TO ALERT SERVICE PERSONNEL THAT
SERIOUS INJURY WILL RESULT IF THE HAZARD IDENTIFIED IS IGNORED.

NOTE: DUE TO THE DIVERSITY OF GENERATOR MODELS, THE EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE
EXACTLY AS SHOWN.

WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE MAIN POWER DISCONNECT AND ALLOW SUFFICIENT TIME FOR ALL
CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS OR OPENING ANY
SERVICE DOOR.

WARNING: IF ANY BARRIERS OR COVERS MUST BE REMOVED FOR SERVICE, TAKE ALL
REQUIRED PRECAUTIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE HAZARD(S) AND IMMEDIATELY
REPLACE THE BARRIERS/COVERS WHEN THE NEED FOR REMOVAL IS COMPLETED.

REPLACE ALL FUSES IN THIS GENERATOR WITH THE SAME TYPE AND
RATING.

This information is provided to help you establish safe operating conditions for both you and your CPI X-
ray generator. Do not operate this X-ray generator except in accordance with these precautions, and any
additional information provided by the X-ray generator manufacturer and/or competent safety authorities.
The safety warning label subsections define the safety labels used inside and outside the generator
cabinets. Depending on configuration, your X-ray generator may contain some or all of the labels shown.

1B.4.1 Safety Warning Labels - Organization
The safety warning label information is organized into three subsections:
Safety labels/notices common to Millenia and Indico 100
Safety notices unique to Millenia
Safety notices unique to Indico 100

1B.5.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES COMMON TO MILLENIA AND INDICO 100

1B.5.1 Caution HV Behind Cover Label

MILLENIA: This label is attached to a cover over the main power contactor. This area will have
mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.

MILLENIA: This label is attached to a cover over the resonant circuit and low speed starter
components if a low speed starter is fitted. The resonant components (resonant
capacitors etc) may be energized for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the
main disconnect is switched off.
If a low speed starter is fitted, the associated components will have up to 240
VAC applied when the console is switched on.

MILLENIA: This label is attached to each of the access panels on the rear of the generator. The high
voltage hazards behind these panels is similar to that behind the upper and lower
entrance doors, see 1B.7.4.

MILLENIA: This label is attached to a cover over the line adjusting transformer (if fitted). The
terminals on the transformer will have mains voltage applied as long as the main
disconnect is switched on. If access to the transformer connections is needed, SWITCH
OFF THE MAIN DISCONNECT FIRST.

INDICO 100: This label is attached to a cover over the inverter board(s). The inverter assembly is
connected to the main DC bus and will have high voltage applied at all times that the
generator is switched on. This assembly will remain energized for 5 minutes after the
generator is switched off, or the main disconnect is switched off.

INDICO 100: This label is attached to a cover over the main input fuses on the power input board. This
area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.


1B.5.2 Weight Label

MILLENIA: This label is attached to the upper and lower generator cabinets and to the HT oil tank
and states the approximate weight of each of the generator sections and of the HT oil
tank. This label cautions against attempting to lift those assemblies without proper
assistance.

INDICO 100: This label is attached to the lower generator cabinet and to the HT oil tank and states the
approximate weight of the lower generator cabinet and of the HT oil tank. This label
cautions against attempting to lift those assemblies without proper assistance.

1B.5.3 DC Bus Label

MILLENIA: This label is attached to a cover over the DC bus capacitors. These capacitors will hold a
lethal charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the main disconnect is
switched off. Do not remove the cover for a minimum of 5 minutes after the power has
been switched off.

INDICO 100: This label is attached to the removable panels on the lower (power supply) cabinet. The
internal capacitors will hold a lethal charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off,
or the main disconnect is switched off. Do not remove the cover for a minimum of 5
minutes after the power has been switched off.

WARNING: WAIT A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE INPUT MAINS POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED
BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS OR ACCESS PANELS. ONCE THE COVER(S) /
PANEL(S) ARE REMOVED CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE ACROSS THE DC BUS
CAPACITORS IS LESS THAN 48 VDC BEFORE SERVICING.

1B.5.4 Console CPU Board / Console Board

For 23 X 56 (cm) consoles:
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the area of
U32 and J 10. This voltage is used to light the backlight for the LCD display assembly in the
console.
For 31 X 42 (cm) Indico 100 R&F consoles:
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the area of T1,
C57, and J 10. This is a high voltage source for the fluorescent backlight on the LCD display.
For Indico 100 Rad-only consoles:
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the area of T1,
C36, and J 5. This is a high voltage source for the fluorescent backlight on the LCD display.
FUSE RATING:
F1: 1.6A 250V

1B.5.5 Generator Interface Board

This symbol is printed on the generator interface board in the high volage (mains) area.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Components within the dashed line on the board have high
voltage applied at all times that the main disconnect is switched ON. These components are
live EVEN WITH THE CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF.

This symbol is printed on the generator interface board near fuses F1 to F6.
FUSE RATINGS:
F1: 1.6A 250V slow blow
F2, F5: 2.5A 250V slow blow
F3, F4: 5A 250V slow blow
F6: 2A 250 V slow blow

1B.5.6 Room Interface Board

This symbol is printed on the room interface board near the 110/220 VAC terminal blocks.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: 110/220 VAC may be present on this board at all times that the
AC mains to the generator is switched on.

1B.5.7 AEC Board

This symbol is printed on some versions of AEC board with a high voltage power supply for a
PMT or ion chamber.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Depending on the AEC board type, up to approximately 1000
VDC may be present on the AEC board at all times that the generator is switched on.

1B.5.8 Power Input Board

Power input boards for single phase 240 VAC generators are fitted with several high power
resistors that operate at temperatures sufficient to cause skin burn. Ensure that these
resistors have cooled sufficiently after the power has been switched off before servicing.

1B.5.9 Dual Speed Starter Board

This symbol is printed on the dual speed starter board if fitted.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 600 VDC is present on this board. This voltage is
supplied from the DC bus capacitors in the HF power supply. USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN SERVICING, this voltage and current combination is lethal. Ensure that the DC bus
capacitors are fully discharged before servicing as these capacitors will hold a lethal charge
for 5 minutes AFTER THE EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED OFF.

WARNING: COMPONENTS BEHIND VARIOUS COVERS, AS NOTED IN THIS SECTION, REMAIN LIVE
EVEN WITH THE OPERATOR CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF. THE ONLY WAY TO REMOVE
POWER FROM THESE AREAS IS TO SWITCH OFF THE MAIN DISCONNECT.

1B.6.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO MILLENIA

1B.6.1 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Label

This label indicates that if the power supply inverter leads that attach to the high tension transformer
primary terminals are not connected the generator must not be energized.

This label also cautions against over tightening the nuts on the transformer feedthrough terminals
mentioned in the above paragraph.


1B.6.2 Live Mains / Fuses / Ground Label

This label is attached to a cover over the main fuse block and fuses. This area will have mains voltage
applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on. The main system ground is also located behind
this cover.

1B.6.3 Live Mains / Fuses Label

This label is attached to a cover over the fuse block and fuses for the room interface transformer. This
area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.

1B.6.4 Caution - Hazardous Voltages Label

This label is attached to the main access doors on the generator. Wait a minimum of five minutes after
the main power has been removed from the generator before opening the cabinet doors. This will
allow for internal capacitors to discharge to a safe level.
The upper door provides access to the HV power supply driver section, room interface board and
associated control circuits. The lower door allows access to the HT transformer, dual speed starter
chassis if fitted, line adjusting transformer if fitted, and access to the tube stator connections and thermal
switch connections. Additionally, the grounding location for the X-ray tube housing is located in this area.
Hazards associated with each area within are outlined in the relevant sections of this chapter.

CAUTION
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT INSIDE THE CABINET
FOR A PERIOD OF FIVE (5)
MINUTES AFTER DE-ENERGIZING
THIS EQUIPMENT.

1B.6.5 Warning / Caution / Caution Label

This label is attached to a cover over the dual speed starter assembly (if fitted). DC bus voltage is present
behind this panel, see 1B.5.9.
Ensure that the generator has been turned OFF for five minutes before removing the cover or
disconnecting the DC supply.
Replace fuses with the same type and rating, refer to spares list (chapter 8) for details.

1B.6.6 Tank Vent Label

This label is attached to the HT tank clamping bracket on generator models equipped with an HT tank
vent screw. This screw must be loosened to allow venting of the HT tank before use of the generator
when the tank is so equipped.
The screw must be fully tightened to prevent insulating oil spills or leaks from the HT tank during
transportation or shipping.

1B.6.7 mA Test Jacks Label

This label is attached to the top of the HT tank on generator models equipped with mA test jacks. A
similar warning is printed on tank lid boards using this connector; see 1B.6.8 below for details.

1B.6.8 mA test Jacks

This symbol is printed on tank lid boards with mA/mAs test jacks.
Replace the shorting jumper immediately after use. Do not attempt exposures without either
the shorting jumper in place, or an approved mA/mAs measuring device properly connected.

The warning CAUTION: 48V MAX printed on some tank lid boards does not apply in Millenia
generator applications.

1B.6.9 F3 (Auxiliary Power Fuseblock)

This symbol is on a label under the fuseholder for F3 (to the right of the HF power supply).
FUSE RATING: 3A 500V slow blow.
This fuse is only used if the generator is fitted with the neutral block option.

1B.7.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO INDICO 100

1B.7.1 Caution HV Exposed Label

This label is attached to the removable panels on the lower (power supply) cabinet. High voltage is
present within this cabinet at all times that the mains power is switched on.

1B.7.2 Caution HV Label

This label is attached to the power input board, and to the resonant board assembly. The input power
board has line voltage components attached that will be live at all times that the main disconnect is
switched on. This includes the input fuses, main line contactor, mains rectifier and associated
components.
The resonant board assembly has components that may be energized at all times that the
generator is on. These components may retain their charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched
off, or the main disconnect is switched off.

1B.7.3 Danger HV Label

This label is attached to the primary terminals on the HT oil tank. These terminals may be energized at all
times that the generator is switched on, and for 5 minutes after the console or the main disconnect is
switched off.

1B.7.4 High Voltage Warning Label

This label is attached to the inverter board(s) and to the low speed starter assembly if fitted. The inverter
assembly is connected to the main DC bus and will have high voltage applied at all times that the
generator is switched on. This assembly will remain energized for 5 minutes after the generator is
switched off, or the main disconnect is off.
Components on the low speed starter assembly will have 240 VAC applied when the console is
switched on.

1B.7.5 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals

This notice is printed on the HT oil tank lid and indicates that if the power supply inverter leads that attach
to the high tension transformer primary terminals are not connected the generator must not be energized.

This notice also cautions against over tightening the nuts on the transformer feedthrough terminals
mentioned in the above paragraph.

1B.7.6 Danger High Tension

This notice is printed on the HT oil tank lid. High voltage may be present at the primary terminals on the
tank lid board, at the output high voltage connectors, and at the mA/mAs measuring jacks if the shorting
link is opened for mA/mAs measurements.

1B.7.7 F1 (Primary of Auxiliary Transformer)

This symbol is on a label above the fuse holder for F1 (to the left of the main input fuses on
the power input board).
FUSE RATING:
Single phase generators: 3A 250V slow blow.
Three phase generators: 2A 500V slow blow.

CPI Canada Inc. Preparing for Installation 1C

Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-02 Rev. L Page 1C-1
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1C

PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION

CONTENTS:

1C.1.0 INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................... 1C-2
1C.2.0 GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................. 1C-2
1C.2.1 32 kW Single Phase ............................................................................................................................. 1C-2
1C.2.2 40 kW Single Phase ............................................................................................................................. 1C-2
1C.2.3 32 kW Three Phase.............................................................................................................................. 1C-2
1C.2.4 40 kW Three Phase.............................................................................................................................. 1C-3
1C.2.5 50 kW Three Phase.............................................................................................................................. 1C-3
1C.2.6 65 kW Three Phase.............................................................................................................................. 1C-3
1C.2.7 80 kW Three Phase.............................................................................................................................. 1C-4
1C.2.8 100 kW Three Phase............................................................................................................................ 1C-4
1C.2.9 Service Disconnect (All Models)........................................................................................................... 1C-4
1C.3.0 POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................. 1C-5
1C.4.0 GROUND REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................................... 1C-7
1C.5.0 OUTLINE DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................. 1C-8
1C.5.1 Generator Outline ................................................................................................................................. 1C-8
1C.5.2 Generator Weight ................................................................................................................................. 1C-8
1C.5.3 Generator Shipping Containers: Dimensions....................................................................................... 1C-8
1C.6.0 LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROLLER............................................................. 1C-9
1C.6.1 Locating The Equipment In The X-Ray Room.................................................................................... 1C-10
1C.6.2 Seismic Centers for the Indico 100..................................................................................................... 1C-11
1C.7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................... 1C-12
1C.8.0 CABLES SUPPLIED WITH THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR................................................................. 1C-12
1C.9.0 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS..................................................................................................... 1C-13
1C.9.1 Site Logistics....................................................................................................................................... 1C-13
1C.9.2 Installation Equipment ........................................................................................................................ 1C-13
1C Preparing for Installation CPI Canada Inc.

Page 1C-2 Rev. L Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-02
1C.1.0 INTRODUCTION

The following items must be considered before installing your generator:
Power level of your generator.
Power line requirements.
Ground requirements.
Physical placement of the generator.
Environmental requirements for the generator.
Cable runs from the generator to all room components: tables, Buckys, X-ray tubes etc.

1C.2.0 GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS

1C.2.1 32 kW Single Phase

Line Voltage 230 VAC 10%, 1.
Line Frequency 50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current 200 Amps.
Standby Current 5 Amps.

1C.2.2 40 kW Single Phase

Momentary Current 250 Amps.

1C.2.3 32 kW Three Phase

480 VAC 10%, 3 with optional line adjusting transformer.
Momentary Current 65 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
55 Amps/phase at 480 VAC.



480 VAC 10%, 3 with optional line adjusting transformer.


Line Voltage 400 VAC 10%, 3 (for 400 VAC input generators).
480 VAC 10%, 3 with optional line adjusting transformer,
(for 400 VAC input generators).
480 VAC 10%, 3 (for 480 VAC input generators).
* SEE NOTE AT THE END OF 1C.2.8








*NOTE: 50 kW AND HIGHER THREE-PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS ARE AVAILABLE IN 400
VAC AND 480 VAC MODELS. 400 VAC MODELS MUST BE OPERATED FROM 400 VAC
MAINS, OR MAY BE OPERATED FROM 480 VAC MAINS WITH AN OPTIONAL LINE
ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER. 480 VAC MODELS MUST BE OPERATED FROM 480 VAC
MAINS (THESE ARE THE NOMINAL MAINS VOLTAGES, THE ALLOWED TOLERANCES
ARE AS DETAILED IN THE PREVIOUS TABLES).

1C.2.9 Service Disconnect (All Models)

Refer to the following table for the recommended service disconnect ratings for the Generators
(Power Supplies).

1C.3.0 POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS

The following table defines the power line requirements for the generators.
NOTE: THE FOLLOWING TABLE CONTAINS RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR THE WIRE SIZES
BETWEEN THE MAINS DISCONNECT AND THE GENERATOR. THE ACTUAL VALUES
USED AT AN INSTALLATION ARE DEPENDENT ON THE QUALITY OF THE INPUT LINE
(VOLTAGE LEVEL) THE CURRENT REQUIREMENTS AND THE LENGTH OF THE CABLE
RUN AND MUST BE CONFIRMED BY THE INSTALLER.

FINAL SELECTION OF GENERATOR INPUT WIRE AND DISCONNECTS AS WELL AS THE
CABLING FROM THE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER TO THE MAINS DISCONNECT,
MUST MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODES AND IS
USUALLY DETERMINED BY HOSPITAL/CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING.

ALL THE RATINGS LISTED CONSIDER THE GENERATOR REQUIREMENTS ONLY. THE
INSTALLER MUST MAKE THE NECESSARY COMPENSATION FOR ADDITIONAL LOAD
REQUIREMENTS

A POOR QUALITY INPUT LINE MAY RESULT IN THE INSTALLER HAVING
TO DERATE THE GENERATOR'S MAXIMUM POWER

Mains Voltage
Minimum
Recommended
Mains Disconnect
to Generator
15 ft/5 m max)
Generator
Momentary
Line
Current
Minimum
Recommended
Generator
Service Rating
Minimum
Recommended
Distribution
Transformer
Rating

Ground
Wire
Size

Apparent
Mains
Resistance
32 kW 1 Generator
230 VAC

#4
(25 mm
2
)
200 A 120 A 50 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.055
40 kW 1 Generator
230 VAC

#4
(25 mm
2
)
250 A 120 A 65 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.045
32 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC #6
(15 mm
2
)
65 A 100 A 45 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.27
480 VAC #6
(15 mm
2
)
55 A 100 A 45 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.40
40 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC

#6
(15 mm
2
)
80 A 100 A 55 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.22
480 VAC

#6
(15 mm
2
)
65 A 100 A 55 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.32


Mains Voltage
Minimum
Recommended
Mains Disconnect
to Generator
15 ft/5 m max)
Generator
Momentary
Line
Current
Minimum
Recommended
Generator
Service Rating
Minimum
Recommended
Distribution
Transformer
Rating

Ground
Wire
Size

Apparent
Mains
Resistance
50 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC #6
(15 mm
2
)
100 A 100 A 65 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.17
480 VAC #6
(15 mm
2
)
80 A 100 A 65 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.24
65 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC #6
(15 mm
2
)
125 A 100 A 85 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.13
480 VAC #6
(15 mm
2
)
105 A 100 A 85 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.19
80 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC #6
(15 mm
2
)
155 A 100 A 105 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.11
480 VAC #6
(15 mm
2
)
130 A 100 A 105 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.15
100 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC #6
(15 mm
2
)
195 A 100 A 130 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.09
480 VAC #6
(15 mm
2
)
160 A 100 A 130 kVA #4
(25mm
2
)
0.12

1C.3.0 POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS (cont)

All wiring and grounding should be in compliance with the national electrical code or equivalent.
All wiring must be copper.
For all installations, a separate copper ground cable #4 AWG (25 mm
2
) is required from the building
distribution ground to the ground terminal located inside the main disconnect switch fuse block.
The disconnect switch shall be located within reach of the operator.

1C.4.0 GROUND REQUIREMENTS

POWER LINE:
A suitable flexible copper cable #6 AWG (15 mm
2
) or larger must be supplied (usually part of the line
cable) to connect from the disconnect switch to the main ground of the generator, located to the left of
the main fuse block on the power input board.
If a neutral line is provided with the system under no circumstances is it to be used for ground
purposes. The ground conductor must carry fault currents only.

X-RAY TUBE HOUSING:
A copper ground cable, #10 AWG (6 mm
2
) or greater, is to be connected from each X-ray tubes
housing to the H.T. tank ground stud (located at the top of the H.T. tank).

STATOR CABLE:
For units with a low speed starter, shielded stator cables are recommended. For units with a dual
speed starter, shielded stator cables MUST be used.
The shield for the stator cable(s) must be properly grounded at the chassis ground studs as per
chapter 2.


1C.5.0 OUTLINE DRAWINGS

1C.5.1 Generator Outline

Refer to chapter 1A for the Indico 100 generator outline.

1C.5.2 Generator Weight

The weight of the generator cabinet and of the available consoles is listed below:

Generator cabinet 235 lbs (107 kg).
Control console (23 X 56 cm) 7 lbs (3.2 kg).
Control console (31 X 42 cm) 8 lbs (3.7 kg).
Control console (Rad only) 6 lbs (2.7 kg).
Control console (Touch screen) 24 lbs (10.9 kg).

1C.5.3 Generator Shipping Containers: Dimensions

The overall dimensions of the Indico 100 shipping pack are shown below.

Figure 1C-1: Generator shipping container

1C.6.0 LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROLLER

The generator cabinet is self standing and does not need to be supported. However, the installation
should meet the following requirements:

The floor must be flat and level.
The floor must be capable of supporting a load of approximately 250 lbs (115 Kg).
The generator installation area must be clean and free of dirt or debris.
If required, the generator may be anchored to the floor via the hold-down brackets. See Figure 1C-2.
Sufficient room must be provided to allow access to the rear and side panels for installation.
Clearance must also be provided at both sides of the cabinet, at the front, and at the rear of the upper
cabinet to allow access for service. See Figure 1C-3 for recommended clearances.
A cable conduit should be provided from the control console to the generator cabinet to allow routing
of the control cable if required. Allow for a 2 inch conduit. See Figure 1C-4.

Figure 1C-2: Anchoring plates for securing the generator

1C.6.1 Locating The Equipment In The X-Ray Room

Figure 1C-3 shows recommended clearances around the generator. Figure 1C-4 shows recommended
clearances for through-the-wall cable routing.

Figure 1C-3: Generator clearances

Figure 1C-4: Typical through the wall installation.

1C.6.2 Seismic Centers for the Indico 100

Figure 1C-5 shows the seismic center location for the Indico 100 X-ray generator.

Figure 1C-5: Indico 100 seismic centers

1C.7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Listed below are the ventilation requirements for the Indico 100 series generator:

Unrestricted air flow must be provided at the front and sides of the cabinet, as well as underneath the
unit.
Do not allow storage on top of the cabinet.
Typical heat output of the generator during stand-by is 75 BTU/hr, or 4000 BTU/hr during fluoro
operation.
Control console heat output is negligible (150 BTU/hr).

1C.8.0 CABLES SUPPLIED WITH THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR

Figure 1C-6 shows the cabling supplied with the generator:

The cable supplied for the console is a 15 conductor cable with a standard length of 50 ft. (15 m).
The cable supplied for the optional remote fluoro control is a 9 conductor cable with a standard length
of 50 ft. (15 m).

Figure 1C-6: Cabling supplied with generator

1C.9.0 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS

The following checklists are provided to help the installer during a pre-installation site visit, prior to
installing the generator:
Site logistics
Installation equipment

1C.9.1 Site Logistics

Before starting the generator installation, review the following checklist for site logistics.

CHECK DESCRIPTION
Is there an unloading area to transport the generator from the delivery truck to the inside of
the building?
If the installation is not on the same floor as the delivery entrance, is there an elevator
available?
Are all halls and doorways large enough to allow the generator to pass through?
Is there a transport dolly or similar device to move the Generator? It must have a minimum
rating of 250 lb. (115 Kg.)
Do any regulatory bodies need to be notified prior to installation?
If movers are required, have arrangements for time and equipment been completed?
Are lifting straps or some other suitable device available to lift the generator off the
shipping pallet?

1C.9.2 Installation Equipment

The following is a checklist of recommended tools and test equipment for installation and calibration of
the generator.
NOTE: Please note that GenWare and a laptop computer are required for programming and calibration
of the touch screen console. Refer to chapter 3C for details.

CHECK DESCRIPTION
GenWare and a laptop computer for setup and calibration if required. This is needed for
programming and calibration of the touch screen console.
General hand tools for installation: Wrenches, nut drivers, assortment of screwdrivers,
pliers, etc.
If the generator is to be anchored to the floor, suitable hardware and drills, drill bits etc
must be available.
A supply of connectors for wiring: lugs, caps, line splices etc.
A calibrated DVM which indicates true RMS voltages.
Dual trace memory oscilloscope with a minimum 20 MHz bandwidth; appropriate leads,
probes, etc.
Device for measuring true kVp and mA (mAs). This may be a Dynalyzer equivalent or a
non-invasive system such as the Keithly TRIAD system.
A calibrated radiation meter with detectors that will allow for R/min and uR type
measurements (or uGy and Gy/min).
A strobe or reed type tachometer to verify that the anode is rotating up to speed.
A sufficient selection of patient absorbers to allow AEC and ABS calibration. A suggested
selection is 3/4 inch Al (quantity 2); 1 mm of Cu (quantity 8), Water in containers of 5.0.
10.0, 15.0 cm thickness.
Test phantoms to verify the imaging system with the generator.


CPI Canada Inc Compatibility Listing 1D

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-02 Rev. C Page 1D-1
CHAPTER 1

SECTION 1D

COMPATIBILITY LISTING

CONTENTS:

Section Title
1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.0 COMPATIBLE DEVICES AND OPTIONS.................................................................................................. 1D-2
1D.2.1 X-Ray Tubes......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.2 Stators................................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.3 AEC Devices......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.4 ABS Pickups ......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.5 Tomographic Tables............................................................................................................................. 1D-2
1D.2.6 Digital Interfaces (R&F Generators) ..................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.7 DAP (Dose Area Product)..................................................................................................................... 1D-3
1D.2.8 Options.................................................................................................................................................. 1D-3
1D.3.0 X-RAY TUBE DATA.................................................................................................................................. 1D-3
1D.4.0 COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION................................................................. 1D-4

1D Compatibility Listing CPI Canada Inc

Page 1D-2 Rev. C Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-02
1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This section details external equipment that is compatible with your specific generator, and lists options
that are included in that generator.

1D.2.0 COMPATIBLE DEVICES AND OPTIONS

The Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators may be factory or user configured to be compatible with
various external devices. Certain features must be factory configured, others are user configurable.
Please refer to chapter 2 and 3 of this manual and / or consult the factory for further specifics.

1D.2.1 X-Ray Tubes

Various makes and models of inserts and housings are supported.

CAUTION: PLEASE ENSURE THAT THE X-RAY TUBE INSERT IS AS STATED ON THE
COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION.
IF THE HOUSING HAS BEEN RELOADED WITH ANOTHER INSERT TYPE, CALIBRATION
MAY BE SERIOUSLY AFFECTED AND MAY CAUSE TUBE DAMAGE.

1D.2.2 Stators

Various types / impedances of stators are supported.

1D.2.3 AEC Devices

The Millenia / Indico 100 family of X-ray generators may be configured to be compatible with various AEC
devices (ionization, solid state or PMT) via the optional AEC board. Refer to the compatibility statement /
product description at the end of this section for AEC device compatibility of this specific generator.

1D.2.4 ABS Pickups

Various ABS pickups (light diode, composite video, PMT, etc) are supported on R&F generators
depending on configuration. Refer to the compatibility statement / product description at the end of this
section, and chapter 3E.

1D.2.5 Tomographic Tables

Various. Please note that the generator is used as a backup timer ONLY in tomography.
AEC is NOT available for tomography.

1D.2.6 Digital Interfaces (R&F Generators)

The generator may be configured to be compatible with various digital imaging systems. Refer to the
compatibility statement / product description at the end of this section.

1D.2.7 DAP (Dose Area Product)

A DAP (Dose-Area Product) meter is available as an option on Indico 100 X-ray generators. Refer to
chapter 3F for details.

1D.2.8 Options

Major options include AEC board, DAP (Indico 100 only), remote fluoro control unit, dual speed starter,
line adjusting transformer, and two tube HT transformer.

NOTE: REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION AT THE END OF THIS SECTION FOR COMPATIBILITY
OF THIS SPECIFIC GENERATOR.

1D.3.0 X-RAY TUBE DATA

PLEASE INSERT THE TUBE RATING CHARTS FOR THE X-RAY TUBES USED WITH THIS
GENERATOR.

TUBE #1
HOUSING (MAKE / MODEL):
INSERT (MAKE / MODEL):
SERIAL #:
STATOR TYPE:

TUBE #2
HOUSING (MAKE / MODEL):
INSERT (MAKE / MODEL):
SERIAL #:
STATOR TYPE:


1D.4.0 COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The compatibility statement / product description for this generator follows this page.

REPLACE (DISCARD) PAGE 5, 6
AND REPLACE WITH

"COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION FORM

1 PAGE FOR CS FORM
2 PAGES FOR PD FORM



CPI Canada Inc Generator Layout and Major Components 1E

Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-03 Rev. H Page 1E-1
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1E

GENERATOR LAYOUT AND
MAJOR COMPONENTS

CONTENTS:

1E.1.0 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................1E-1
1E.2.0 MAJ OR COMPONENT LAYOUT...............................................................................................................1E-2
1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly.................................................................................................................1E-2
1E.2.2 Console Assembly .................................................................................................................................1E-4
1E.2.3 Remote Fluoro Control...........................................................................................................................1E-6
1E.2.4 Dual Speed Starter EPROM location.....................................................................................................1E-6

1E.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This section contains generator layout drawings and figures that identify the major generator components and
circuit board assemblies.
This section also shows the location and correct orientation of the power EPROM (located on the
generator CPU board, the console EPROM (located on the console CPU board), and the dual speed starter
EPROM (located on the dual speed starter board if the dual speed starter option is used). Refer to the applicable
figures to ensure correct EPROM placement and orientation should EPROM replacement be necessary.
1E Generator Layout and Major Components CPI Canada Inc

Page 1E-2 Rev. H Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-03
1E.2.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT

1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly

The following major assemblies are located within the generator cabinet:
Auxiliary power supply.
Generator control circuits.
Room interface for the X-ray system.
Low speed starter or optional dual speed starter.
High frequency inverter.
H.T. transformer.
Optional AEC board (automatic exposure control).
Optional DAP interface board.

Figure 1E-1 shows the major components within the front and right side of the generator cabinet. Figure
1E-2 shows the major components accessible from the left side and the rear of the generator cabinet.

Figure 1E-1: Major generator subassemblies & power EPROM location

1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly (Cont)

Figure 1E-2: Major generator subassemblies (right side and rear)

1E.2.2 Console Assembly

Figure 1E-3 is an overview of the 23 X 56 cm console, the 31 X 42 cm console, the Rad-only console,
and the touch screen console for Indico 100 generators. Figure 1E-4 is an internal view of these console
styles (except touch screen), showing the major components and cabling in the console assembly.

The touch screen console contains no user serviceable parts, and must be returned to the factory for
service.

FILE: IN_CON1.CDR
INDICO 100
23 X 56 cm
Console
31 X 42 cm
Console
Rad only
Console
Touch Screen
Console

Figure 1E-3: Console top / external view

1E.2.2 Console Assembly (Cont)

Figure 1E-4: Console internal view including EPROM location

1E.2.3 Remote Fluoro Control

Figure 1E-5 is an overview of the optional remote fluoro control for the Indico 100 generators. This allows
operation of fluoro functions from a location other than the main console.

Figure 1E-5: Remote fluoro control unit overview

1E.2.4 Dual Speed Starter EPROM location

Figure 1E-6: EPROM location inside the dual speed starter
CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2

Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-04 Rev. AM Page 2-1
CHAPTER 2

INSTALLATION

CONTENTS:

2.1.0 INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.0 RECEIVING...................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.1 Major Shipping Assemblies....................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.0 REMOVAL FROM PACK...............................................................................................................................2-4
2.3.1 Lifting The Generator ................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.4.0 REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS.......................................................................................................2-6
2.5.0 LINE ADJ USTING TRANSFORMER ............................................................................................................2-8
2.6.0 MAJ OR COMPONENT LAYOUT ..................................................................................................................2-8
2.7.0 INSPECTING THE HT TANK ........................................................................................................................2-8
2.8.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT ..........................................................................................................................2-8
2.8.1 Equipment Cabinet .................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.2 Control Console......................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.3 Anchoring The Generator To The Floor .................................................................................................... 2-9
2.8.4 Leveling ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.9.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR....................................................................................................................2-9
2.9.1 Control Console......................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.9.2 Remote Fluoro Control (Optional) ........................................................................................................... 2-12
2.9.3 Hand Switch Installation.......................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.9.4 X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections................................................................................ 2-14
2.9.5 Generator Mains Connection .................................................................................................................. 2-15
2.9.6 Room Equipment..................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.9.7 Emergency Power Off / Power Distribution Relay .................................................................................. 2-16
2.10.0 X-RAY TUBE HOUSING GROUND..........................................................................................................2-16
2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES..........................................................................................................................2-16
2.12.0 PROGRAMMING THE LOW SPEED STARTER.......................................................................................2-18
2.12.1 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table .................................................................................................. 2-18
2.12.2 Low Speed Starter Boost Voltage Selection ......................................................................................... 2-18
2.12.3 Low Speed Starter Run Voltage Selection............................................................................................ 2-20
2.12.4 Low Speed Starter Boost Time Selection ............................................................................................. 2-21
2.13.0 PROGRAMMING THE DUAL SPEED STARTER.....................................................................................2-21
2.13.1 Setting tube type ................................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type ............................................................................................... 2-23
2.13.3 Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table ................................................................................................. 2-25
2.13.4 Configuring dual speed starter 733317-08 / 735925-08 ....................................................................... 2-25
2.14.0 GENERATOR LOCKOUT SWITCH..........................................................................................................2-26
2.15.0 SAFETY INTERLOCKS.............................................................................................................................2-27
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE ...........................................................................2-27
2.17.0 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS...........................................................................................................................2-31
2.18.0 INITIAL RUN-UP .......................................................................................................................................2-32
2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements................................................................................................................ 2-32
2.18.2 Initial Power Up ..................................................................................................................................... 2-33
2.18.3 Single Phase Primary Tap Selection..................................................................................................... 2-34
2.18.4 Three Phase Primary Tap Selection ..................................................................................................... 2-36
2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.

Page 2-2 Rev. AM Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-04
2.19.0 PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION USING THE CONSOLE ..............................................................2-37
2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode....................................................................................... 2-37
2.19.2 Menu Selections.................................................................................................................................... 2-38
2.20.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION.....................................................................................................................2-40
2.21.0 FINAL CHECKS.........................................................................................................................................2-41

2.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter contains instructions for unpacking, positioning, and cabling the Indico 100 series of
generators to allow initial operation and calibration. The instructions in this chapter allows the installation
engineer to:
Install the generator and control console.
Install the optional remote fluoro control.
Connect power.
Calibrate one or two X-ray tube(s), depending on the generator model, without completing the room
interface connections. This allows for simpler installation and troubleshooting on the generator itself.

2.2.0 RECEIVING

WARNING: THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: UPPER AND
LOWER CABINETS (FACTORY ASSEMBLED), CONTROL CONSOLE, AND AN OPTIONAL
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL.

THE COMPLETE GENERATOR WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 250 POUNDS (115 KG) IN ITS
SHIPPING CONTAINER.
THE OPTIONAL LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IS SUPPLIED IN A SEPARATE
ENCLOSURE, THE WEIGHT OF THAT ASSEMBLY IS APPROXIMATELY 100 POUNDS (45
KG).

THE OIL TANK IS LOCATED IN THE LOWER (POWER SUPPLY) CABINET. ONE PERSON
SHOULD NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT OR MOVE THE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY OR OPTIONAL
LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER WITHOUT ADEQUATE ASSISTANCE OR PROPER
EQUIPMENT.


2.2.1 Major Shipping Assemblies

Refer to figure 1A-2 (chapter 1A). This shows the upper (control cabinet) and lower (power supply)
cabinet fully assembled, along with the control console and optional remote fluoro control unit.

2.3.0 REMOVAL FROM PACK

1. Inspect the pack for evidence of shipping damage. If there is evidence of shipping damage, note
this in the event that a damage claim is justified.

2. Locate any documentation attached to the outside of the cardboard sleeve. Be sure to read and
understand this documentation before unpacking the generator. Then set this documentation
aside temporarily until it can be transferred to a storage location close to the generator for future
reference.

3. Remove the cardboard outer pack(s).

CAUTION: OPEN THE CARDBOARD PACK(S) CAREFULLY. SHARP TOOLS MAY DAMAGE THE
CONTENTS.

4. Set aside the cardboard pack(s).

5. Unscrew the bolts that secure the generator to the shipping pallet. Carefully lift the generator
from the pallet. Refer to 2.3.1 for the procedure for lifting the generator.

6. Inspect for internal and external shipping damage. Refer to 2.4.0 for instructions for removing the
external covers.

7. Unscrew the leveling feet at the bottom of the generator by a minimum of 1 in. (35 mm). This
will provide the required air flow underneath the generator cabinet and allow room to make
leveling adjustments when the generator is placed in its final location.

8. Remove and unpack the control console, the optional line adjusting transformer if used, the
optional remote fluoro control if used, and the optional hand switch kit if included, and check
these items for any damage.

9. Remove and unpack the manuals and any other paperwork that may be packed with the
generator.

10. Keep the shipping containers. In case of shipping damage, place the unit(s) back in its shipping
pack and notify the carrier and the customer support group at CPI Canada Inc.

2.3.1 Lifting The Generator

One of the following methods is recommended for lifting or maneuvering the generator. Since the
generator weighs more that 30 kg (65 lbs), proper lifting equipment should be used or additional help
should be obtained to lift the unit. Refer to figure 1E-1 and figure 2-2 for identification of the panels
referenced below.

Lifting straps can be used along with a hoist to raise the generator. The straps should be placed
underneath the generator cabinet and along the four sides to properly support the cabinet as it is
raised.

Remove the main access panel and the lower wiring access panel from the generator cabinet (refer
to 2.4.0 - removing the external covers). The metal cross brace found at the front of the cabinet
(below the circuit board mounting panel) may be used, in conjunction with the lip at the upper edge of
the opening for the lower wiring access panel, as lifting points. Two people (one on each side) will be
required to lift or maneuver the generator cabinet.

Figure 2-1: Generator lifting points

2.4.0 REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS

NOTE: A POTENTIAL HAZARD EXISTS TO OPERATORS, SERVICE PERSONNEL, OR TO THE
EQUIPMENT IF THE GENERATOR IS OPERATED WITH ANY OF THE GROUND LEADS TO THE
EXTERNAL COVERS DISCONNECTED OR IMPROPERLY CONNECTED.

BE SURE TO PROPERLY RECONNECT ALL GROUND LEADS AFTER COMPLETING ANY
PROCEDURE THAT REQUIRES THEIR REMOVAL.

REFER TO FIGURE 2-2 FOR IDENTIFICATION OF COVERS / PANELS DESCRIBED IN THIS
SECTION.

Upper Cabinet Hood
Remove the four screws that secure the upper cabinet hood to the generator (two on each side).
Carefully lift the hood off the generator. Temporarily disconnect the ground lead connecting the upper
cabinet hood to the generator, if necessary.
Reverse the above steps to reconnect the ground wire(s), and to reinstall the upper cabinet hood.

Main Access Panel
Remove the upper cabinet hood as described above (this must be done before the main access panel
can be removed). Then remove the screws that secure the main access panel to the generator cabinet
(these screws are located on both sides of the main access panel). The panel may then be pulled away
from the frame. Temporarily disconnect the ground lead connecting the panel to the cabinet, if necessary.
Reverse the above steps to reconnect the ground wire(s), and to reinstall the access panel.

Lower Wiring Access Panel
THIS PANEL IS NOT FITTED IF THE OPTIONAL WIRING CHANNELS ARE USED.
Remove the screw from the upper right hand corner of the panel. Pull out the snaps on the three nylon
fasteners such as to release the panel. Remove the panel from the generator.

Upper & Lower Wiring Channels
The wiring channels are optional. If the wiring channels are fitted, the cable access covers in the upper
part of the cabinet and the lower wiring access panel will not be used.

To remove these panels, remove the screws from the upper left hand and upper right hand corner of the
panel to be removed. Then slide the wiring channel up such that the shoulder rivets clear the keyhole slot
at the bottom of the channel. The wiring channel may then be removed from the generator.

2.4.0 REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS (Cont)

Figure 2-2: Removable external covers on generator cabinet

2.5.0 LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER

An optional line-adjusting transformer is available if required to allow 480 VAC generators to operate from
400 VAC mains, or to allow 400 VAC generators to be operated from 480 VAC mains. The line adjusting
transformer is supplied in a separate enclosure. Please consult the factory for further details regarding
this option.

2.6.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT

Refer to chapter 1E for major component identification and layout.

2.7.0 INSPECTING THE HT TANK

Before continuing with the installation of the generator, the HT oil tank should be inspected as per the
following steps:

Verify that there is no obvious shipping damage to the tank (i.e. dents to the tank surface).
Carefully check the inside of the generator cabinet and the HT tank for evidence of any oil loss. Refer
to chapter 6 if it is suspected that there has been some loss of oil.
Verify that the clamps supporting the HT oil tank are tight.
Verify that all the connections to the tank lid are secure.
Verify that the rubber vent plug on the top of the tank is snug.

2.8.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT

2.8.1 Equipment Cabinet

Place the equipment cabinet in a location that will allow the following:

Easy front and side access for service and sufficient clearance at the rear for room interface cables.
Refer to chapter 1C.
Air circulation - a minimum height of 1 in. (35 mm) is recommended to allow airflow underneath the
generator. Do not cover or block the cooling slots on the cabinet.
Stable footing - the leveling feet at the bottom of the cabinet will be used to prevent movement during
normal operation.
Close proximity to service disconnect boxes - cables should not be on the floor where they could be
stepped on.

2.8.2 Control Console

Locate the control console in its intended position and ensure that it is stable. Refer to chapter 1C:

If the console is located on a shelf, supply index pins or equivalent hardware to the base of the
console to prevent slipping.
Ensure that the console is mounted at a height and angle to allow easy viewing of the displays.
If the optional CPI pedestal stand is to be used for the console mounting, follow the mounting
instructions supplied with the stand.
Leave sufficient slack in the cabling to the console to allow for future service and maintenance.

2.8.2 Control Console (Cont)

NOTE: DO NOT LOCATE THE CONTROL CONSOLE WHERE X-RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT DURING
INSTALLATION OR OPERATION.

NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE CONSOLE CABLE NOT BE DISASSEMBLED FOR SYSTEM
INSTALLATION. HOWEVER, IF THIS IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY TO ROUTE THE CABLE,
PLEASE ENSURE CAREFUL AND CORRECT REASSEMBLY OF THE CONNECTOR SHELL TO
AVOID ANY POSSIBILITY OF PINCHING OF THE INTERNAL WIRES BY THE SHELL.

YOU MAY CHOOSE TO TEMPORARILY LOCATE THE CONSOLE NEAR TO THE GENERATOR FOR
INITIAL PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION. IF THIS IS SO, PLEASE COMPLETE THE FINAL
CONSOLE INSTALLATION PER THIS SECTION WHEN THE GENERATOR INSTALLATION IS
COMPLETED.

2.8.3 Anchoring The Generator To The Floor

If it is desired to anchor the generator to the floor, refer to chapter 1C. This should not be done until all
cable hookups are completed that require rear access to the generator.

2.8.4 Leveling

Adjust the leveling feet such that the generator is level and stable. This adjustment must be made for
both anchored and freestanding generator installations. As noted in 2.3.0, the leveling feet must be
unscrewed by a minimum of 1 in. (35 mm) to allow for proper airflow underneath the generator.

2.9.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR

2.9.1 Control Console

1. Route the generator end of the console cable into the generator cabinet via the access cover in
the upper part of the cabinet nearest to J 4 on the generator interface board.

2. Connect the console cable to J 4 on the generator interface board. For the Rad-only console,
connect the console cable to J 16 on the generator interface board.

3. Connect the free end of the console cable as follows:
For the 23 X 56 (cm) console and the 31 X 42 (cm) console, connect the free end of the console
cable to J 5 at the rear of the console.
For the Rad-only console, connect the free end of the console cable to the J 8 at the rear of the
console.
For the touch screen console, connect the free end of the console cable to J 2 on the touch
screen interface board at the rear of the console.

Ensure that the screw locks are fully tightened to secure the connectors.


4. FOR THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE ONLY:
a) Connect one end of the supplied ground wire to the touch screen console ground screw,
shown in figure 2-3. Connect the other end of the ground wire to one of the ground studs on
the generator chassis, under the room interface board.
b) Connect the supplied line cord from the rear of the touch screen to the generator as follows:
Green (ground) to one of the ground studs on the generator chassis, under the room
interface board.
White (neutral) to any terminal on TB7 on the room interface board.
Black (line) to any terminal on TB9 on the room interface board.
c) J W1 on the generator interface board should be set such that the 110 / 220 VAC supply on
the room interface board is on at all times that the generator main disconnect is switched on.
The procedure for setting this jumper is described in chapter 3B.

THE POWER CABLE FOR THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE MUST BE CONNECTED TO
THE GENERATOR AS DESCRIBED ABOVE, AND NOT CONNECTED TO AN
INDEPENDENT SOURCE OF AC. THE CONSOLE REQUIRES THE LINE ISOLATION
PROVIDED BY THE ROOM INTERFACE TRANSFORMER IN THE GENERATOR IN
ORDER TO MEET IEC REGULATIONS.

5. Figure 2-3 shows the designations and functions of the connectors on the rear panel of the
control console.

DO NOT CONNECT UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT TO THE REAR OF THE CONSOLE.
cabinet, J 4 is not used, J 2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J 1 is for
connection of an optional printer.
cabinet, J 2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J 13 is for connection of an
external hand switch and / or foot switch.
For the Rad-only console, J 3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J 4 is a serial port
for use by an external computer, and J 8 is for the interconnect cable to the main cabinet.
For the touch screen console, J 2 on the touch screen interface board is for the interconnect
cable to the generator main cabinet, J 3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J 5
connects to the membrane switch assembly with the on / off and prep / expose switches, and
J 4 is a serial port for use by an external computer.
INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.


Figure 2-3: Rear of control console

2.9.2 Remote Fluoro Control (Optional)

1. Connect the free end of the 9 conductor remote fluoro cable (from the optional remote fluoro
control box) to J 11 of the generator CPU board. Ensure that the screw locks are fully tightened to
secure the connector. Refer to figure 2-4 for the location of J 11 on the generator CPU board. The
cable should be routed into the generator via the access cover in the upper part of the cabinet
closest to J 11 on the generator CPU board.

Figure 2-4: Remote fluoro connector on generator CPU board

2.9.3 Hand Switch Installation

FOR 23 X 56 (CM) CONSOLES:
The optional hand switch is supplied as a kit that must be user installed. If this option is used, refer to
separate installation instructions packaged along with the hand switch.
For reference, a drawing is supplied in this section showing the hand switch connections to the
console CPU board. See figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5: Hand switch connections on console CPU board

2.9.3 Hand Switch Installation (Cont)

FOR 31 X 42 (CM) CONSOLES, RAD-ONLY CONSOLES, AND TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES:
The optional hand switch, if ordered from CPI Canada Inc, is supplied pre-wired to a male 9 pin
subminiature D connector. This connects to J 13 on the rear of the 31 X 42 cm console, to J 3 on the rear
of the Rad-only console, or to J 3 on the touch screen interface board on the rear of the touch screen
console.
Fluoro foot switch connections may also be made to this connector (31 X 42 cm console with fluoro
option only). For the touch screen console, the fluoro foot switch connections must be made to the room
interface board as per chapter 3B.
The table below shows the pin designations for the hand switch connector on the console. A male 9 pin
subminiature D connector will need to be provided by the installer if the CPI supplied hand switch is not
used.

PIN
NUMBER
J13 PIN CONNECTIONS
31 X 42 CM CONSOLE
J3 PIN CONNECTIONS
RAD-ONLY CONSOLE
AND TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE
1 Hand Switch: X-Ray Hand Switch: X-Ray
2 No Connection No Connection
3 Hand Switch: Prep Hand Switch: Prep
4 No Connection No Connection
5 Hand Switch: Common (ground) Hand Switch: Common (ground)
6 No Connection NOT USED
7 Foot Switch: live terminal NOT USED
8 No Connection NOT USED
9 Foot Switch: ground terminal NOT USED

2.9.4 X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections

Refer to figure 2-6 for the X-ray tube stator and thermal switch connections.

1. Route the X-ray tube stator cable(s) through the lower wiring access panel panel on the rear of
the generator cabinet, then route the cables towards the stator terminal blocks as shown in the
figure below.

FOR UNITS WITH A LOW SPEED STARTER, SHIELDED STATOR CABLES ARE
RECOMMENDED. FOR UNITS WITH A DUAL SPEED STARTER, SHIELDED STATOR
CABLES MUST BE USED.
THE SHIELD FOR THE STATOR CABLE(S) MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED AT
THE CHASSIS GROUND STUD(S) SHOWN IN FIGURE 2-6.

2. Connect the wires to the appropriate terminal as shown. The tube thermal switch will normally be
connected to the THERMAL SWITCH connections on the stator terminal block, but may
optionally be connected to the room interface board (refer to chapter 3B).

3. Ensure that all terminal connections are tight, then dress and secure the cables.

NOTE: ONE TUBE ONLY GENERATORS WILL HAVE 1 STATOR TERMINAL BLOCK FITTED. THE
LOWER TERMINAL BLOCK IN FIGURE 2-6 IS ONLY FITTED ON TWO TUBE GENERATORS.

Figure 2-6: Stator connections to generator

2.9.5 Generator Mains Connection

WARNING: TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS DISCONNECT IS LOCKED
IN THE OFF POSITION, AND THAT ALL MAINS CABLES ARE DE-ENERGIZED BEFORE
CONNECTING TO THE GENERATOR.

Refer to chapter 1C for generator power and generator power line requirements.

1. Pass the AC mains cable through the access hole located at the lower rear of the generator.

2. Use an appropriate cable clamp to secure the mains cable at the cabinet entrance.

3. Temporarily remove the safety cover from the main fuses. Strip sufficient cable jacket to allow the
ground wire to reach the main ground connector located at the left side of the main fuse block.
Refer to figure 2-7.

4. Connect the ground wire to the chassis ground connector, and connect the mains wires to the
terminals on the bottom of the main fuse holder (3 wires for 3 phase systems, 2 wires for single
phase systems). Be sure to replace the main fuse safety cover after all connections are made
and properly tightened.

5. DO NOT SWITCH ON MAINS POWER AT THIS TIME.

Figure 2-7: Generator mains connections

2.9.6 Room Equipment

Refer to chapter 3B, 3D, 3E, and 3F for connection of the room equipment (Buckys, miscellaneous inputs
and outputs, AEC, ABS, DAP, etc.). It is suggested that these items not be connected until after the initial
run-up of the generator is complete, and the tube auto calibration has been performed as described near
the end of this chapter.

2.9.7 Emergency Power Off / Power Distribution Relay

To connect an external emergency power-off switch, disconnect the jumper from J 17-1 to J 17-2 on the
generator interface board. Then connect the emergency-off switch to J 17-1 and J 17-2. Refer to MD-0762
in chapter 9.
For installations where installer-supplied auxiliary power distribution circuits are added to the
generator, 24 VDC is available on the generator interface board to drive the coil of the power distribution
relay. Connect the coil to J 17-3 (+) and J 17-4 (ground). Refer to MD-0788 in chapter 9. The maximum
current available from this source is 100 mA.

2.10.0 X-RAY TUBE HOUSING GROUND

A separate ground wire (10 AWG, 6mm
2
) must be connected from each X-ray tube housing to one of the
ground studs on the HT tank. Refer to figure 2-8 or 2-9. These ground locations may have other ground
wires already connected, ensure that these existing ground wires are not disconnected when making the
X-ray tube ground connection.

Failure to make this ground connection may result in intermittent operation and/or exposure errors.

2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES

The X-ray tube(s) should be mounted on their normal fixtures i.e. tube stand, G.I. table or other devices.

1. Verify that the HT cable terminations are clean, in good condition i.e. no cracks, and coated with
vapor proof compound.

2. Remove the plastic caps that cover the high voltage terminals on the HT tank. These should be
saved in case of a future requirement to transport the generator or HT tank.

3. Connect the high tension cables as per the installation requirements. Use the right angle
connectors for the HT transformer end. Ensure that the cables for tube 1 (and tube 2 if used) are
plugged into the proper connectors on the HT tank. Refer to figure 2-8 and 2-9.
On two tube R&F generators, the fan may need to be removed in order to install
the tube 2 HT connectors. To do this, disconnect the AC power leads from the fan. Next,
remove and temporarily set aside the two socket - head screws and washers from the fan
mounting bracket. Slide the fan assembly forward, and then remove the fan assembly to
connect the HT cables.
To re-install the fan assembly, slide the fan assembly into position under the
inverter assembly, using the tabs on the mounting bracket to support the inside end of the
bracket. Replace the screws and washers to secure the fan assembly. Lastly, reconnect
the AC power leads to the fan.

4. Be sure that the HT cable connectors are tight and there is no play between the connector
insulator and the screw down ring.

2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES (cont)

Figure 2-8: HV connectors (1 tube tanks) Figure 2-9: HV connectors (2 tube tanks)

NOTE: PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING IF USING METAL CENTER SECTION X-RAY TUBES

The mA feedback signals, as measured at the mA test points on the control board, represent anode mA.
X-ray emission in the tube is a result of the anode current.

The mA measured at terminals E17 - E18 of the HT tank is cathode current. In a metal center section
tube, the anode current will be less than the cathode current, the difference being body current. In a metal
center section tube, the cathode current may exceed the anode current by up to 15%. Although the
anode and cathode currents may be unequal, the anode to cathode kV regulation is not affected.

Due to the presence of body current, filament drive and emission may need to be greater than expected
for a given mA station. The power lost to body current may need to be considered relative to the
maximum generator output.

When installing a metal center section tube, it is essential that the center section of the X-ray tube be
securely grounded; otherwise premature tube failure may result.

2.12.0 PROGRAMMING THE LOW SPEED STARTER

This section applies only to units fitted with the low speed starter.

PLEASE BE SURE TO READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS SECTION FULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING.

Before continuing, note the part number of the low speed starter in the generator. Part number 732752-00
has a 33 F phase-shift capacitor; part number 732752-01 has a 12.5 F capacitor, and part number
732752-02 has a 45 F capacitor. Confirm that the phase shift capacitor is compatible with the desired
tube(s) as listed in table 1 in Supplement 746026, which follows chapter 2.

The starter boost voltage is set to approximately 240 VAC, (except where specifically noted in table 1),
and the starter run voltage is selectable to be 52, 73, or 94 VAC. Boost times are selectable to be either
1.5 seconds, or 2.5 seconds. Therefore, the generator may be configured to be compatible with stator
types as per table 1 only.

If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact CPI product support for assistance.

WARNING: 240 VAC IS PRESENT ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE
GENERATOR IS SWITCHED ON. TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING
THIS BOARD

2.12.1 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table

See Supplement 746026, which immediately follows this chapter.

2.12.2 Low Speed Starter Boost Voltage Selection

THIS APPLIES TO ONE-TUBE GENERATORS ONLY.

Follow the steps below to verify and configure the correct low speed starter boost voltage.

1. Confirm the required BOOST VOLTAGE for the selected tube type per table 1 in supplement
746026, which follows chapter 2. The requirement for the vast majority of tubes in table 1 is 240
V. For tubes that require 120 V boost, this is noted along with the run voltage, boost time, etc for
that tube.
Refer to figure 2-10 (power supply auxiliary transformer). Locate this transformer under the
power input board; refer to chapter 1E for details.
If there is only one connection on the 120V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer, the
boost voltage is set to 240 VAC.
If there are two connections on the 120V tap, the boost voltage is set to 120 VAC.
Confirm the correct boost voltage at F1 on the low speed starter board if a suitable voltmeter
is available.
Go to 2.12.3 if the boost voltage is properly set for the selected tube type and therefore does
NOT need to be changed.

2.12.2 Low Speed Starter Boost Voltage Selection (Cont)

THIS APPLIES TO ONE-TUBE GENERATORS ONLY.

2. If the boost voltage tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed from
240V to 120V, proceed as follows:
Loosen the clamping screws for the 240V tap and for the 120V tap.
Move the boost voltage lead from the 240V tap to the 120V tap. The boost voltage lead is the
lead that connects directly to J 1 on the low speed starter board. Do not disturb the other
leads on the 120V and / or 240V taps.
Ensure that the wires are positioned between the two metal clamps on the transformer
terminal block.
Retighten both of the clamping screws.
is available.

3. If the boost voltage tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed from
120V to 240V, proceed as follows:
Loosen the clamping screws for the 120V tap and for the 240V tap.
Move the boost voltage lead from the 120V tap to the 240V tap. The boost voltage lead is the
lead that connects directly to J 1 on the low speed starter board. Do not disturb the other
leads on the 120V and / or 240V taps
Ensure that the wires are positioned between the two metal clamps on the transformer
terminal block.
is available.

2.12.3 Low Speed Starter Run Voltage Selection

Follow the steps below to verify and configure the correct low speed starter run-voltage.

1. Note the required RUN VOLTAGE for the selected tube type per table 1 in Supplement 746026
which follows chapter 2. Then confirm the low speed starter run-voltage in the generator. This is
determined by the run-voltage setting on the power supply auxiliary transformer. Refer to figure
2-10.
Locate this transformer under the power input board; refer to chapter 1E for details.
Locate the run-voltage output on the transformer. This will be set to the 52V, 73V, or 94V tap,
and must match the required run-voltage for the selected tube in table 1.
Go to 2.12.4 if the run-voltage setting is correct for the selected tube type, and therefore does
NOT need to be changed.

2. If the run-voltage setting on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed, proceed
as follows:
Loosen the clamping screws for the current run-voltage tap, and for the required run-voltage
tap.
Move the run-voltage output lead from the current tap position to the required tap position
(52V, 73V, or 94V). Ensure that the wire is positioned between the two metal clamps on the
transformer terminal block.

Figure 2-10: Low speed run-voltage tap selection

2.12.4 Low Speed Starter Boost Time Selection

Follow the steps below to verify and configure the low speed starter boost time.

1. Confirm the current low speed starter boost time selection:
Locate jumper J W1 on the auxiliary board. Refer to chapter 1E for the board location.
Confirm that the current boost time setting matches the tube in use: J umper position 1.5S =
1.5 second boost, no jumper at J W1 =2.5 second boost. Do not use the .15S position.

2. If required, adjust the boost time by changing the J W1 jumper position as described above.

NOTE: CONFIRM PROPER LOW SPEED STARTER CONFIGURATION USING A SUITABLE TACHOMETER
BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURES.

2.13.0 PROGRAMMING THE DUAL SPEED STARTER

This section applies only to units fitted with the dual speed starter option.

The dual speed starter must be programmed for the X-ray tube type(s) used at this site. This is done via
DIP switches SW1 and SW2 on the dual speed starter.

The following tube functions are set with these switches:
High speed start and run voltages
Low speed start and run voltages
Brake time and brake voltage (high speed)
Boost times
Boost time increments. Boost time may be increased in 100 ms steps in the range of 100 to 700 ms

SW1 and SW2 on the dual speed starter must be set correctly to match the X-ray tube(s) in
use. Failure to set these correctly may result in improper anode RPM and therefore may
damage the X-ray tube.
PLEASE BE SURE TO READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS SECTION FULLY BEFORE
PROCEEDING.

2.13.1 Setting tube type

1. Select the desired tube type from table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2.
Record the tube type number (housing and insert) and the binary code as per the third column in
the table. Please note that the tube compatibility applies only to the housing and inserts listed, i.e.
for the specific manufacturer(s) shown.

2. If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact CPI product support for assistance.

3. The generator is factory configured to support one type of stator only (for example R type
stator), therefore only stators of that type may be used with this generator. Refer to the customer
product description form in chapter 1D of this manual for compatible X-ray tubes.
REFER TO SECTION 2.13.2 IF IT IS DESIRED TO USE TUBES WITH STATOR TYPES
NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS GENERATOR, OR IF YOU ARE NOT CERTAIN THAT THIS
GENERATOR IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE STATOR IN YOUR TUBE.

2.13.1 Setting tube type (cont)

4. Refer to figure 2-11. Set the DIP switch SW1 (for tube 1) with the binary code for the selected
tube. The binary code shown in the table programs the tube type (housing and insert), for
example housing type Varian Diamond with standard R stator and inserts per table 2 in
Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2, requires SW1-1 to be set OFF, SW1-2 OFF, SW1-
3 ON, SW1-4 OFF and SW1-5 OFF. This programs the voltages, brake times, and boost times in
table 2.
Additionally, SW1-6 to SW1-8 may be set to give incremental increases in boost time
over the preselected values (for example to run an older tube with worn bearings). For example,
binary 000 gives zero increase, binary 001 gives 100 ms increase, binary 100 gives 400 ms
increase, and binary 111 gives a 700 ms increase in boost time. SW1-6 represents bit 1, SW1-7
bit 2, and SW1-8 represents bit 3.

EXAMPLE:
Binary 100 =decimal 4 =400 ms incremental boost time increase:

1 0 0
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
SW1-8 SW1-7 SW1-6

5. The example DIP switch setting shown in figure 2-11 is for the example in step 4 with an
incremental increase in boost time of 200 ms.

6. If this is a two-tube installation, repeat steps 1 to 4 using DIP switch SW2 for the second tube.

7. Please confirm all settings using a suitable tachometer to ensure proper anode RPM
before making any exposures.

NOTE: FOR TUBES WHERE LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED
STARTER MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR LOW SPEED ONLY, AND WHERE HIGH SPEED
OPERATION ONLY IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED STARTER MUST BE
PROGRAMMED FOR HIGH SPEED OPERATION ONLY. REFER TO THE TUBE SELECTION
SECTION IN CHAPTER 3C FOR THE PROCEDURE TO DO THIS.

NOTE THAT THE EXAMPLE DIP SWITCH SHOWN IN FIGURE 2-11 IS REPRESENTATIVE
OF ONE STYLE OF SWITCH ONLY. DEPENDING ON MANUFACTURER, YOUR DIP SWITCH
STYLE MAY VARY. PLEASE NOTE THE ON/OFF POSITIONS CAREFULLY FOR YOUR
UNIT.

2.13.1 Setting tube type (cont)

Figure 2-11: DIP switches on dual speed starter.

2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type

The low speed and high speed phase shift capacitors for the stator start winding must be matched to the
desired stator type, for example the required high speed phase shift capacitor is 6 uF for R type stators
and 7.5 uF for GE Maxiray type stators. Therefore, for example, a dual speed starter configured for an R
type stator CANNOT drive a GE Maxiray type stator.
Use the steps in this section to verify that the dual speed starter is compatible with the stator in
the desired tube.

1. Record the part number of the dual speed starter assembly in the subject generator. This is
printed on a label near the top of the dual speed starter chassis.

2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type (Cont)

2. Locate that part number in table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2, then note the
value of the H.S. SHIFT CAPAC and the L.S. SHIFT CAPAC per the table. Those are the values
of the phase shift capacitors in the dual speed starter. Only tubes requiring those capacitor
values may be connected to the dual speed starter.
3. If it is desired to use a different tube from that shown in the compatible X-ray tubes section of the
customer product description form, confirm that the desired tube (housing and insert) is listed in
table 2 AND that the required dual speed starter part number for that tube per table 2 is the same
as is fitted in your generator.
4. If the preceding steps confirm that the desired tube is fully compatible with the generator, you
may proceed with setting the tube type as per section 2.13.1.
5. If in the preceding steps it is determined that the desired stator IS NOT compatible with the
generator, the phase shift capacitors in the dual speed starter will need to be changed to match
the requirements of the desired tube. Replacement capacitor kits are available to do this as noted
in the next step.
6. Note the required H.S. SHIFT CAPAC and L.S. SHIFT CAPAC values, and the corresponding
dual speed starter part number for the desired tube per table 2. Using those capacitor values,
refer to table 2-1. From this table select the required conversion kit to convert to capacitors as
required for the selected tube. The conversion kits are available through the factory/customer
support.
IF MAKING THE ABOVE CONVERSION, PLEASE BE SURE TO CHANGE THE PART
NUMBER IDENTIFIED IN STEP 1 TO THE NEW CONFIGURATION USING AN INDELIBLE
MARKER. THIS WILL ENSURE THAT CONFIGURATION CONTROL OF THE PRODUCT IS
MAINTAINED
TABLE 2-1
HIGH SPD SHIFT CAPAC LOW SPD SHIFT CAPAC CONVERSION KIT P/N
6 uF 31uF 734424-00
7.5 uF 47 uF 734424-01
20 uF 60 uF 734424-02
5 uF 30 uF 734424-03
5 uF 45 uF 734424-04
3.4 uF N/A 734424-05
6 uF 46 uF 734424-07
5 uF / 6 uF 30 / 31 uF 734424-08
12.5 uF 37.5 uF 734424-09

NOTE: CAPACITOR VALUES SHOWN IN TABLES 1 AND 2 (IN SUPPLEMENT 746026) ARE
EQUIVALENT VALUES OF THE PHASE SHIFT CAPACITORS IN THE DUAL SPEED
STARTER. FOR EXAMPLE, THE STANDARD R VERSION OF THE DUAL SPEED
STARTER USES TWO 12.5 uF CAPACITORS CONNECTED IN SERIES TO GIVE NOMINAL 6
uF FOR HIGH SPEED USE. THIS 6 uF CAPACITANCE IS CONNECTED IN PARALLEL WITH
A 25 uF CAPACITOR TO GIVE 31 uF FOR LOW SPEED USE AS SHOWN IN THE TABLES.

2.13.3 Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table

See Supplement 746026, which immediately follows this chapter.

2.13.4 Configuring dual speed starter 733317-08 / 735925-08

Dual speed starter part number 733317-08 / 735925-08 is a special configuration in which the phase shift
capacitors may be set to 5 and 30 uF, or to 6 and 31 uF. This is intended for use in installations where it
may be necessary to interface to either IAE tubes, or to R stator tubes.
Refer to figure 2-12. In configuration A, (5 / 30 uF) each of the leads on the upper left capacitor
is connected to one side of the capacitor. Thus the capacitor is in-circuit in this configuration.
Configuration B (6 / 31 uF) has both leads connected to terminals on the same side of the capacitor,
thus the capacitor is out of the circuit.
To change from configuration A to B, disconnect the right hand lead from the upper left capacitor
in figure 2-12, and connect it to one of the spare terminals on the terminal cluster that has the other
capacitor lead connected to it. This removes that capacitor from the circuit.
To change from configuration B to A in figure 2-12, disconnect one of the leads from the terminal
cluster on the left side of the capacitor shown in the figure, and connect it to one of the terminals on
the other side of the capacitor. This connects the capacitor into the circuit.

After the phase shift capacitors are correctly configured, set the DIP switches as follows:
Locate the desired IAE or R type tube in table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2.
With dual speed starter 733317-08 / 735925-08 set to configuration B, it is only compatible with R
stator tubes using dual speed starter 733317-01 / 735925-01. When set to configuration A, it is only
compatible with IAE tubes using dual speed starter 733317-05 / 735925-05.
Note the DIP switch setting for the desired tube as per table 2.
Set the DIP switches as per 2.13.1.

Figure 2-12: Selection of phase shift capacitance

2.14.0 GENERATOR LOCKOUT SWITCH

A safety lockout switch (S3) is provided on the generator interface board. When this switch is in the
LOCKOUT position, the generator cannot be switched on either from the console or from the adjacent
service switch S2 on the generator interface board. This prevents inadvertent switching on of the
generator while it is being serviced.
S3, the generator lockout switch, must be in the NORMAL position to enable switching the
generator on. Refer to figure 2-13 for these switch locations.

Figure 2-13: Location of lockout switch and local ON/OFF switches

2.15.0 SAFETY INTERLOCKS

It is strongly recommended that the following two interlocks be wired to the generator before preparing to
make any exposures:

DOOR INTERLOCK
The room door interlock switch must be wired to TB4-4 and TB4-5 on the room Interface board. This
switch will provide a closed contact when the door is closed.

X-RAY TUBE THERMAL SWITCH
The X-ray tube(s) thermal switch(s) should be connected to the generator for tube thermal protection.
These may be connected either at the stator terminal blocks (section 2.9.4), or at the room interface
board. The connections on the room interface board are TB4-8 and TB4-9 for tube 1, and TB4-6 and
TB4-7 for tube 2.

2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE

It is recommended that the backup battery voltage be checked before continuing. The normal life
expectancy of these batteries is estimated at 5 years.

CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 X 56 cm consoles):

1. Turn the operator console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove the 6 screws
securing the base to the molded case.

2. Open the Console carefully such that the interconnecting cables are not strained.

3. Locate the battery on the console CPU board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage
with a DVM. The top of the battery is the positive side; ground (TP2 on the board) is the negative
side.

4. The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under
2.80V.

5. Before closing the console, refer to section 2.17.0, console CPU board DIP switch settings.

6. Re-assemble the console. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN THE SCREWS SECURING THE BASE TO
THE MOLDED CONSOLE TOP.

CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 cm consoles):

The RAM backup battery and EPROM are accessible by removing an access cover on the bottom of the
console. To remove the access cover, remove the screw holding the cover, and then remove the access
cover. This cover is reinstalled by sliding the end opposite the screw hole into the slot formed in the
console bottom, then by replacing and tightening the fastening screw. Refer to figure 2-14.

1. Locate the battery on the console board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage with a
DVM. The easiest way to do is to measure the voltage across C23, the capacitor directly below
the battery. This capacitor is in parallel with the battery.

2.80V.

3. Before closing the console, refer to section 2.17.0, console CPU board DIP switch settings.

2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE (Cont)

Figure 2-14: Access panel on bottom of console

Follow the procedure below if you need to open the entire console. This allows access to components or
assemblies not accessible by removing the battery and EPROM access cover. The console bottom
normally needs to be removed to replace major assemblies only, i.e. the console board or display
assembly.

1. Disconnect all connections, including the console ground connection, from the rear of the
operator console.

2. Turn the console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove and temporarily set
aside the jackscrews from the D connectors on the rear of the console. Remove and temporarily
set aside the hardware from the console ground stud.

3. Remove the 8 screws securing the base to the molded case.

4. Gently remove the console bottom (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached).

5. Re-assemble the console in the reverse order of the above. Use of a removable thread locker
(loctite or equivalent) is recommended when reinstalling the jackscrews to prevent them from
loosening if the mating connectors are removed.
Reconnect the console ground and all cables removed in step 1.

2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE (Cont)

CONSOLE BOARD (Rad-only consoles):

1. Disconnect all connections, including the console ground connection, from the rear of the
operator console.

2. Turn the console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove and temporarily set
aside the jackscrews from the D connectors on the rear of the console. Remove and temporarily
set aside the hardware from the console ground stud.

3. Remove the 6 screws securing the base to the molded case.

4. Gently remove the console bottom (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached).

5. Locate the battery on the console board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage with a
DVM. The easiest way to do is to measure the voltage across C7, the capacitor directly to the left
of the battery. This capacitor is in parallel with the battery.

2.80V.

7. Re-assemble the console in the reverse order of the above. Use of a removable thread locker
(loctite or equivalent) is recommended when reinstalling the jackscrews to prevent them from
loosening if the mating connectors are removed.
Reconnect the console ground and all cables removed in step 1.

GENERATOR CPU BOARD:

1. Locate the battery on the generator CPU board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage
with a DVM. The top of the battery is the positive side, ground (TP21 on the board) is the
negative side.

2.80V.

2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE (cont)

Figure 2-15: Location of batteries on generator and console CPU boards

2.17.0 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

Before continuing, verify the DIP switch settings on the console CPU board and generator CPU board.
These switches have been factory set but may have been readjusted, particularly if this generator is a re-
install.

CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 X 56 cm console) AND CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 cm console):
For the 31 X 42 cm console, DIP switch SW1 is only active if running the console software from EPROM.
Refer to the section Console software / EPROM in chapter 6 for details. If the console software is
running from flash memory, SW1 is inactive and the selections described below are accessed in console
utilities screen 2 as described in chapter 3C.
The selections described below are accessed in console utilities screen 2 on all versions of the Rad-only
console.
Verify the settings on SW1 (If applicable, as described above). Refer to console utilities screen 2 in
chapter 3C for a description of these functions.

LANGUAGE SW1 -4 SW1-3 SW1-2 SW1-1
English OFF OFF OFF OFF
German OFF OFF OFF ON
French OFF OFF ON OFF
Italian OFF OFF ON ON
Swedish OFF ON OFF OFF
Spanish OFF ON OFF ON

SW1-5 NOT USED
SW1-6 NOT USED
SW1-7 OFF >LOGO NOT DISPLAYED ON >LOGO DISPLAYED
SW1-8
OFF >CONSOLE DEFAULTS OFF * ON >LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS *

GENERATOR CPU BOARD:
Verify the settings on SW1. Refer to the table below for the proper settings for this switch.

GENERATOR POWER MAXIMUM mA SW1 -3 SW1-2 SW1-1
32 kW 400 mA ON ON OFF
40 kW 500 mA ON OFF ON
50 kW 630 mA OFF ON ON
65 kW 800 mA OFF ON OFF
80 kW 1000 mA OFF OFF ON
100 kW 1000 mA OFF OFF OFF

SW1-4 OFF >2 FILAMENT BOARDS ON >I FILAMENT BOARD
SW1-5 OFF >150 kV MAXIMUM ON >125 kV MAXIMUM
SW1-6 OFF >DUAL SPEED STARTER ON >LOW SPEED STARTER
SW1-7 OFF >2 TUBE GENERATOR ON >1 TUBE GENERATOR
SW1-8
OFF >SET FACTORY DEFAULTS * ON >DEFAULTS DISABLED *

* Refer to Resetting Factory Defaults in chapter 6 for details regarding this function.

2.18.0 INITIAL RUN-UP

This section describes the procedure for initial power-on of the generator after it has first been installed.

PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS REGARDING THE MAIN DISTRIBUTION
TRANSFORMER:
IF USING A DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER WITH AN ISOLATED SECONDARY, THE
SECONDARY WINDING MUST BE A WYE (STAR) CONFIGURATION WITH THE CENTER
POINT GROUND REFERENCED. DO NOT USE A DELTA CONFIGURED SECONDARY AS
THERE IS NO GROUND REFERENCE IN THIS CONFIGURATION.
IF USING AN AUTOTRANSFORMER TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER, THE A.C.
INPUT TO THE TRANSFORMER MUST BE GROUND REFERENCED.

2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements

1. Verify that the mains voltage and current capacity is correct for the generator installation. Refer to
the product ID label on the generator cabinet and chapter 1C of this manual.

2. Temporarily remove the safety cover over the main input fuses in the generator.

3. If the mains supply is compatible with the generator, switch on the main breaker and/or
disconnect switch and check for the following voltages:

NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR AT THIS TIME (ONLY THE AC MAINS TO THE
GENERATOR IS TO BE SWITCHED ON AT THIS TIME).

WARNING: 1. USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING THESE VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT
WITH MAINS VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
2. MAINS VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET, EVEN WITH
THE CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF.
3. THE BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD OR ON THE BUS
CAPACITOR ASSEMBLY (SINGLE PHASE UNITS ONLY), PRESENT A SAFETY HAZARD
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM THE
UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE TOUCHING ANY
PARTS.

PLEASE NOTE THAT THE VOLTAGE MEASURED IN STEP 4 WILL NOT NECESSARILY BE THE
SAME AS THE VOLTAGE AT THE MAIN DISCONNECT BOX IN THE ROOM. THE REASON FOR
THIS IS THAT A LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER MAY BE USED WITH THE GENERATOR
WHICH STEPS THE INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE TO THE GENERATOR UP OR DOWN.
GENERATORS WITH NO LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER SHOULD HAVE THE SAME
VOLTAGE IN STEP 4 AS IS SUPPLIED AT THE MAIN DISCONNECT BOX IN THE ROOM. UNITS
WITH A LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER SHOULD HAVE THE FOLLOWING VOLTAGES AT THE
MAIN LINE FUSES IN THE POWER SUPPLY CABINET.

VOLTAGE AT MAIN DISCONNECT BOX
(LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER INPUT)
VOLTAGE AT MAIN FUSES IN POWER SUPPLY
(LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER OUTPUT)
480 VAC 10 % 400 VAC 10 %
400 VAC 10 % 480 VAC 10 %

2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements (Cont)

4. Measure and record the voltage across the main line fuses in the generator. Single phase units
will only use one set of voltage measurements.

L1 phase to L2 phase: ______ VAC. L1 phase to ground: ______ VAC.

5. Are these voltages within specification for the unit as per chapter 1C for generators without a line
adjusting transformer, or within specification per the table above for units with a line adjusting
transformer? For 3 phase units, the phase to ground voltage should be 230 V 10 % for 400 V
units, and 277 V 10 % for 480 V units. For single phase 230 V units, the line to ground voltage
should be 115 V 10 %.
___ Check

BEFORE CONTINUING, REFER TO SECTION 2.18.3 OR 2.18.4 FOR THE PROCEDURE FOR
ADJUSTING LINE VOLTAGE TAPS ON THE ROOM INTERFACE TRANSFORMER AND THE POWER
SUPPLY AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER.

6. Switch OFF the mains power to the generator. Verify that there is no voltage present across any
of the mains input phases. Replace the safety cover on the main input fuse block, then switch ON
the mains and generator.

7. Verify that the red LED (DS1) located near the center of the generator interface board is lit.
_____ Check

8. Verify that the red LED (DC BUSS OK) located on the power input board is lit.
_____ Check

2.18.2 Initial Power Up

1. Switch on the generator at the console and observe the startup sequence on the console APR
display.
MEMORY TEST.... will be displayed.
HIGH FREQUENCY GENERATOR XX KW WILL BE DISPLAYED (XX will be the kW rating
for that model).
The next screen will show console software revision and power software revision.

2. In the upper part of the generator cabinet, verify the following:
Verify that DS1 on the room interface board is lit.
On the generator CPU board verify that the following LEDs are lit (these indicate presence of
the DC rails as indicated):
DS38 +5 V
DS41 +15 V
DS43 -15 V
DS45 +12 V
DS46 -12 V

2.18.2 Initial Power Up (Cont)

3. In the lower part of the generator cabinet, verify the following:
On the auxiliary board verify that the following LEDs are lit:
CNTCTR CLSD
S.S. OK
+12V
-12V
+/- 35V

2.18.3 Single Phase Primary Tap Selection

THIS SECTION APPLIES TO SINGLE PHASE GENERATORS ONLY. ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS
IS SWITCHED OFF AND LOCKED OUT, AND THAT ALL CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED
BEFORE PROCEEDING.

1. Note the position of the 208 / 240V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer (this is factory
set to 240 VAC). Refer to figure 2-10, this shows the locations of the transformer taps.

2. Based on the line voltage measured in section 2.18.1, step 4, set the tap referenced in the
previous step as follows. Refer to figure 2-16, this shows the line voltage taps schematically.
Use the 208V tap if the line voltage is 215 VAC or less.
Use the 240V tap if the line voltage is 216 VAC or higher.

3. Note the primary voltage tap setting on the room interface transformer (this is factory set to 240
VAC). Refer to figure 2-17 and 2-18. The primary windings are connected in parallel for 200 / 240
VAC operation as per figure 2-18.
Use the 200V taps if the line voltage is 215 VAC or less.
Use the 240V taps if the line voltage is 216 VAC or higher.

Figure 2-16: Schematic, primary of power supply aux transformer

2.18.3 Single Phase Primary Tap Selection (Cont)

Figure 2-17: Room interface transformer primary taps

Figure 2-18: Schematic, primary of room I/F transformer (200/240V)

2.18.4 Three Phase Primary Tap Selection

THIS SECTION APPLIES TO 400 VAC THREE PHASE GENERATORS ONLY. NO TAP CHANGE IS
NEEDED ON 480 VAC UNITS.
ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS IS SWITCHED OFF AND LOCKED OUT, AND THAT ALL
CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE PROCEEDING.

1. Note the position of the 380 / 400V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer (this is factory
set to 400 VAC). Refer to figure 2-10, this shows the locations of the transformer taps.

2. Based on the line voltage measured in section 2.18.1, step 4, set the tap referenced in the
previous step as follows. Refer to figure 2-16, this shows the line voltage taps schematically.
Use the 380V tap if the line voltage is 389 VAC or less.
Use the 400V tap if the line voltage is 390 VAC or higher.

3. Note the primary voltage tap setting on the room interface transformer (this is factory set to 400
VAC). Refer to figure 2-17 and 2-19. The primary windings are connected in series for 380 / 400
VAC operation as per figure 2-19.
Use the 380V setting (180V tap on top winding) if the line voltage is 389 VAC or less..
Use the 400V setting (200V tap on top winding) if the line voltage is 390 VAC or higher.

Figure 2-19: Schematic, primary of room I/F transformer (380/400V)

2.19.0 PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION USING THE CONSOLE

For the touch screen console, programming and calibration must be performed using GenWare.
Operator accessible system utilities are described in the touch screen operators manual. The balance of
sections 2.19 and 2.20 do not apply to touch screen, except for the section DATA LINK which does apply
to the touch screen console.

2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode

This section presents a brief overview of the generator setup menu only. For more detail, refer to chapter
3C.

To enter into the programming and calibration mode for the generator follow the steps below. Refer to
Figure 2-20 for references to APR buttons. This figure shows the APR button layout for the 23 X 56 (cm)
console, the 31 X 42 (cm) console, and the Rad-only console respectively.

Figure 2-20: Programming/calibration mode reference

2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode (Cont)

1. Start with the generator switched OFF.

2. While pressing and holding the RESET button [5], press the generator POWER ON button on the
console

3. The generator will go through the start-up sequence, then display the message ENTER
PASSWORD.

4. Enter the factory default password by pressing the following button sequence: [1] - [2] - [3] - [4].

5. The APR menu will now display the following:

* GENERATOR SETUP *
UTILITY APR EDITOR: DISABLED
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP

2.19.2 Menu Selections

UTILITY
Allows access to the following functions:

SET TIME & DATE:
Allows setting of: YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, and MINUTE

ERROR LOG:
Allows review of the generators error log for recorded errors.

STATISTICS:
Allows review of the tube exposure counter(s), the fluoro exposure counter if applicable, and the
generator accumulated exposure counter. Also allows resetting of the tube exposure counter(s), and the
fluoro exposure counter if used.

CONSOLE:
Allows setting the following parameters for the installation: key speed (scroll rate for the displays),
speaker volume, LCD screen mode, and APR mode.

APR EDITOR

This enables or disables technique factor changes. When APR EDITOR is set to ENABLED, the
technique factors may be changed. The new values may then be saved to overwrite the existing values.
Refer to chapter 3C for further information.


2.19.2 Menu Selections (Cont)

GEN CONFIGURATION

Allows the service engineer to access the following functions. Further details are in chapter 3C.

TUBE SELECTION Selects from the available group of X-ray tubes.

GENERATOR LIMITS Sets the operating limits of the generator.

RECEPTOR SETUP Allows programming of each image receptor.

I/O CONFIGURATION Allows setting the inputs and outputs of all image receptors.

AEC SETUP Defines properties for each channel of the AEC device.

AEC CALIBRATION Allows calibration of the AEC device.

FLUORO SETUP (all except
Rad-only console).
Allows setting of the fluoro properties.

TUBE CALIBRATION Enables the X-ray tube auto calibration feature.

DAP SETUP Allows setup and calibration of the optional DAP.

DATA LINK

Used with the CPI GenWare utility software. This allows for data communication with a computer in
order to download additional tube types, transfer APR data, edit APR text, run the A
2
EC
2
utility,
perform setup and calibration functions, and for other minor functions. Further documentation is included
with GenWare.
A computer (i.e. laptop) and a 9 pin null modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both
ends are required to run this software and interface to the generator.

NOTE: The GenWare program should be closed before exiting the DATA LINK function on the console.
Failure to do so may require that the console be switched off and then on again in order to re-
initialize communication with the generator.

2.20.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION

It is recommended that the generator be tested at this point with only the rotor and high tension cables
connected. The generator should be able to complete an X-ray tube calibration and seasoning cycle
without other equipment connected to the generator (other than the basic interlocks as noted below). This
will allow for easier fault isolation as each section of the system is connected and tested.
Before being able to make X-ray exposures, the room door interlock must be closed and the
thermal switch must be closed.
Prior to beginning tube auto calibration, the tube(s) used in this installation must be properly
selected, and the generator limits should be programmed. Refer to chapter 3C.
It is recommended that the tube(s) be conditioned (seasoned) before beginning tube auto
calibration; refer to chapter 6.

WARNING: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES PRODUCE X-RAYS. TAKE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.

CAUTION: ALWAYS VERIFY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE TUBE INSERT. IF THE X-RAY TUBE HAS
BEEN REBUILT, THE TUBE INSERT AND TUBE HOUSING MAY BE FROM DIFFERENT
MANUFACTURERS.

Step Action Result
1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu
(section 2.19.1) select GEN
CONFIGURATION.
The TUBE CALIBRATION menu will display.
2. Select TUBE CALIBRATION. The TUBE AUTO-CAL menu appears.
3. Select the desired tube (tube 1 or tube
2) by pressing the TUBE button.
The selected tube will appear. Selection of the second
tube is only available on two tube generators.
4. Press FOCAL SPOT to toggle between
SMALL and LARGE. Start with
SMALL.
The selected focal spot displays.
5. Press and hold the X-RAY button (or
use the optional hand switch) to begin
the calibration procedure.
The menu will indicate the mA and filament current
while the generator takes a series of exposures.
6. Press RETURN to repeat calibration on
the other focal spot or on the other
tube.

7. When auto-calibration is completed,
press EXIT to exit the tube auto
calibration menu.
The GEN CONFIGURATION menu will display.
8. Press EXIT to return to the
GENERATOR SETUP menu.
The GENERATOR SETUP menu will display.
9. Press EXIT SETUP to exit out of the
setup and calibration mode and return
to the normal operation mode.
REFER TO THE NOTE ON THE NEXT PAGE REGARDING
A SPECIAL DIAGNOSTIC MODE THAT IS ENTERED
WHEN EXITING OUT OF THE AUTO-CALIBRATION
MODE.

NOTE: SHOULD AN ERROR OCCUR DURING AUTO CALIBRATION, AN ERROR MESSAGE WILL
BE DISPLAYED. THE GENERATOR WILL THEN LIMIT THE TUBES OPERATION TO THE
RANGE IN WHICH IT WAS CALIBRATED, THUS ALLOWING FOR PARTIAL OPERATION OF
THE GENERATOR.

2.20.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION (Cont)

NOTE: A SPECIAL DIAGNOSTIC MODE IS INVOKED WHEN YOU EXIT THE AUTO-CALIBRATION ROUTINE. THIS
MODE REMAINS IN EFFECT UNTIL THE GENERATOR IS SWITCHED OFF. THIS ALLOWS LIMITED
FUNCTIONALITY OF THE GENERATOR IN CASE THE AUTO CALIBRATION COULD NOT BE COMPLETED
DUE TO A FAULT.
WHILE IN THIS MODE, THE GENERATOR WILL DEFAULT THE FILAMENT CURRENT TO 2.0 AMPS FOR
ALL UNCALIBRATED MA STATIONS. ADDITIONALLY, THE MA TOLERANCE CHECK WILL BE DISABLED.
THIS ALLOWS ONE TO EXIT TO THE NORMAL OPERATING MODE WHERE THE PREP STATE MAY BE
ENTERED. THE FILAMENT AND ROTOR CIRCUITS CAN BE OBSERVED, AND AN EXPOSURE MAY BE
TAKEN AT THIS TIME. THE EXPOSURE WILL OBVIOUSLY BE INCORRECT AS THE FILAMENT CURRENT
IS SET TO 2 AMPS, BUT THIS ALLOWS KV MEASUREMENTS TO BE PERFORMED ALONG WITH OTHER
SYSTEM CHECKS TO AID IN TROUBLESHOOTING.

2.21.0 FINAL CHECKS

The room interface connections may now be completed. These items are described in 2.9.6.
When finished all wiring, check that all connections are tight and secure.
Check that all cables are dressed neatly inside the main cabinet, and secured as necessary.
Reconnect any grounds that have been removed from covers. Then reinstall all covers before placing
the generator into service.

NOTE: THE INSTALLER SHOULD ENSURE THAT ALL CABLE CONNECTIONS TO THE
GENERATOR ARE SECURE, AND ALL CABLES EXTERNAL TO THE GENERATOR ARE
ADEQUATELY PROTECTED AGAINST ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION.



CPI Canada Inc. Setup Information 3A

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-04 Rev. B Page 3A-1
CHAPTER 3

SECTION 3A

SETUP INFORMATION

CONTENTS:

3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................................................3A-2
3A.2.0 INSTALLATION RECORD.................................................................................................................................3A-2
3A.2.1 X-Ray Tubes ..................................................................................................................................................3A-2
3A.2.2 Mains Supply And Fusing ..............................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.3 Automatic Exposure Control ..........................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.4 Collimator .......................................................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.5 Image System................................................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.6 ABS Pickup Assembly....................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.7 Table Type .....................................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.8 Wall Receptor.................................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.9 Receptor Assignment.....................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.10 Miscellaneous Notes....................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.3.0 X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET......................................................................3A-5
3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET .....................................................................................3A-6
3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET...............................................................................................................3A-7
3A Setup Information CPI Canada Inc.

Page 3A-2 Rev. B Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-04
3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION

Please record the setup information for your installation in this section before programming the generator.
Enter the information appropriate for your generator model. The data tables will accommodate installations up
to a standard R&F installation with the following: tilting G.I. table with bucky, spot film device, standard image
tube with a medical T.V. system, wall bucky and an overhead tube stand, spot film camera and a digital
acquisition system.

3A.2.0 INSTALLATION RECORD

3A.2.1 X-Ray Tubes

Please enter the appropriate information.

a) Over table X-ray tube (or TUBE #1)

b) Manufacturer and type:

c) Focal spot combination: large = small =
d) kW of each focal spot: large = small =
e) Maximum kVp:
f) Type of stator:
g) Dual or single speed:
h) Stator delay: sec =
i) Start and run voltage, low speed: start volts = run volts =
j) Start and run voltage, high speed: start volts = run volts =
k) Brake voltage: volts =
l) Maximum filament current: amps =
m) Minimum filament current, stand-by: amps =
n) Thermal switch included:
o) Under table X-ray tube (or TUBE #2)

p) Manufacturer and type:
q) Focal spot combination: large = small =
r) kW of each focal spot: large = small =
s) Maximum kVp:
t) Type of stator:
u) Dual or single speed:
v) Stator delay: sec =
w) Start and run voltage, low speed: start volts = run volts =
x) Start and run voltage, high speed: start volts = run volts =
y) Brake voltage: volts =
z) Maximum filament current: amps =
aa) Minimum filament current, stand-by: amps =
bb) Thermal switch included:
cc) X-ray tube fan included:

3A.2.2 Mains Supply And Fusing

Please record the following information on the mains voltage and current capacity. Check that the information
is appropriate for the generator according to the nameplate on the generator cabinet.

Line voltage: ________ VAC

Line frequency: 50 Hz. 60 Hz. Line capacity: kVa

Disconnect fuses (main): amps

3A.2.3 Automatic Exposure Control

Chamber Type (optional):

Solid State: __________________ Ion Chamber ______________ PMT _____________

Make: _______________________ Model: _________________

Receptors with AEC (optional):

Table bucky yes Spot film device yes Digital System yes
Wall bucky yes Auxiliary bucky yes

3A.2.4 Collimator

Type: __________________
Compatible with X-ray tube: yes no
Exposure interlock (dry contacts): yes no
Tomo/stereo by-pass: yes no

3A.2.5 Image System

Conventional: ________________________________________ (make and model)
Digital: ______________________________________________(make and model)

Image intensifier: dual mode tri-mode
24 hour supply: __ yes __ no
Image system park/position switch. __ yes __ no
Fluoro foot switch to initiate fluoro and spot exposure: __ yes __ no
Spot film advance delay: greater than 850 mSec. __ yes __ no
Remote Fluoro controller. __ yes __ no
AEC compensation for multi-spot SFD use. __ yes __ no

3A.2.6 ABS Pickup Assembly

Optical diode: _______ PMT: _______ Proportional DC: _______ Composite Video _______

Make: _______________________ Model: _________________

3A.2.7 Table Type

Table type: ______________________________________ Model/Make: _______________________

Grid: ___________ Ratio: __________ L/P Inch: __________ Focus Distance: __________

3A.2.8 Wall Receptor

Type: ______________________________

Grid: ___________ Ratio: __________ L/P Inch: __________ Focus Distance: __________

3A.2.9 Receptor Assignment

Receptor 1: _______________________

Receptor 2: _______________________

Receptor 3: _______________________

Receptor 4: _______________________

Receptor 5: _______________________

Receptor 6: _______________________

3A.2.10 Miscellaneous Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________

3A.3.0 X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET

Note: The information in this table is to be derived from the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.

Generator Model: ______________ Serial No: _____________

TUBE SELECTION TUBE 1 TUBE 2
DEFAULT SELECTED DEFAULT SELECTED
TUBE SELECTED
TUBE SPEED
MAX SF KW LS
MAX LF KW LS
MAX SF KW HS
MAX LF KW HS
MAX KV
MAX SF MA
ANODE HU WARNING
ANODE HU LIMIT
SF STANDBY
LF STANDBY
SF MAX
LF MAX
FIL BOOST
FIL PREHEAT

GENERATOR LIMITS DEFAULT SELECTED
MAX KW
MAX MA
MIN MA
MAX MAS

3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET

IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET DATE:___________ SERIAL #:_____________
FUNCTION

RECEPTOR
1
RECEPTOR
2
RECEPTOR
3
RECEPTOR
4
RECEPTOR
5
RECEPTOR
6
RECEPTOR
NAME

TUBE

TOMO

FLUORO

SERIAL

INTERFACE
OPTS

FUNCTIONAL
OPTS

RECEPTOR
SYM

FLUORO
HANG

RAD HANG

LAST IMAGE
HOLD

MEMORY

REM TOMO
BUT

SF/LF SWITCH

AEC BACKUP

AEC BACKUP
MAS

AEC BACKUP
MS

AEC CHANNEL


3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET

NOTE: BOXES WITH DOTTED LINES CANNOT HAVE THEIR STATE CHANGED!

FUNCTIONS STANDBY PREP GEN RDY RAD EXP FLUORO EXP
***INPUTS***
REMOTE EXP ----- ----- -----
REMOTE PREP ----- ----- ----- -----
REMOTE FL. EXP ----- ----- ----- -----
CONSOLE EXP ----- ----- -----
CONSOLE PREP ----- ----- ----- -----
TOMO EXP ----- ----- ----- -----
REM. TOMO SEL ----- ----- ----- -----
I/I SAFETY ----- -----
COLL. ITLK ----- -----
BUCKY CONTACTS ----- ----- ----- -----
SPARE -----
THERMAL SW 1 -----
THERMAL SW 2 -----
DOOR ITLK -----
MULTI SPOT EXP ----- ----- ----- -----
***OUTPUTS***
BKY 1 SELECT
BKY 2 SELECT
BKY 3 SELECT
TOMO/BKY 4 SEL
TOMO/BKY STRT
ALE
COLL. BYPASS
ROOM LIGHT
SPARE


CPI Canada Inc. System Interfacing 3B

Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-05 Rev. J Page 3B-1
CHAPTER 3

SECTION 3B

SYSTEM INTERFACING

CONTENTS:

3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION..........................................................................................................................................3B-2
3B.2.0 LOCATIONS OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ..................................................................................................3B-3
3B.2.1 Generator Pictorial Showing Connections ...............................................................................................3B-3
3B.2.2 Low Speed / Dual Speed Starter ..............................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.3 High Tension Transformer........................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.4 Generator Interface Board........................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.5 Generator CPU Board ..............................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.6 AEC Board................................................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.7 Console CPU Board / Touch Screen........................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.8 I/0 Expansion Board (optional) .................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.9 DAP Interface Board (optional) ................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.10 Room Interface Board ............................................................................................................................3B-5
3B.3.0 FEATURES OF THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD.....................................................................................3B-5
3B.3.1 Inputs........................................................................................................................................................3B-6
3B.3.2 Outputs .....................................................................................................................................................3B-7
3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages........................................................................................................................3B-7
3B.3.4 Typical Examples .....................................................................................................................................3B-9
3B.3.5 Wiring The Room Interface Terminal Plugs ...........................................................................................3B-10
3B.4.0 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD PROGRAMMING FOR 110/220 VAC..............................................3B-11
3B.5.0 TYPICAL R&F ROOM CONNECTIONS.....................................................................................................3B-12
3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING......................................................................................3B-13
3B System Interfacing CPI Canada Inc.

Page 3B-2 Rev. J Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-05
3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION

The Indico 100 generator may be interfaced to various tables, imaging systems, tube stands, tomographic
devices, AEC pickups, Buckys, ABS pickups, X-ray tubes and collimators.
The generator interface may be programmed to supply a voltage, an isolated contact, receive a
voltage, or an external isolated contact.

All interfacing cables enter the generator at the rear of the generator cabinet.

NOTE: The installer must provide the necessary interfacing cables.

WARNING

NOTE: THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD HAS 110 AND 220 VAC PRESENT AT ALL TIMES
THAT THE MAIN DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. USE CAUTION WHEN SERVICING THIS
BOARD.

3B.2.0 LOCATIONS OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

3B.2.1 Generator Pictorial Showing Connections

Figure 3B-1: Generator to room interface

CAUTION: ENSURE THAT ALL X-RAY TUBE HOUSINGS ARE CONNECTED TO THE GROUND STUD ON
THE HT TANK. USE A SEPARATE GROUND WIRE FOR EACH TUBE, #10 AWG (6 mm
2
) OR
GREATER.

3B.2.2 Low Speed / Dual Speed Starter

Refer to chapter 2 (installation) for instructions on wiring to the low speed or dual speed starter terminal
blocks. Note that the X-ray tube thermal switches may be connected at the starter terminal blocks, or at the
room interface board. Both sets of terminals are connected in parallel, and either may be used.

3B.2.3 High Tension Transformer

Accepts the high tension cables from either one or two x-ray tubes.

3B.2.4 Generator Interface Board

The generator interface board accepts the following (ABS only on R&F generators):

ABS - composite video (J 8).
ABS - proportional DC (J 7).
(J umpers must be configured for different ABS types, refer to chapter 3E).
Control console as per chapter 2.

3B.2.5 Generator CPU Board

The generator CPU board accepts the following (all are optional):
Remote fluoro controller (J 11).
RS 232 Port (J 1).
RS 232 Port (J 2).

3B.2.6 AEC Board

Depending on the Indico 100 generators configuration, different AEC boards may be fitted. Refer to
chapter 3D:

3B.2.7 Console CPU Board / Touch Screen

The optional hand switch connects to the console CPU board or to a connector on the rear of the console;
refer to chapter 2 for details. If it is desired to connect a remote fluoro footswitch (normally customer
supplied), connect to TB6 pins 5 & 6 on the room interface board, or to terminals F and COM on TB1 on
the console CPU board (23 X 56 cm consoles), or to J 13 on the 31 X 42 cm console. Refer to chapter 2 for
details.

3B.2.8 I/0 Expansion Board (optional)

The optional I/0 expansion board is used when the Indico 100 generator is interfaced with digital systems,
film changers and various dedicated products.

3B.2.9 DAP Interface Board (optional)

The optional DAP interface board is used to interface with DAP chambers, used to measure dose-area-
product. The generator will interface with two DAP devices, one for each X-ray tube, when fitted with this
option.

3B.2.10 Room Interface Board

All the necessary inputs and outputs for the external room equipment are located on this board.

TB1 - Bucky 3 and tomo Bucky select, table stepper input,
TB2 - Bucky 1 and 2 select, collimator and Bucky inputs.
TB3 - Tomographic inputs and outputs, collimator bypass.
TB4 - Room light, thermal switches, door interlock, tube indicators.
TB5 - Multiple spot input, I.I. mag. select.
TB6 - Remote prep, exposure and fluoro inputs, I.I. safety input, ALE output, spare output.

3B.3.0 FEATURES OF THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD

Refer to the following schematics and figures.

Figure 3B-2, room interface board layout.
Room interface functional drawing, MD-0763.

LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
24VDC
110AC
220AC
J W1-J W5
24 VDC
J W6-J W8
LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
TB1-TB6

Figure 3B-2: Room interface board

3B.3.1 Inputs

All inputs are opto coupled, select inputs may be configured to use an external +/- 24 VDC source or
may be configured to accept a closed dry contact.
Note the following inputs and jumper configurations per the table below:

NOTE: The Indico 100 generator is shipped from the factory with all inputs configured for dry
contact inputs.

JUMPER CONFIGURATION (INPUTS):

ROOM INTERFACE BOARD GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
JUMPER CONFIGURATION
TB1 PINS 4 & 5 (TABLE STEPPER) J W7 PINS 1-2, 3-4 =DRY CONTACT INPUT
J W7 PINS 2-3 =24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT
TB2 PINS 6 & 7 (COLLIMATOR) J W9 PINS 1-2, 3-4 =DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB2 PINS 4 & 5 (BUCKY CONTACTS) J W10.PINS 1-2, 3-4 =DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB3 PINS 6 & 7 (TOMO EXPOSURE) J W3 PINS 1-2, 3-4 =DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB3 PINS 4 & 5 (REMOTE TOMO SELECT) J W2 PINS 1-2, 3-4 =DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB4 PINS 8 & 9 (THERMAL SWITCH 1) DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY
TB4 PINS 6 & 7 (THERMAL SWITCH 2) DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY
TB4 PINS 4 & 5 (ROOM DOOR INTLK) DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY
TB5 PINS 11 & 12 (MULT. SPOT EXPOSURE) J W6 PINS 1-2, 3-4 =DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB6 PINS 9 & 10 (REMOTE EXPOSURE) J W15 PINS 1-2, 3-4 =DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB6 PINS 7 & 8 (REMOTE PREP) J W14 PINS 1-2, 3-4 =DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB6 PINS 3 & 4 (I.I. SAFETY) J W8 PINS 1-2, 3-4 =DRY CONTACT INPUT
TB6 PINS 5 & 6 (REMOTE FLUORO EXP) DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY

3B.3.2 Outputs

Outputs are via relay contacts, some of which may be configured to supply a dry contact closure or to
supply 24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC upon closure.
Note the following outputs and jumper configurations per the table below:
To supply power to a grounded load, use TB1 pin 12 (for example) and jumper on dry contacts. This
applies also to TB1 pin 1, TB2 pin 12, TB2 pin 1 and TB3 pin 12.

NOTE: The Indico 100 generator is shipped from the factory with JW1 to JW5 configured for dry
contacts, and JW6 to JW8 configured for 24 VDC output on relay closure.

JUMPER CONFIGURATION (OUTPUTS):

ROOM INTERFACE BOARD ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
JUMPER CONFIGURATION
TB1 PINS 11 & 12 (BUCKY 3 SELECT) J W2 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT
J W2 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT
TB1 PINS 1 & 2 (TOMO BUCKY SELECT) J W1 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT
TB3 PINS 11 & 12 (TOMO/BUCKY START) J W5 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT
TB3 PINS 1 & 2 (COLLIMATOR BYPASS) DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY
TB4 PINS 11 & 12 (ROOM LIGHT) DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY
TB4 PINS 1 & 2 TUBE 2 INDICATOR
TB4 PINS 1 & 3 TUBE 1 INDICATOR
J W6 PINS 1-2, 3-4 =24VDC OUTPUT
J W6 PINS 2-3 =DRY CONTACT OUTPUT
TB5 PINS 8 & 9 (I.I. MAG 1) DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY
TB6 PINS 1 & 2 (ALE OUTPUT) J W7 PINS 1-2, 3-4 =24VDC OUTPUT
TB6 PINS 11 & 12 (SPARE OUTPUT) J W8 PINS 1-2, 3-4 =24VDC OUTPUT

3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages

Five outputs (K1, K2, K3, K4 and K6 for Bucky selects and Bucky start) may be jumper configured for a
choice of the following voltages:

24 VDC 4 AMPS total.
110 VAC 2.5 AMPS total.
220 VAC 1.5 AMPS total.

NOTE: 2.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 110 VAC OR 1.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 220 VAC, BUT BOTH
ARE NOT AVAILABLE SIMULTANEOUSLY. TOTAL POWER CONSUMPTION MUST NOT
EXCEED 350 VA.

3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages (Cont)

The above voltage sources are not compatible with:

Collimator lamps (24 VDC 150 watts). These exceed the 4 Amp rating of the 24 VDC supply. Contact your
generator supplier regarding the optional 24VAC / 30VDC room power kit, which may be used for
collimators and other room electromechanical devices.
Fluorescent lamps. These have high starting currents and generate transients when the tube strikes.
Some inductive loads may cause difficulties (for example some motors, under table tube fans, and
solenoids).

IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT CLAMPING / RECOVERY DIODES BE USED ON
INDUCTIVE DEVICES SUCH AS RELAYS ETC WHICH ARE CONNECTED TO THE ROOM
INTERFACE BOARD.

Voltage selections are made by adding jumper wires from TB11 to TB8, TB9, or TB10, and placing the
jumpers on J W1, J W2, J W3, J W4, or J W5 in the live contact position.
Review figure 3B-3 for typical examples.

Figure 3B-3: Typical jumper arrangement on the room interface board

SOME INSTALLATIONS REQUIRE THAT THE OUTPUTS OF RELAYS K1, K2, K3, K4, K6 OR K8 DRIVE
THE INPUTS OF OPTO COUPLERS. IN INSTALLATIONS WHERE THESE RELAYS SOURCE 110 OR
220 VAC, THE LEAKAGE CURRENT THROUGH THE R-C SNUBBER ACROSS THE RELAY CONTACTS
MAY BE SUFFICIENT TO ENERGIZE THE OPTO COUPLERS WHEN THE RELAYS ARE OPEN.
IF THIS IS EXPERIENCED, THE R-C SNUBBER SHOULD BE DISCONNECTED FROM THE
CIRCUIT. CUTTING AND REMOVING THE JUMPER WIRES PER THE TABLE ON THE NEXT PAGE
WILL DISABLE THE R-C SNUBBER CIRCUIT. THE JUMPER WIRES SHOULD BE CUT AS NEAR AS
POSSIBLE TO THE PADS ON THE BOARD, THEN AS MUCH AS IS POSSIBLE OF THE WIRE JUMPER
SHOULD BE REMOVED. THIS IS NECESSARY TO WITHSTAND THE OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
ACROSS THE RELAY CONTACTS.

3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages (Cont)

IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLER TO PROVIDE THE PROPER INTERFACING CIRCUITS
TO THE OPTO COUPLER(S) IN THESE TYPES OF INSTALLATIONS.

For reference, the jumper wire links associated with each of the subject relays is listed below:
RELAY JUMPER WIRE
K1 J W12
K2 J W9
K3 J W11
K4 J W10
K6 J W14
K8 J W13

3B.3.4 Typical Examples

Selected Output Relay Plug and Jumper Wire Jumper

K2 (24 VDC) J W2: Live Contact (K2) TB11 - 5 to TB8
K1 (110 VAC) J W1: Live Contact (K1) TB11 - 4 to TB9
K4 (24 VDC) J W4: Live Contact (K4) TB11 - 3 to TB8
K3 (220 VAC) J W3: Live Contact (K3) TB11 - 2 to TB10
K6 (dry contacts) J W5: Dry Contact (K6) TB11 - no connection
K12 (24 VDC) J W7: Live Contact 24VDC N/A
K13 (dry contacts) J W8: Dry Contact N/A
K7 (24 VDC) J W6: Live Contact 24VDC N/A

The previous examples will configure the outputs as shown below:

K2 when selected will provide 24 VDC to a load at TB1 pins 11 and 12.
K1 when selected will supply 110 VAC to a load at TB1 pins 1 and 2.
K4 when selected will supply 24 VDC to a load at TB2 pins 11 and 12.
K3 when selected will supply 220 VAC to a load at TB2 pins 1 and 2.
K6 when selected will supply closed contacts at TB3 pins 11 and 12.
K12 when selected will supply 24 VDC at TB6 pins 1 and 2.
K13 when selected will supply closed contacts at TB6 pins 11 and 12.
K7 will supply 24 VDC at TB4 pin 3 for tube 1, or 24 VDC at TB4 pin 2 for tube 2. Ground reference will
be at TB4 pin 1.


3B.3.5 Wiring The Room Interface Terminal Plugs

Figure 3B-4: Terminal plug

Remove the required mating connectors from TB1 to TB6 on the room interface board.
Back out the wire retaining screws as required.
Dress the interface cable with a minimum of 5 inch (130 mm) flying leads.
Strip each wire .25 inches (6 mm).
Insert the wire into the plug and tighten the terminal screw. Several wires may be inserted into a single
terminal connection.
Be sure the plug numbering matches the input/output signals.
Insert the plug into the room interface plug as shown in Figure 3B-4.
Leave sufficient cable to allow interface access.
To eliminate confusion, label each plug.
Cover plates are located on the rear access panels to provide strain relief for the interface cables.
Holes are provided on the shelf at the back of the cabinet, below the room interface board, for
attaching additional strain relief hardware such as C or P clamps as desired by the installer.

3B.4.0 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD PROGRAMMING FOR 110/220 VAC

The 110/220 VAC supplies available at TB9 and TB10 of the room interface board may be programmed
such that:
110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 at all times that the generator main disconnect is switched
ON.
110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 only when the generator itself is switched ON.

The desired selection is made using J W1 on the generator interface board. Setting the jumper to J W1 pins
1-2 selects the condition where 110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 only when the generator is
switched ON.
Setting the jumper to J W1 pins 2-3 selects 110/220 VAC to be present at TB9 and TB10 at all
times that the generator main disconnect is switched ON.

Refer to figure 3B-5, this shows the jumper position J W1 pins 1-2 which only provides for 110/220 VAC
when the generator is switched ON.

Figure 3B-5: 110/220 VAC programming

3B.5.0 TYPICAL R&F ROOM CONNECTIONS

Figure 3B-6: Typical R&F room

3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING

The following is for reference only and represents a typical R&F procedure room.

Cable assembly #1
1. Bucky 3 select (image receptor).
2. Table stepper input, indicates to the generator that a stepping table has moved to the
next step.
3. Tomo Bucky select, usually used to select a tomographic device.

Cable assembly #2
1. Bucky 1 select (image receptor), usually used to select the R&F table Bucky.
2. Collimator interlock, will prevent an exposure if the collimator inputs are not satisfied.
3. Bucky contacts, all Bucky contacts are paralleled at this connector. Diode isolation
may be required.
4. Bucky 2 select (image receptor), usually used to select vertical wall Bucky.

Cable assembly #3
1. Collimator bypass. Usually used with the collimator associated with the tomographic
device, to allow non-PBL operation in the tomographic mode.
2. Remote tomo select, used for selecting tomography operation from a remote R&F table.
3. Tomo start, will issue a start to sweep signal to a tomographic device.
4. Tomographic exposure; the generator waits for a switch closure during the tomographic
sweep.

Cable assembly #4
1. Room light. Provides a closed contact to energize the X-ray room warning light.
Maximum 250 watts.
2. Door interlock. Requires a closed dry contact to interlock the generator exposure with
the X-ray rooms entrance door.
3. Tube select indicator (source select indicator). Indicates which X-ray tube has been
selected.
4. Optional thermal switch inputs.

Cable assembly #5
1. Mag. select. Interfaces with the image intensifier to select the magnification modes.
2. Multiple-spot exposure. When multi-spot operation is selected at the spot film device,
(example: 4 on 1) and this input receives a closed dry contact, the AEC calibration will
be offset to compensate for the small fields.

Cable assembly #6
1. Interfaces to the table (conventional or remote R&F), the X-ray prep, expose and fluoro
footswitch.
2. The I.I. safety position interlock switch, used if the I.I. may be removed from the spot
film device.
3. ALE - required if an SFC or a serial changer is used.
4. Spare output.

3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING (CONT)

Cable assembly #7
1. Must be a #10 AWG (6 mm
2
) wire or greater, connected from the housing of both X-ray
tubes to ground at the high tension transformer.

Cable assemblies #8
1. Pair of H.T. cables from the over table (tube-1) X-ray tube to the HT Transformer.
2. Pair of H.T. cables from the under table (tube-2) X-ray tube to the HT transformer.

Cable assembly #9.
1. Interfaces the ABS signal from the TV camera as either DC proportional or composite
video.
2. Interfaces the PMTs high voltage and signal to the generator, if used.
Refer to chapter 3E for details.

Cable assembly #10
1. These cables are usually supplied by the AEC vendor. Be sure these cables are placed
away from any electrical noise areas. When interfacing AEC cables be careful not to
cause ground loops. Grounding should only be at the AEC board.
Refer to chapter 3D for details.

Cable assembly #11
1. This cable is supplied by CPI for the remote fluoro controller interface.

Cable assembly #12
1. This cable is supplied by CPI for the control console interface.

Cable assembly #13
1. Supplied with the optional laptop computer interconnect box.

Cable assembly #14
1. AC mains cable.

Cable assembly #15
1. Cable(s) for digital imaging system.

Cable assembly #16
1. Cable(s) for DAP (Dose Area Product).

CPI Canada Inc. AEC Calibration 3D

Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740904-06 Rev. J Page 3D-1
CHAPTER 3

SECTION 3D

AEC CALIBRATION

CONTENTS:

3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................................3D-2
3D.1.1 AEC Limitations: Minimum Response Time ................................................................................................3D-3
3D.1.2 AEC Limitations: Maximum Exposure Times ..............................................................................................3D-4
3D.1.3 Film/Screen Response vs. kVp....................................................................................................................3D-5
3D.1.4 AEC Calibration Range ................................................................................................................................3D-6
3D.1.5 Multiple Spot Compensation ........................................................................................................................3D-7
3D.2.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP.............................................................................................................................3D-8
3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet .................................................................................................................................3D-8
3D.2.2 AEC Precalibration Checks........................................................................................................................3D-10
3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation..........................................................................................................................3D-10
3D.2.4 AEC Pickup Connections (Overview) ........................................................................................................3D-12
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)...........................................................................................................3D-13
3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) .......................................................................................................................3D-15
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) ...........................................................................................................3D-17
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) ..............................................3D-19
3D.3.0 PRECALIBRATION NOTES: .........................................................................................................................3D-21
3D.4.0 AEC USING A PMT ........................................................................................................................................3D-22
3D.5.0 AEC FIELD BALANCE ...................................................................................................................................3D-23
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY)...........................................................................................................3D-23
3D.6.1 Break point calibration worksheet ..............................................................................................................3D-28
3D.7.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE) ............................................................................3D-30
3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION......................................................................................................................3D-31
3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION..................................................................................................................................3D-35
3D.10.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION..........................................................................................................3D-38
3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY)..........................................................................................................3D-40
3D.12.0 AEC CALIBRATION (AUX, SFD, ETC)........................................................................................................3D-43
3D AEC Calibration CPI Canada Inc.

Page 3D-2 Rev. J Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual Ch # 740904-06
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This section covers interfacing and calibration of the various AEC board assemblies that are used in Millenia
and Indico 100 X-ray generators for ion chambers, solid state chambers, or PMT pickups; and in CMP 200
X-ray generators for ion and solid state chambers.
THE GENERATOR IS FACTORY CONFIGURED FOR SPECIFIC AEC DEVICE(S). REFER TO
THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION IN CHAPTER 1D (MILLENIA AND
INDICO 100), OR CHAPTER 1 (CMP 200) FOR THE FACTORY CONFIGURED AEC COMPATIBILITY OF
THIS GENERATOR.

The introduction in this section contains background information relevant to AEC operation. It is strongly
suggested that this be read and understood prior to beginning AEC calibration.

AEC calibration requires that a calibration curve be established which relates optical density to various kV
breakpoints.
The 75 kV knee breakpoint is calibrated at the slowest film screen combination. The remaining kV
breakpoints are calibrated next, then the breakpoint calibration is repeated at the next highest film speed,
with the highest film speed being calibrated last.
After breakpoint calibration, density setup is done at the slowest film speed, and then RLF
compensation and multiple spot compensation are done if desired.


3D.1.1 AEC Limitations: Minimum Response Time

The X-ray generator (including the AEC pickup chamber) has a minimum response time from start of the
exposure command to a kV value sufficient to start X-rays. There is a further delay to the start of current flow
from the AEC device. Likewise, there is a minimum response time from when the AEC stop command is
issued to when the kV has actually decreased to the point that X-rays are no longer produced. Figure 3D-1
depicts this graphically.

Figure 3D-1: Relative timing of AEC ramp vs exposure command and kVp

1 to 2 is the time from the exposure start command to kVp start.
Time =1 to 3 ms.

2 to 3 is the reaction time of the solid state / ion chamber to start a current flow.
Time =1 to 3 ms.

3 to 4 is the required exposure time.

4 is the AEC stop command from the generator AEC circuits.

4 to 5 is the generator shut down time including cable discharge time etc.
Time =1.5 to 3.0 ms.

1 to 6 is the total time the exposure switch is activated.

FOR AEC BOARDS WITH SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (FIGURE 3D-9 AND 3D-11)
AEC TECHNIQUES SHOULD HAVE MINIMUM EXPOSURE TIMES GREATER THAN 5 MS. FOR
ALL OTHER AEC BOARDS MINIMUM EXPOSURE TIMES SHOULD BE GREATER THAN 15
MS.

3D.1.2 AEC Limitations: Maximum Exposure Times

AEC exposures should normally be kept well under one second. When X-ray techniques are used that result
in longer exposures, the film density will not be correct due to failure of reciprocity of the film.
RLF (reciprocity law failure) compensation is provided to compensate for longer AEC exposure
times. An offset may be added to each AEC calibration set (each film screen combination) to increase the
AEC ON time as exposure time increases. RLF compensation is applied to the following range of times:

50 ms to 500 ms.
500 ms to 1000 ms.
1000 ms and above.

Care must be exercised when using table buckys with low kV values because most tabletops and grids
absorb considerable radiation in the range of 60 - 65 kVp. This will adversely affect AEC operation.

Figure 3D-2 shows the effect of kVp, optical density, and radiation. Note particularly the nonlinear change in
density at 85-90 kVp.

Figure 3D-2: kVp vs. optical density vs. dose

3D.1.3 Film/Screen Response vs. kVp

Film screen response to kVp is not linear; therefore compensation must be provided in order to maintain
constant film density as kVp is changed for different anatomical studies. By selecting and calibrating various
kV breakpoints, the overall system response will be compensated such as to yield a constant film density.
Up to eight breakpoints per film screen combination are available. The eight breakpoints are spread
over three kV ranges as shown below:

Low kV: 50, 55, 65 kV
Knee kV: 75 kV
High kV: 85, 95, 110, 130 kV.

Refer to figure 3D-3.

Figure 3D-3: kV breakpoints vs relative density


3D.1.4 AEC Calibration Range

Since the Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators allow for up to three separate film screen
combinations to be calibrated, the following points must be considered:

The AEC board allows for a 0 to a maximum of 10 volt ramp at the comparator input. All AEC signals
must fit within this range (for all film / screens, densities, and techniques).

Most X-ray applications require the use of two or more different film screen combinations, all of which
will require different exposure doses.

Using the slowest film screen combination, the required film input dose will be determined.

Once this value is determined (during AEC calibration), the density calibration is performed to allow
100% (double the dose) and 50% (half the dose) values. These are typical values, and will determine
the maximum required range of the AEC reference voltage (the output from the D/A converter).

Figure 3D-4 illustrates the different windows required for various film screen combinations.

Figure 3D-4: Film/screen speed vs. D/A output

3D.1.5 Multiple Spot Compensation

Separate density compensation is provided when a SFD (Spot Film Device) is used for multiple film splits.
This allows compensation when the SFD diaphragm is in the X-ray field.
An external output from the SFD must be provided when multiple spots are requested to enable this
function.

3D.1.6 A Typical R&F Room

Figure 3D-5 shows source-image distances and image receptors as used in a typical R&F installation.

Figure 3D-5: Typical R&F installation

3D.2.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP

3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet

Before continuing, it is suggested that a copy of the table below be filled in with all required information.
Refer to the example AEC setup worksheet on the next page.

FUNCTION RECEPTOR 1 RECEPTOR 2 RECEPTOR 3 RECEPTOR 4
Film/Screen 1.
2.
3.
Nominal optical density:
Grid ratio/SID:
Min - max kVp range:
Density steps
Density dose
change
+%:
(per step)
-%:
Chamber type:
Regulatory AEC dose
requirements?

Is film processing maintained?
Assigned receptor name:
Are all cassettes similar?
Additional notes:
Additional notes:

Table 3D-1: AEC setup worksheet

ALL RECEPTORS MUST HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF DENSITY STEPS AND THE SAME DENSITY DOSE
CHANGE PER STEP (DENSITY SETTINGS ARE COMMON TO ALL FILM SCREENS AND RECEPTORS).

3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet (Cont)

Note: The example below is supplied for reference only. It does not represent an actual installation.

FUNCTION RECEPTOR 1 RECEPTOR 2 RECEPTOR 3 RECEPTOR 4
Film/Screen 1. Lanex/reg Lanex/reg Lanex/reg PMT/I.I.
2. Lanex/med Lanex/chest
3.
Nominal optical density: 1.2 1.1 1.4
Grid ratio/SID: 12:1 8:1 10:1 10:1
Min - max kVp range: 60 - 120 65 - 140 80 - 110 70 - 120
Density steps 8 8 8 8
Density dose
change
+%: 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
(per step)
-%: 6.25 6.25 6.25 6.25
Chamber type: Ion Solid state Ion PMT
Regulatory AEC dose
requirements?
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Is film processing maintained? Yes Yes Yes Yes
Assigned receptor name: Table Wall SFD Digital
Are all cassettes similar? Yes Yes Yes N/A
Additional notes:
Additional notes:

Table 3D-2: Sample AEC setup worksheet

3D.2.2 AEC Precalibration Checks

It is recommended that a copy of the form below be filled in with the required information before attempting
AEC calibration.

1.
Verify that the AEC chambers are mounted correctly
in the Bucky or spot film device. Note that some
chamber types must be physically isolated from
equipment ground, refer to figure 3D-6 as an
example.
CHECK:
2.
Verify that each AEC chamber / pickup is properly
connected to its intended input channel on the AEC
board.
Refer to AEC board pictorials, figure 3D-8 to 3D-
11 for input channel designations
CHECK:
3.
Make and type of AEC chamber/pickup:

AEC Ch 1_____________________________
AEC Ch 2_____________________________
AEC Ch 3_____________________________
AEC Ch 4_____________________________
4.
Verify signal grounding for the AEC chamber. The
only electrical ground should be at the AEC board in
the generator. This applies to the ground braid
(shield) for the AEC signal cable and to the ground
return conductor(s) in the AEC signal cable.
CHECK:
5.
Verify that the AEC board is fully inserted into the
mating edge connector (if applicable), that all
connections to the AEC board are secure, and that
the AEC board is securely fastened.
CHECK:
6.
Before calibrating, verify that the AEC system is
functioning. This includes the AEC chambers /
devices and the AEC circuits in the generator. Each
of the fields on the AEC device must be able to
terminate the exposure.
CHECK:
7.
Radiographic techniques to be performed with the
equipment (high kV chest, G.I. studies etc)?

8.
Normal exposure factors used by the customer
(typical mAs / kV range)?

Table 3D-3: Precalibration checklist

3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation

Figure 3D-6 shows an installed AEC chamber. Note particularly the use of a suitable insulating material to
isolate the body of the chamber from the receptor ground. This is required for non-insulated AEC chambers.

3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation (Cont)

Figure 3D-6: AEC chamber installation

3D.2.4 AEC Pickup Connections (Overview)

Review the applicable sections of chapter 3 section B and C for interfacing AEC devices and programming
the image receptors to select the correct AEC device (or no AEC if desired). It should be ensured that each
receptor used for AEC has a Bucky or equivalent. A typical R&F room configuration will consist of the
following:

Table Bucky
Wall Bucky
Spot film Bucky
Aux - digital acquisition

Refer to Figure 3D-7 for typical AEC connections. This is a simplified view only, refer to figures 3D-8 to 3D-
11 for AEC board layouts used in Millenia and Indico 100 generators. Refer to chapter 1E for the AEC board
location in your generator.

Figure 3D-7: AEC pickup connections

3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)

The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes / models of solid state chambers (i.e. Comet,
Ziehm, Gilardoni). This AEC board is used in various models of generators requiring those AEC chamber
types.
This board will be fitted with 6 pin circular connectors (J 1 to J 4) or with 5 pin in-line connectors (J 11
to J 14), depending on the application.

Figure 3D-8: Dedicated solid state AEC board

AEC board input assignment:

Ch 1 =J 1 / J 11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
Ch 2 =J 2 / J 12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
Ch 3 =J 3 / J 13 - Spot Film Device
Ch 4 =J 4 / J 14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.)

The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:

R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.

3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers) Cont

The following tables show the pin outs for both the 6 pin circular connectors and for the 5 pin in-line
connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-8.

FUNCTION PIN
Anode 1 NOTE: PINS 1, 2, AND 3 ON THE
Anode 2 CIRCULAR CONNECTOR ARE
Anode 3 ALL CONNECTED IN PARALLEL.
Cathode, left 4
Cathode, right 5
Cathode, middle 6
Ground Connector shell
Table 3D-4: Pin outs for 6 pin circular connector

FUNCTION PIN
Anode 2
Cathode, left 3
Cathode, right 5
Cathode, middle 4
Ground 1
Table 3D-5: Pin outs for 5 pin in-line connector

If the AEC input signal has excessive electrical noise superimposed on the signal, it is suggested that
jumpers J W1 to J W4 as appropriate be temporarily installed. If this improves the signal to noise ratio, the
jumper(s) should be left in. Excessive signal to noise ratio generally shows up as inconsistent AEC exposure
times at low mAs values.
It is the responsibility of the installer to determine the need for these jumper(s).

3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers)

The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes / models of ion chambers (i.e. AID, GE,
Vacutec, Philips Amplimat, etc). This AEC board is used in various models of generators requiring those
AEC chamber types.
This board will be fitted with 9 pin D connectors (J 11 to J 14), or with 12 pin in-line connectors (J 1 to
J 4), depending on the application.

R79
AEC DEDICATED ION CHAMBER
CPI CANADA INC Made in Canada
J 4
J 3
J 1
J 2
J 11
J 14
J W1 J W2
J 13
J 12
R11 R12 R13 R14
R1 R2 R3 R4
J W3 J W4
J W7 J W8
J W5 J W6
J 5
ML_IONBD.CDR

Figure 3D-9: Dedicated ion chamber AEC board

AEC board input assignment:

Ch 1 =J 1 / J 11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
Ch 2 =J 2 / J 12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
Ch 3 =J 3 / J 13 - Spot Film Device
Ch 4 =J 4 / J 14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.)



3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) Cont

The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation:

R11 is used for channel 1 short exposure time compensation.

R79 adjusts the output of the high voltage bias supply. This is only fitted on versions of this board intended
for use with ion chambers that require a separate high voltage bias supply. R79 adjusts the value of the
+300 / +500 VDC, and the +45 VDC outputs, and should be set as per the ion chamber manufacturer
specifications.

The following tables show the pin outs for both the 9 pin D connectors and for the 12 pin in-line connectors
on the AEC board in figure 3D-9. The 9 pin connectors are compatible with most models of AID ionization
chambers. However, the installer should verify compatibility of the pin outs with the chamber(s) being used.

FUNCTION PIN NOTE
+300 VDC output 1 Only provided on configurations of this board that
require the +300 VDC output.
Left / right field select 2 See note below.
Middle field select 3
Start command output 4
Signal input 5
Right / left field select 6 See note below.
-12 VDC output 7
+12 VDC output 8
Ground 9
Table 3D-6: Pin outs for 9 pin D connector

NOTE:
J umpers J W1 to J W8 swap the left and right fields on J 11 to J 14. J umpering pins 2-3 of the field selector
jumpers (J W7 / J W8 for channel 1, J W5 / J W6 for channel 2, J W3 / J W4 for channel 3, J W1 / J W2 for
channel 4) connects the right field select signal to pin 6 and the left field select signal to pin 2. J umpering
pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the right field select signal to pin 2 and the left field select
signal to pin 6.

FUNCTION PIN NOTE
+500 VDC output 1 The +500, +or -300, and +45 VDC outputs are
+or - 300 VDC output 2 only provided on configurations of this board
+45 VDC output 3 designed to interface to ion chambers requiring
+12 VDC output 4 these voltage outputs.
-12 VDC output 5
-24 VDC output 6 +12, -12, -24 VDC outputs are typically used as
Ground 7 the DC supply for a pre-amplifier, often part of
Start command output 8 the ion chamber. -24 VDC is not available on
Left field select 9 CMP 200.
Middle field select 10
Right field select 11
Signal input 12
Table 3D-7: Pin outs for 12 pin in-line connector

3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board)

The AEC board shown below is factory configured to be compatible with most makes / models of AEC
chambers (ion and solid state) on the market. This assembly also contains a low current, high voltage supply
for a photo multiplier tube (PMT). The PMT supply is located on the upper board, which also contains the
connectors to interface to the AEC pickup device(s).

Figure 3D-10: Universal AEC board

AEC board input / output assignment:

Ch 1 =J 1 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
Ch 2 =J 2 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
Ch 3 =J 3 - Spot Film Device.
Ch 4 =J 4 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.).
J 7 =High voltage output for the PMT (if used)



Refer to the end of subsection 3D.2.7 for the procedure for adjusting R10, R19, and R24.

3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) Cont

The following table shows the pin outs for the 12 pin connectors J 1 to J 4 on the AEC board in figure 3D-10
and 3D-11. The pins on J 7 are all connected in parallel, thus the PMT high voltage may be taken from any of
the pins on that connector.
The connections to the AEC pickup chamber vary considerably between ion chambers and solid
state chambers. For clarity two tables are shown below, the first for ion chambers and the second for solid
state chambers.

FUNCTION PIN NOTE
+500 VDC output 1 +500, +300, +50 VDC outputs are provided for
+300 VDC output 2 ion chamber use if required. +12, -12, -24 VDC
+50 VDC output 3 outputs are typically used as the DC supply for
+12 VDC output 4 a pre-amplifier, often part of the ion chamber.
-12 VDC output 5
-24 VDC output 6 The start command, and left, middle, right
Ground 7 field select outputs are jumper configured to
Start command output 8 be active high or active low as per the AEC
Left field select 9 chamber requirements. The signal input is
Middle field select 10 jumper configured to accept a positive going
Right field select 11 or negative going ramp or DC signal as per
Signal input 12 the AEC chamber output.

Table 3D-8: Ion chamber connections

FUNCTION PIN NOTE
+500 VDC output 1 Not used for solid state AEC chambers
-12 VDC output 5 Not used for solid state AEC chambers
-24 VDC output 6 Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Ground 7 Connect pin 8 to pin 7 (ground). Connect the
Start 8 common anodes for left, middle, right to pin 8.
Left 9 Connect cathode (left) to LEFT, cathode middle
Middle 10 to MIDDLE, and cathode right to RIGHT.
Right 11 Cable shield (if used) connects to pin 8.
Signal input 12 Not used for solid state AEC chambers

Table 3D-9: Solid state chamber connections

3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) Cont

R10, R19 and R24 adjust the output voltage from the high voltage power supply on the AEC interface board
(the upper board on the universal AEC board assembly in figure 3D-10 and 3D-11). This high voltage supply
generates the PMT high voltage, up to approximately -1000 VDC available at J 7, and also the nominal +500,
+300 and +50 VDC supplies noted in table 3D-8. The +500, +300 and +50 VDC supplies are available to
bias ion chambers if needed and are adjustable as defined below.
These potentiometers are switched into the circuit electronically by logic circuits connected to the
AEC channel select commands. Only one potentiometer will be active at any given time, the condition under
which each potentiometer is active is described below, along with the function of that potentiometer.

R10 adjusts the high voltage supply output for the PMT when ABS operation is selected. This is
described in chapter 3E.
R24 adjusts the high voltage supply output when AEC channel 1, 2, or 3 is selected. AEC channels 1, 2,
3 are normally used with an AEC chamber.
R24 will be used to adjust the +500, +300 and +50 VDC bias voltage outputs if required for ion
chamber(s) connected to AEC channels 1, 2 or 3. Refer to the AEC chamber manufacturers
recommendations to adjust this voltage.
R19 adjusts the high voltage supply output when AEC channel 4 is selected. AEC channel 4 is normally
used for digital acquisition or spot film work using a PMT pickup for AEC control. This will typically be the
same PMT used for ABS control during fluoroscopy operation.
Refer to 3D.4.0 for further details if using a PMT for AEC control on AEC channel 4.

3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation)

The AEC board shown below has short AEC time compensation, and is factory configured to be compatible
with most makes / models of AEC chambers (ion and solid state) on the market. This assembly also
contains a low current, high voltage supply for a photo multiplier tube (PMT). The PMT supply is located on
the upper board, which also contains the connectors to interface to the AEC pickup device(s).

Figure 3D-11: Universal AEC board with short AEC time compensation

3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) Cont

In order to clearly show the adjustment pots on the lower (AEC) board, the upper board which
contains the AEC and PMT interface connectors and the high voltage supply is shown shifted from
its actual position.

AEC board input / output assignment:

Ch 1 =J 1 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
Ch 2 =J 2 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
Ch 3 =J 3 - Spot Film Device.
Ch 4 =J 4 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.).
J 7 =High voltage output for the PMT (if used)



The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation:


Refer to tables 3D-8 and 3D-9 for the connector pin outs. Refer to the end of subsection 3D.2.7 for the
procedure for adjusting R10, R19, and R24.


3D.3.0 PRECALIBRATION NOTES:

This section contains information that must be understood and confirmed prior to and / or during AEC
calibration.

CAUTION: THE PROCEDURES IN THESE SECTIONS REQUIRE X-RAY EXPOSURES. TAKE ALL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.

SHOULD AN IMPROPER TECHNIQUE BE SELECTED, OR AN AEC FAULT OCCUR CAUSING NO
AEC FEEDBACK SIGNAL TO THE GENERATOR, THE EXPOSURE WILL TERMINATE IF THE RAMP
VOLTAGE FAILS TO REACH 4% OF THE EXPECTED RAMP VOLTAGE WHEN THE EXPOSURE TIME
REACHES 20% OF THE SELECTED BACK UP TIME.

When using PMTs or photo diodes for AEC from the output of an image intensifier, there is normally
no need to iterate all the kV break points. It is usually sufficient to use the 75 kV breakpoint
calibration value for that film screen at all kV breakpoints. If doing this, the calibration values should
be confirmed at all kV breakpoints using the acquired digital images.
During AEC calibration, all AEC exposures should be done using mA values such that the
exposures are in the 30 to 100 ms range UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
During AEC calibration, always ensure that the central ray is centered relative to the image receptor.
Prior to placing the absorbers, ensure that the collimator is opened sufficiently to irradiate ALL fields
on the AEC pickup device.
The recommended absorber in table 3D-12 is water. This should be in a plastic container of uniform
thickness. Lexan of a similar thickness is also a suitable absorber.
Ensure that the absorber is positioned to fully cover the X-ray field. The absorber must extend a
minimum of 3/8 in. (10 mm) beyond the X-ray field.
All components and assemblies used during AEC calibration must be those that will be used during
procedures, and must be positioned as they will be in actual use of the X-ray room.
The generator must be known to be calibrated before proceeding.
During AEC calibration, if exposure times do not change if the mA is varied, it may be that the input
signal level to the AEC board may be too high. If this is experienced, check the ramp voltage at the
output of the first gain stage (the first operational amplifier output) on the AEC board for the subject
AEC channel. This voltage must never exceed 10 V. If this voltage does exceed 10 V, reduce the
input signal level as required.

3D.4.0 AEC USING A PMT

This section applies if a PMT is to be used for AEC control on AEC channel 4. AEC channels 1, 2, and 3 (as
applicable) should be calibrated first (sections 3D.6.0 to 3D.12.0), before calibrating AEC channel 4.

WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR BEFORE CONNECTING A PMT, AND USE APPROPRIATE
HIGH VOLTAGE PRECAUTIONS WHEN MEASURING THE PMT HIGH VOLTAGE.

Figure 3D-12: Connections for PMT AEC

Step Action
1. Connect the PMT output to J 7 on the generator interface board (the ABS input) as
shown in figure 3D-12. If the PMT for AEC on channel 4 configuration was factory
ordered, the generator will be pre-wired as shown above. The ABS input is at J 7-12, and
the signal will be divided for the AEC board via the resistor from J 7-12 to J 7-10.
Appropriate high voltage shielded cable should be used for the PMT signal connections.
2. Set the PMT voltage to approximately -650 VDC for AEC operation using R19 on the
AEC interface board. AEC channel 4 must be selected in order for R19 to be active.
USE ONLY TP5 ON THE AEC INTERFACE BOARD (FIGURE 3D-10, 3D-11) FOR
THE HV METER GROUND WHEN MEASURING PMT HIGH VOLTAGE. CONNECT
THE GROUND LEAD FIRST BEFORE MEASURING THE HIGH VOLTAGE. DO NOT
ATTEMPT TO MEASURE THIS WITHOUT A SUITABLE METER.
3. Configure AEC channel 4 as per 3D.6.0 steps 6 to 14, but use the following settings in
the AEC SETUP menu: Select ION chamber, and enable FILM SCREEN 1 only, and
CENTER FIELD only. If AEC SETUP menu screen 2 is available, set C FIELD COMP to
0 (this is model dependent, refer to AEC SETUP in chapter 3C).
4. Enter the calibration value 45 into EACH of the kV breakpoints. The procedure for
setting the 75 kV knee breakpoint is detailed in 3D.6.0, step 16. The remaining
breakpoints are set in a similar manner (refer to the balance of 3D.6.0 for details on
accessing those breakpoint settings).
5. Adjust the channel 4 gain adjustment potentiometer on the AEC board to achieve the
desired I.I. input dose at the 75 kV knee breakpoint, using absorber thickness per table
3D-12.
6. The PMT voltage that was set in step 2 may need to be adjusted up or down if the gain
adjustment potentiometer does not provide the desired adjustment range in step 5.
7. Repeat the exposures at other kV breakpoints that cover the desired kV operating
range, checking the I.I. input dose at each kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per
table 3D-12.
8. Readjust the breakpoint calibration values in step 7, if necessary, to achieve the desired
I.I. input dose at those kV values. DO NOT READJ UST THE AEC GAIN POT OR PMT
VOLTAGE.


3D.5.0 AEC FIELD BALANCE

If your generator does NOT have AEC SETUP menu 2 (see the section AEC SETUP in chapter 3C),
follow the AEC chamber manufacturers recommendations for AEC field balancing.
If your generator has AEC SETUP menu 2, follow the AEC chamber manufacturers
recommendations for AEC field balancing if available. If the AEC chamber has no provision for AEC
field balancing, follow the steps below.
PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS IMMEDIATELY BEFORE DOING AEC CALIBRATION AT
THE 75 kV KNEE BREAKPOINT IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:
1. Enter AEC SETUP menu 2, and ensure that each of the field compensation values is set
to 0.
2. When set up to do dose measurements at the 75 kV knee breakpoint, evaluate the AEC
field balance by measuring the dose at the film plane during an AEC exposure as each
of the three AEC fields is individually selected.
3. If the AEC chamber field balance is not acceptable, go to AEC SETUP menu 2 and
adjust the right or left compensation values up or down as required. Do not adjust the
middle field (C) compensation value.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3. The right and left AEC field compensations are adjusted to match
the middle field. This process may need to be repeated several times until the three
AEC fields are suitably balanced.

3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY)

Figure 3D-13: Equipment setup for table Bucky AEC calibration

3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont

Step Action
SETUP FOR AEC CALIBRATION

IF THE AEC BOARD BEING CALIBRATED HAS SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION
(FIGURE 3D-9 OR 3D-11), THE SHORT EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION MUST FIRST BE
DISABLED.
TO DO THIS, ADJUST ALL SHORT AEC EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION
POTENTIOMETERS TO ZERO, I.E. SUCH THAT THE WIPERS ON EACH POT ARE GROUNDED.
VERIFY THE CORRECT SETTINGS BY USING AN OHMMETER ON LOW OHMS RANGE AND
ENSURING A NEAR ZERO OHMS READING FROM THE WIPER OF EACH SHORT AEC TIME
COMPENSATION POT TO GROUND. REFER TO TABLE 3D-14 FOR THE SHORT AEC TIME
COMPENSATION POTENTIOMETER DESIGNATIONS.
FAILURE TO PRESET THESE POTS WILL RESULT IN DIFFICULTY IN PERFORMING
AEC CALIBRATION.
1. Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-13.
2. Align the tube stand and table Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the
image receptor.
3. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the
central ray remains centered relative to the image receptor.
4. Place the R probe at the film plane, i.e. behind the grid. If this cannot be done, then
place the probe on the table top. Ensure that the R-probe is located as close as possible
to the central ray, but not blocking any pickup areas on the AEC device. The R meter
must be set to measure in the micro-R range.
5. Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
6. Place the generator into the programming mode. Refer to section 3C.1.1.
7. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select GEN CONFIGURATION.
8. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC SETUP.
9. Set up the AEC parameters in the AEC SETUP menu FOR EACH ACTIVE AEC
CHANNEL. Refer to AEC SETUP in chapter 3C.
10. Set up the image receptors in the RECEPTOR SETUP menu such that each receptor
has the desired AEC channel assigned to it. Refer to RECEPTOR SETUP in chapter
3C.
11. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, set MEMORY to NO for each image receptor. This
will ensure that the next receptor being calibrated will not remember the techniques from
the previous receptor.
The MEMORY function may be reset as desired after AEC calibration is completed.
12. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, ensure that the AEC BACKUP MAS and AEC
BACKUP MS are set sufficiently high that the generator backup timer will not terminate
the exposure.
13. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC CALIBRATION.
14. From the AEC CALIBRATION menu select FILM SCREEN 1 (the slowest film screen
combination).

CAUTION: DURING THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, BE SURE THAT THE SELECTED
TECHNIQUES WILL NOT OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. USE CAUTION WHEN REPEATING
EXPOSURES AS THIS MAY QUICKLY OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. MOST X-RAY TUBE
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMEND NO MORE THAN TWO HIGH SPEED STARTS PER
MINUTE.

NOTE: BE SURE TO USE THE SAME CASSETTE FOR EACH EXPOSURE AT THAT FILM SPEED.


NOTE: FOR THE CMP 200 AND THE INDICO 100 RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, LCD SCREEN DETAILS
NOT RELEVANT TO AEC CALIBRATION WILL DIFFER SLIGHTLY FROM THE EXAMPLES IN
THIS SECTION. HOWEVER, THE AEC CALIBRATION MENUS WILL APPEAR AS SHOWN IN
THIS SECTION.
RLF COMPENSATION AND MULTI-SPOT COMPENSATION IS NOT AVAILABLE ON CMP200.

The following screens are used for AEC calibration
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 1 DENSITY SETUP
FILM SCREEN 2

FILM SCREEN 3

EXIT

*TUBE? 0%HU AEC CAL, F/S 1*
50KV: 84.0: 85KV: 42.8
55KV: 78.0: 95KV: 38.0
65KV: 66.0: +
75KV: 54.0 -
3200MS << >>

110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION +
MULT. SPOT COMP: 0% -
3200MS <<

Step Action
75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
15. Select the table Bucky image receptor.
16. Select the 75 kV knee breakpoint and enter the value 45 using the + or - buttons
adjacent to the LCD display.
17. Select the appropriate mA for the first film speed being calibrated per table 3D-12,
remembering that the slowest film screen used in that installation must be calibrated first
(example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select large focus, center field.
18. Make an exposure and note the dose and mAs.
19. Referring to table 3D-11, select the estimated dose required for the film speed being
calibrated i.e. 1025 25 R (see note on next page regarding conversion of R to Gy if
desired) at the 75 kV knee breakpoint for 100 speed film.
Note that the dose values in the table are based on the R-probe being located at
the film plane. If the probe was placed in front of the grid the dose values shown
in the tables must be increased accordingly. The dose in front of the grid will
typically be approximately double the dose at the film plane.
20. Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board (see note below) while taking
exposures until the dose noted in the previous step is obtained.
CHANNEL 1 ON THE AEC BOARD IS TYPICALLY USED FOR THE TABLE
BUCKY AEC CHAMBER. YOUR INSTALLATION MAY USE A DIFFERENT
CHANNEL ON THE AEC BOARD.
REFER TO TABLE 3D-10 FOR THE AEC BOARD GAIN POTENTIOMETER
(GAIN POT) DESIGNATIONS FOR THE VARIOUS AEC BOARDS.


AEC BOARD CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3 CHANNEL 4
Solid State (Fig 3D-8) R1 R2 R3 R4
Ion Chamber (Fig 3D-9) R1 R2 R3 R4
Universal (Fig 3D-10) R1 R26 R27 R28

Table 3D-10: AEC board gain pot designations

FILM SPEED FILM PLANE DOSE @ 75 kV
100 1025 25 uR
200 550 25 uR
400 260 12 uR
800 135 12 uR

Table 3D-11: Film speed vs. approximate dose @ 75 kV

These are APPROXIMATE dose inputs to the film cassette plane at an SID of 40 in. (100 cm), using a
grid with a 12:1 ratio.

NOTE: To convert from R to Gy divide the value in R by 114.5. This will give the value in Gy (for
example 114.5 R = 1 Gy).

Step Action
21. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique as in the previous step, expose the film and develop it.
22. Measure the optical density. The desired value should have been previously recorded in
a copy of table 3D-1.
23. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the gain pot (as per
step 20) to increase or decrease the density, then repeat the previous two steps.
24. Once the desired film density is achieved, record the mAs, dose, calibration number and
O.D. in a copy of table 3D-13.
FOR EACH BREAKPOINT IN THE REMAINDER OF THIS SECTION, START WITH THE
APPROXIMATE DOSE AS PER TABLE 3D-12. AFTER THAT DOSE IS ACHIEVED, A FILM MUST
BE EXPOSED AND THE O.D. VERIFIED. FURTHER DOSE ITERATIONS MAY BE REQUIRED TO
ACHIEVE THE DESIRED OPTICAL DENSITY.

DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT AFTER THE 75KV KNEE
BREAKPOINT IS CALIBRATED. DOSE / DENSITY ADJUSTMENTS WILL ONLY BE DONE
BY ADJUSTING THE CALIBRATION VALUES FOR THE OTHER KV BREAKPOINTS.

55 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
25. Change the absorber thickness per table 3D-12. As before, ensure that the absorber
fully blocks the X-ray field.
26. Select the 55 kV breakpoint.
27. Make an exposure and note the dose. Use mA values as per table 3D-12.
28. Adjust the 55 kV calibration numbers using the + or - buttons such that the actual dose
is equal to the target dose at 55 kV for the selected film speed per table 3D-12.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.


100 speed film screen
Break point Absorber Dose mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kV knee pt. 15 cm H
2
O 1025 /R 59.2 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
55 kV 10 cm H
2
O 1808 /R 54 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
50 kV 10 cm H
2
O 1832 /R 128 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
65 kV 10 cm H
2
O 1436 /R 44 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
110 kV 20 cm H
2
O 1088 /R 24 mAs 200 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
130 kV 25 cm H
2
O 848 /R 16 mAs 200 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
85 kV 20 cm H
2
O 1060 /R 54 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
95 kV 20 cm H
2
O 1008 /R 44 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)

Break point Absorber Dose mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kVp knee pt. 15 cm H
2
O 518 /R 30 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
55 kVp 10 cm H
2
O 904 /R 26 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
50 kVp 10 cm H
2
O 916 /R 64 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
65 kVp 10 cm H
2
O 718 /R 22 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
110 kVp 20 cm H
2
O 544 /R 12 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
130 kVp 25 cm H
2
O 484 /R 8 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
85 kVp 20 cm H
2
O 530 /R 27 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
95 kVp 20 cm H
2
O 504 /R 22 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)

Break Point Absorber Dose mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
2
O 259 /R 14.8 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
55 kVp 10 cm H
2
O 452 /R 13 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
50 kVp 10 cm H
2
O 458 /R 32 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
65 kVp 10 cm H
2
O 359 /R 11 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
110 kVp 20 cm H
2
O 272 /R 6 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
130 kVp 25 cm H
2
O 424 /R 4 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
85 kVp 20 cm H
2
O 265 /R 13.5 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
95 kVp 20 cm H
2
O 252 /R 11 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)

Break Point Absorber Dose mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
2
O 129 /R 7.4 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
55 kVp 10 cm H
2
O 226 /R 6.5 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
50 kVp 10 cm H
2
O 229/R 16 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
65 kVp 10 cm H
2
O 179 /R 5.5 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
110 kVp 20 cm H
2
O 136 /R 3 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
130 kVp 25 cm H
2
O 212 /R 2 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
85 kVp 20 cm H
2
O 132 /R 6.7 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
95 kVp 20 cm H
2
O 126 /R 5.5 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)

Table 3D-12: Breakpoint calibration factors

For SIDs other than 40 in. (100 cm) multiply the dose by the factor [new SID / 40 in. (100 cm)]
2



3D.6.1 Break point calibration worksheet

Record the final measurements in a copy of the table below. The final measurements are those obtained
AFTER films have been developed to verify the correct O.D. at each breakpoint.

FILM SCREEN 1 SPEED =
#1 BK. POINT =75 kV mAs = DOSE = CAL. NO. = O.D. =



Table 3D-13: Breakpoint worksheet


Step Action
29. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique, expose the film and develop it.
30. Measure the optical density. The optical density should be as per step 22.
31. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the 55 kV calibration
number using the + or - buttons, then repeat the previous two steps.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
32. Once the desired film density is achieved, record the required values in a copy of table
3D-13.

33. If special techniques are NOT used which require the 50 kV range, simply enter the 55
kV calibration number into the 50 kV breakpoint using the + and - buttons.
Note that at approximately 55 kV and under, the film screen sensitivity becomes too low
for practical AEC operation when used with a Bucky.
34. If the 50 kV range IS used, the 50 kV breakpoint must be calibrated. To do this, select
the 50 kV breakpoint. The 50 kV step will use the same absorber as used for the 55 kV
step.
35. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 50 kV breakpoint if desired, substituting 50 kV
where applicable in place of 55 kV.

36. Select the 65 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 65 kV
breakpoint.
37. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 65 kV breakpoint, substituting 65 kV where
applicable in place of 55 kV.
38. IN THE FOLLOWING STEPS, SELECT >> AND << AS REQUIRED TO NAVIGATE
BETWEEN THE TWO BREAKPOINT SCREENS (SCREEN 1 LISTS BREAKPOINTS
50 KV TO 95 KV, SCREEN 2 SHOWS BREAKPOINTS 110 AND 130 KV).

breakpoint. Use the appropriate mA for this breakpoint as per table 3D-12.

41. If special high kV techniques are NOT used which require the 130 kV range, enter the
110 kV calibration number into the 130 kV breakpoint using the + and - buttons.
42. If the 130 kV range IS used, the 130 kV breakpoint must be calibrated. To do this, select
the 130 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 130 kV
breakpoint.
43. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 130 kV breakpoint if desired, substituting 130 kV
where applicable in place of 55 kV.

breakpoint.


Step Action
breakpoint.
48. Select << to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.

Step Action
FILM SCREEN 2 BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
49. Select FILM SCREEN 2.
50. Repeat steps 16 to 48 as described for film screen 1 except:

WHEN CALIBRATING THE 75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT FOR FILM SCREEN 2, DO
NOT ADJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT. DOSE ADJUSTMENTS MUST ONLY
BE MADE BY VARYING THE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION NUMBERS.

FILM SCREEN 2 MUST BE THE NEXT HIGHEST FILM SPEED AFTER FILM
SCREEN 1.

Step Action
FILM SCREEN 3 BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
51. Select FILM SCREEN 3.
52. Repeat steps 16 to 48 as described for film screen 1 except:

WHEN CALIBRATING THE 75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT FOR FILM SCREEN 3, DO
NOT ADJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT. DOSE ADJUSTMENTS MUST ONLY
BE MADE BY VARYING THE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION NUMBERS.

FILM SCREEN 3 MUST BE THE HIGHEST FILM SPEED.

3D.7.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE)

Step Action
THIS SECTION ONLY APPLIES FOR AEC BOARDS WITH SHORT AEC EXPOSURE
TIME COMPENSATION (FIGURE 3D-9 OR 3D-11) IF AEC EXPOSURES LESS
THAN APPROXIMATELY 15 MS ARE REQUIRED.
1. Select the image receptor to be short AEC time compensated, i.e. table Bucky.
2. Select the highest film speed used on the selected receptor, and then select the 75 kV
breakpoint.
3. Set the mA per table 3D-12 for the film speed being used. Reinstall the absorber as per
table 3D-12 for the 75 kV breakpoint.
4. Make an exposure and confirm the dose (or mAs) readings as previously recorded in
table 3D-13.
5. Reduce the absorber thickness such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to
approximately 10 ms.
6. Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such
that the dose (or mAs) is approximately the same as previously recorded (step 4). The
short AEC time compensation potentiometer designations are given in table 3D-14.

3D.7.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE) Cont

AEC BOARD CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3 CHANNEL 4
Ion Chamber (Fig 3D-9) R11 R12 R13 R14

Table 3D-14: Short AEC time compensation pot designations

Step Action
7. Reduce the absorber thickness again such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to
approximately 6 ms (but not less).
8. Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such
that the dose (or mAs) is approximately the same as it was in step 6.
9. The short AEC time compensation adjustments affect the AEC calibration at longer
exposure times. Therefore, it may now be necessary to readjust the gain pot for the AEC
channel being calibrated to restore the dose (or mAs) values to the values previously
recorded in table 3D-13. Ensure that the absorber thickness and mA values are as per
table 3D-12 when readjusting the AEC gain pot.
10. Films should be exposed and developed, and the O.D. checked at the 75 kV breakpoint
at AEC exposure times of approximately 6 ms and approximately 100 ms. If the film
density is not acceptable at both short and long AEC exposure times, it will be
necessary to iterate the adjustments of both the short AEC time compensation pot and
the AEC gain pot by repeating steps 3 to 8.
11. Repeat steps 1 to 10 for each image receptor (AEC channel) to be short AEC time
compensated.

3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION

The following screens are used for density calibration
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 2

FILM SCREEN 3

EXIT

*TUBE? 0%HU *DENS. SETUP*
-8: -
-7: -
-6: - +
-5: 62% -
3200MS EXIT >>

-4: 50%
-3: 37%
-2: 25% +
-1: 12% -
3200MS << >>

3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)

+1: 12%
+2: 25%
+3: 37% +
+4: 50% -
3200MS << >>

+5: 62%
+6: -
+7: - +
+8: - -
3200MS << RETURN

Please note the following points regarding density calibration:

Up to eight density plus and eight density minus steps are available. If 8 density steps are not
required, the unwanted density steps may be programmed out per the procedure below. For example, if
only 5 density steps are desired, then density steps 6, 7, 8 may be deprogrammed.

Once the desired number of density steps are known, the relative minimum and maximum dose
values must be determined. Typically the minimum density step will result in half (50%) of the nominal
dose and the maximum density step will typically give double the nominal dose (100% increase). The
nominal dose is the value that was recorded at 0 density in table 3D-13.

The relative dose change per density step must be determined next. To do this, note the relative
minimum and maximum dose as determined above (i.e. 50% at min density and 100% increase at max
density), then calculate the number of - density steps and the number of +density steps that will be
required.
The relative dose change between density steps will then be the minimum density (i.e. 50) divided
by the number of density minus steps or the maximum density (i.e. 100) divided by the number of
density plus steps. This will yield the required dose increment for each density minus step and for each
density plus step respectively.
For 8 density steps, this gives a dose decrease of 6.25% per density minus step (8 steps x 6.25%
per step =50% dose at -8 density) or a dose increase of 12.5% per density plus step (8 steps x 12.5%
per step =100% dose increase at +8 density).

Refer to table 3D-15 for two typical examples of density steps vs. calibration numbers. For 8 minus
density steps the dose decrease is 6.25% per step, and for 8 +density steps the dose increase is 12.5%
per step as per the example calculation above.
For 5 minus density steps the dose decrease is 10% per step, and for 5 +density steps the dose
increase is 20% per step.



DENSITY
STEP
CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 8
DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +8
DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE)
DENSITY
STEP
CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 5
DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +5
DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE)
-8 50
-7 44
-6 38
-5 31 -5 50
-4 25 -4 40
-3 19 -3 30
-2 13 -2 20
-1 6 -1 10
0 DENSITY: SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
+1 13 +1 20
+2 25 +2 40
+3 38 +3 60
+4 50 +4 80
+5 63 +5 99
+6 75
+7 88
+8 99

Table 3D-15: Example density values

Step Action
1. Reselect FILM SCREEN 1. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 75 kV
breakpoint.
2. Reselect the 75 kV knee breakpoint.
3. Select << to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
4. Select DENSITY SETUP.
5. Referring to table 3D-13, note the dose at 75 kV for film screen 1. This will be referred to
as the 0 density dose.
6. Select the highest density minus step desired i.e. - 8 from the density setup menu. If it is
not intended to use this step, select the highest density minus step to be used i.e. - 5,
then set the unused steps to - to disable those steps. To disable density steps, press the
- button to scroll down until the - symbol is displayed.
7. Set the calibration number for the highest density minus step to the desired relative
density value (example 50, this will give approximately 1/2 the 0 density dose).
8. Make an exposure and confirm that the measured dose is approximately the desired
value.
9. If the measured dose is not as expected, adjust the calibration number for that density
step and repeat step 8.
10. Select the next density step (i.e. - 7) and enter the appropriate calibration number for
that step. Refer to table 3D-15 and the notes preceding table 3D-15. Repeat steps 8 and
9.
11. Repeat the previous step for each remaining density minus step. Use the >> and <<
buttons to navigate through the DENS SETUP menu in order to access all the density
steps in this procedure.


Step Action
12. Set the calibration number for the highest density plus step to the desired relative
density value (example 100, this will result in approximately double the 0 density dose).
13. Repeat step 8 and 9.
14. Select the next lowest density step (i.e. 7) and enter the appropriate calibration number
for that step. Refer to table 3D-15 and notes preceding table 3D-15. Repeat steps 8 and
9.
15. Repeat the previous step for each remaining density plus step. Use the >> and <<
buttons to navigate through the DENS SETUP menu in order to access all the density
steps.
16. When the density setup is complete and verified via dose measurements, use the <<
and EXIT buttons to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.


3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION

The following points should be noted regarding RLF compensation. RLF compensation is normally only
needed if special techniques are used which result in AEC exposures greater than 100 ms.

If perfect, film would provide linear density changes with linearly increasing exposure times. In reality, at
longer exposures, film effectively becomes slower. This effect is known as reciprocity law failure. To
compensate, exposure times must be increased at longer exposures.
This compensation is achieved by increasing the AEC reference voltage at longer exposure times.
RLF compensation is applied to three ranges (50-500 ms, 500-1000 ms, and 1000- 1500 ms) as shown
below.
The examples below are not meant to represent actual RLF compensation percentages in your
installation. Actual values will need to be determined per the procedure following.

Between 0 and 50 ms no RLF compensation is applied. Per figure 3D-14, the AEC reference voltage is
constant at 1 unit between 0 and 50 ms.

At 50 ms, RLF compensation =10% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by
10% between 50 ms and 500 ms in a linear fashion. At 500 ms the reference voltage is then 1.0 X 1.10
=1.10 units.

20% between 500 ms and 1000 ms in a linear fashion. At 1000 ms the reference voltage is then 1.10 X
1.20 =1.32 units.

30% between 1000 ms and 1500 ms in a linear fashion. At 1500 ms the reference voltage is then 1.32 X
1.30 =1.72 units

The rate of increase of the reference voltage beyond 1500 ms will be constant, up to limit of the B.U.T.
(backup timer).

The compensation curve resulting from the RLF values described above is depicted in the graph below.

Figure 3D-14: Example RLF compensation curve

3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION (Cont)

The following screens are used for RLF compensation
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3

EXIT

50KV: 84.0: 85KV: 42.8
55KV: 78.0: 95KV: 38.0
65KV: 66.0: +
75KV: 54.0 -
3200MS << >>

110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION +
3200MS <<

*TUBE? 0%HU RLF COMP, F/S 1*
50MSEC: 0%
500MSEC: 4%
1000MSEC: 0% +
-
3200MS <<


3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION (Cont)

Step Action
2. Select the slowest film screen combination to compensate. This will normally be FILM
SCREEN 1.
3. Select >>.
4. Select RLF COMPENSATION.
5. From the LF COMP menu, select 50MSEC and set the value to 0 using the + or -
buttons.
6. Select mA appropriate to the film speed i.e. 100 mA for 100 speed film.
7. Make an exposure and adjust the mA if necessary to give an exposure time of
approximately 50 ms.
8. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor.
9. Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs, then develop the film.
10. Note the O.D. This should be within 10% of the O.D. that was noted during AEC
calibration.
11. Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 500
ms.
12. Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs.
13. Enter an RLF offset at 50MSEC to give a mAs increase of approximately 10%.
14. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an
exposure and develop the film.
15. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 50 ms RLF
offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons.
16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 until the required O.D. is achieved.
17. Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 1000
ms.
18. Select the 500MSEC RLF adjustment and set the value to 0 using the + or - buttons.
20. Enter an RLF offset at 500MSEC to give a mAs increase of approximately 20%.
21. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an
23. Repeat steps 21 and 22 until the desired density is achieved.
THE FOLLOWING STEPS ONLY APPLY IF TECHNIQUES ARE USED RESULTING
IN AEC EXPOSURE TIMES GREATER THAN APPROXIMATELY 1500 MS.
24. Make an exposure and reduce the mA such as to give an exposure time of
approximately 1500ms.
25. Select the 1000MSEC RLF adjustment and set the value to 0 using the + or - buttons.
27. Enter an RLF offset at 1000MSEC to give an mAs increase of approximately 30%.
28. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an
30. Repeat steps 28 and 29 until the desired density is achieved.
31. Select << as required to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
32. Repeat steps 2 to 31 for FILM SCREEN 2 and FILM SCREEN 3 if required.

3D.10.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION

The following screens are used for multiple spot compensation
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3

EXIT

50KV: 84.0: 85KV: 42.8
55KV: 78.0: 95KV: 38.0
65KV: 66.0: +
75KV: 54.0 -
3200MS << >>

110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION +
3200MS <<

Multiple spot compensation may be required when doing multiple exposures on a single film. In this
mode of serial recording, the X-ray field is usually coned down to a small area. Due to the lack of scatter
and possible AEC field cutoff, an AEC density offset may be added if required. This offset is known as
multiple spot compensation.

In order to activate the multiple spot compensation feature, the R & F table must supply a closed dry
contact when the SFD is operated in multi-spot mode. The multi-spot input to the generator is at TB5
pins 11 and 12 on the room interface board.


3D.10.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION (Cont)

Step Action
2. Select the slowest film screen combination to compensate. This will normally be FILM
SCREEN 1.
3. Select >>.
4. Select MULT SPOT COMP.
5. Enter the value 0% using the + and - buttons.
6. Select 85 kV via the kV + or - buttons in the radiography section of the console.
7. Select mA appropriate to the film speed per table 3D-13.
8. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the SFD.
9. Make an exposure and record the mAs, then develop the film.
10. Verify that the film is evenly exposed, and that the O.D. is the desired value
11. Enable the SFD multi-spot function, then make several exposures and record the mAs.
12. Develop the film and record the O.D. for each exposure.
13. If the measured optical densities are not within 5% of the desired value, enter a multi-
spot compensation offset percentage that increases or decreases the mAs as
appropriate using the + and - buttons.
14. Repeat steps 8 to 13 until the desired O.D. is achieved on all exposures.
15. Select << as required to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
16. Repeat steps 2 to 15 for FILM SCREEN 2 and FILM SCREEN 3 if required.
17. Select EXIT to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
18. Select EXIT, then EXIT SETUP to return to the normal operating mode.

3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY)

Figure 3D-15: Equipment setup for wall Bucky AEC calibration

Please note the following points regarding wall Bucky calibration:

If the wall Bucky is dedicated to chest radiography, a focused grid with a 10:1 or 12:1 ratio should be
used along with an SID of 72 in. (180 cm).

If the wall Bucky will be used for conventional as well as chest radiography, then two grids should ideally
be used. See the note at the bottom of this page.
A reasonable compromise if a single grid must be used is a 10:1 ratio, 60 in. (150 cm) grid.

NOTE: SINCE MOST WALL BUCKYS ARE USED AT 40 AND 72 IN. (100 AND 180 CM) SID, THE GRID
MUST BE CHOSEN WITH CARE WITH RESPECT TO CUT-OFF. A TYPICAL GRID WILL HAVE
AN 8:1 RATIO, WITH 85 LINE PAIR / INCH OR 10:1 RATIO WITH 150 LINE PAIR / INCH
(STATIONARY). TYPICALLY, 400 SPEED FILM SCREEN WILL BE USED WITH 90 SECOND
PROCESSING.

3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont

Grid Absorption

The following information may aid in selecting a grid and / or estimating doses in front of the Bucky if
required: The percentages listed are approximate.

A 10:1 ratio 60 in. (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center: At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption =18%
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption =40%

At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption =50%





NOTE: BREAKPOINT CALIBRATIONS MAY HAVE BEEN DONE FOR ALL THREE FILM SCREEN
COMBINATIONS DURING TABLE BUCKY AEC CALIBRATION. IF SO, THE REMAINING
IMAGE RECEPTORS MUST USE THE CALIBRATION CURVES PREVIOUSLY ESTABLISHED
FOR THOSE FILM SCREENS.
IF AN UNUSED FILM SCREEN COMBINATION IS AVAILABLE FOR WALL BUCKY
USE, IT IS SUGGESTED THAT TWO RECEPTOR SELECTOR BUTTONS ON THE CONSOLE
BE ASSIGNED TO SELECT THE WALL BUCKY. THE FIRST WALL BUCKY SELECTOR
SHOULD BE USED FOR 40 IN. (100 CM) SIDS WITH THE APPROPRIATE PREVIOUSLY
CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN. THE SECOND WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD THEN BE
USED WITH THE PREVIOUSLY UNCALIBRATED FILM SCREEN AT 72 IN. (180 CM) SIDS.
THIS METHOD WILL ALLOW THE GRID TO BE OPTIMIZED FOR EACH SID, AS A
SEPARATE DEDICATED FILM SCREEN WITH ITS OWN CALIBRATION CURVE CAN BE
ASSIGNED TO THE 72 IN. (180CM) SID.


Step Action
USE OF ONE FILM SCREEN FOR BOTH SIDS USING PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED
FILM SCREENS
1. Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-15.
2. Align the tube stand and wall Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the
image receptor.
3. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the
central ray remains centered relative to the image receptor.
4. Place the R probe at the film plane, i.e. behind the grid. If this cannot be done, then
attach the probe to the front of the Bucky. Ensure that the R-probe is located directly
under the central ray. The R meter must be set to measure in the micro-R range.
6. Select the wall Bucky image receptor.
7. Select the slowest film screen used for the wall Bucky, then select the appropriate mA
for that film screen per table 3D-12 (example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select 75 kV,
large focus, center field.
8. Make an exposure and note the dose and mAs.
9. Referring to table 3D-13, select the previously established dose required at the 75 kV
knee breakpoint for the film speed being calibrated.
Note that the dose values in the table are based on a specific R-probe placement
during table Bucky calibration (either at the film plane, or alternately in front of the
Bucky). If the probe placement for wall Bucky calibration is not the same as it was
for table Bucky calibration, use the estimated dose correction factor in this
subsection under GRID ABSORPTION.
10. Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board (see note below) while taking
exposures until the dose noted in the previous step is obtained.
CHANNEL 2 ON THE AEC BOARD IS TYPICALLY USED FOR THE WALL
BUCKY AEC CHAMBER. YOUR INSTALLATION MAY USE A DIFFERENT
CHANNEL ON THE AEC BOARD. DO NOT READJUST THE GAIN POT FOR
THE CHANNEL THAT WAS PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED (FOR TABLE BUCKY).
REFER TO TABLE 3D-10 FOR THE AEC BOARD GAIN POTENTIOMETER
(GAIN POT) DESIGNATIONS FOR THE VARIOUS AEC BOARDS.
11. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique, expose the film and develop it.
12. Measure the O.D. The desired value should have been previously recorded in a copy of
table 3D-1.
13. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the gain pot (as per
step 10) to increase or decrease the density, then repeat the previous two steps.
14. Change the SID to 40 in. (100 cm) and repeat steps 11 to 13. Adjust the gain pot if
necessary to achieve an acceptable compromise between both SIDs.
14. Verify the O.D. at a range of different kVs.

USE OF TWO FILM SCREENS (ONE FOR EACH SID) USING ONE PREVIOUSLY
CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN AND ONE UNCALIBRATED FILM SCREEN
15. Select the wall bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 40 in. (100 cm)
SID.
16. Repeat steps 1 to 13 at the 40 in. (100 cm) SID position using the appropriate previously
calibrated film screen.


Step Action
17. Verify the O.D. at a range of different kVs.
18. Switch the generator OFF. Re-enter the programming mode as detailed in the TABLE
BUCKY AEC calibration section.
19. Select the wall Bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 72 in. (180 cm)
SID.
20. Calibrate the film screen assigned to this SID as per the table Bucky procedure. The
calibration pot is NOT to be adjusted during this procedure (this was calibrated in the
preceding procedure). All breakpoints, including the 75 kV knee breakpoint, are to be
calibrated by adjusting the calibration numbers ONLY.
21. When complete, exit the AEC CALIBRATION and GEN CONFIGURATION menu.

3D.12.0 AEC CALIBRATION (AUX, SFD, ETC)

The remaining image receptors are calibrated in a similar manner to the table Bucky receptor. Only the gain
pot for that channel is to be adjusted at the slowest film screen used on that receptor. DO NOT READJ UST
THE GAIN POT FOR PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED RECEPTORS, AND DO NOT READJ UST THE
CALIBRATION VALUES IN THE AEC CALIBRATION MENU FOR PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED FILM
SCREENS.

Refer to 3D.4.0 if a PMT is to be used for AEC during digital acquisition or spot film work.

THE MEMORY FUNCTION THAT WAS TEMPORARILY CHANGED TO OFF EARLIER IN THIS
CHAPTER MAY NOW BE RESET TO THE DESIRED VALUE.



CPI Canada Inc. Acceptance Testing 4

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-08 Rev. J Page 4-1
CHAPTER 4

ACCEPTANCE TESTING

CONTENTS:

4.1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION. ........................................................4-2
4.3.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS) ..............................................................................................4-3
4.3.1 Console Rad Tests..................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.2 Console Fluoro Tests ................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.3 Generator Preliminary Tests ...................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.4 Low Speed Starter Verification................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification.................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (KVP, TIME, MA AND MAS).....................................................................................4-9
4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests.................................................................................................................................. 4-9
4.4.2 Generator Fluoro Tests ............................................................................................................................ 4-13
4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (OPTIONAL INTERFACES)...................................................................................4-15
4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC)......................................................................................................................4-15
4.7.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (ABS)......................................................................................................................4-15
4.8.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DAP)......................................................................................................................4-15
4.9.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY) .......................................................4-16

4.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This section details acceptance testing, which verifies that the generator is performing within limits. It is
recommended that this be done whenever the generator is reconfigured, or component(s) are replaced
which may affect the X-ray output. Examples of such components are the X-ray tube, HT tank, generator
CPU board, generator interface board, AEC board, control board 1 and control board 2 in the HF power
supply (Millenia) or the control board (Indico 100), and the filament supply board(s).
4 Acceptance Testing CPI Canada Inc.

Page 4-2 Rev. J Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-08

WARNING: 1. USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING HIGH VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT MAY
CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
2. EVEN WITH THE GENERATOR SWITCHED OFF AT THE CONSOLE, (OR THE LOCKOUT
SWITCH INSIDE THE MAIN CABINET LOCKED OUT), MAINS VOLTAGE IS STILL
PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET. THIS VOLTAGE IS EXTREMELY
DANGEROUS; USE EXTREME CAUTION.
3. THE ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS, LOCATED ON THE BASE OF THE HF POWER
SUPPLY, PRESENT A HAZARD FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER
HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF. VERIFY THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED
BEFORE SERVICING OR TOUCHING ANY PARTS.

WARNING: THE PROCEDURES IN THIS CHAPTER REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS. TAKE
ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.

WARNING: 1. ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT UNDER TEST AND ALL ASSOCIATED TEST
EQUIPMENT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED.
2. ENSURE THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES ARE INTACT / UNDAMAGED AND
PROPERLY CONNECTED BEFORE ATTEMPTING EXPOSURES.

ENSURE THAT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE COMPLETED PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE
ACCEPTANCE TESTING:

The generator is interfaced to room equipment noted in the product description / compatibility
statement.
The tube auto calibration has been done as per chapter 2 of this manual.
The receptors have been programmed as per chapter 3C of this manual.
If the installation has AEC, verify that all receptors have been calibrated as per chapter 3D of this
manual.
If the installation has ABS, verify that the imaging system has been calibrated as per chapter 3E of
this manual.
Acceptance testing shall only be started after the installation is complete i.e.; generator in final
position and installed as per the previous chapters of this manual.

4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION.

kV measuring device such as a Dynalyzer (or equivalent). This will be required for verifying kV and
mA calibration during preventative maintenance or if recalibration is necessary, for example after
replacing the generator CPU board or control board 1 in the HF power supply. See note on page 11
regarding use of a Dynalyzer on Indico 100 generators.
Storage oscilloscope.
mA / mAs meter.
Radiation meter 0-1000 mR and 1-15 R/min.
Lead diaphragm or equivalent to collimate the beam.
General purpose DVM.
Strobe or reed tachometer.
Current probe 0 to 20 amps AC.
A set of HVL filters.
Calculator.

4.3.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS)

4.3.1 Console Rad Tests

For the touch screen console, check the console functionality by pressing the equivalent switch position
on the touch screen for the functions described in section 4.3.1 and 4.3.2. Verify the correct response on
the touch screen console for each function that is tested.

Step Action Result Check
1. Press the power ON then power OFF buttons
on the console.

Unit switches on and off.

2. Press power ON again to switch the unit on. Unit switches on.
3. Press each of the receptor buttons that are
active (those that have been enabled during
generator configuration).
Verify that the adjacent LED
lights for each receptor. For
receptor 6 on the 23 X 56 cm
console (adjacent to the power
ON button) only the top LED will
light.

Note: The TECHNIQUE / MODE SELECT button used to select AEC / mAs / mA/ms in steps 4, 5, 6 will
only be functional if APR mode has been disabled during generator configuration (the TECHNIQUE
SELECT function is disabled if APR mode is enabled).
4. Select an active radiographic receptor that has
AEC programmed.
Press the technique select button to select
AEC.
Verify the following displays:
A: The AEC LED lights.
B: kV value is displayed.
C: mA value is displayed.
D: AEC, mAs value or ms
value is displayed depending
on the AEC backup mode
selected.
E: Density value is displayed.

5. Press the technique select button to select
mAs.
A: The mAs LED lights.
C: mAs value is displayed.

6. Press the technique select button to select
mA/ms.
A: The mA/ms LED lights.
C: mA value is displayed.
D: ms value is displayed.

7.
Press the kV +/- buttons.
kV increases if kV + is pressed.
kV decreases if kV - is pressed.

8. Ensure that three-point operation is selected
(mA/ms).
Press the mA +/- buttons.

mA increases if mA + is pressed.
mA decreases if mA - is pressed.

9. Ensure that three-point operation is selected
(mA/ms).
Press the ms +/- buttons.

ms increases if ms + is pressed.
ms decreases if ms - is pressed.

10. Ensure that AEC is selected.
Press the DENSITY +/- buttons.
Density increases if density + is
pressed.
Density decreases if density - is
pressed.

11. Press the focus select button. The large and small focal spot
LEDs alternately light as the
switch is toggled.

Press the film-screen select button.
The three film-screen LEDs (I, II,
III) alternately light as the switch
is toggled.


4.3.1 Console Rad Tests (Cont)

13. Select 60 kV, 50 mA, 100 ms.
Press the PREP button.
The adjacent LED lights.
14. Press the X-ray button. The X-ray warning indicator
lights during an X-ray exposure,
and an audible tone is heard
from the console.

Press the FIELD select button (23 X 56 cm
console) or press the individual AEC field
select buttons in sequence (all other
consoles).
The three field indicator LEDs
light to indicate field selection
[L+C+R], [R], [C], [R+C], [L],
[L+R], [L+C] as the switch is
toggled (23 X 56 cm console).
For other consoles, the LEFT,
CENTER, and RIGHT field
selection LEDs should light as
each field is selected.

16. Press the power OFF button on the console. The unit switches off.

4.3.2 Console Fluoro Tests

This section applies only to R&F units.

BEFORE CONTINUING, ENSURE THAT THE REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL IS CONNECTED (IF
USED WITH THIS INSTALLATION).

1. Press the power ON button on the console. Unit switches on.
2. Select an active fluoro receptor. A: The fluoro display area of the
console lights.
B: The remote fluoro control
panel lights (if used).

3. Press the DOSE button. The dose display on the LCD
display changes as the switch is
toggled.

4. Press the MAG button on the console.
Press the MAG +/- buttons on the remote
fluoro control if used.

A: The MAG display on the
console LCD and remote
fluoro display changes (IF I/I
MODES IS ENABLED
DURING GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION) as the
MAG button is toggled.
B: The Mag display on the
console LCD and remote
fluoro display increases if
MAG + button is pressed,
decreases if MAG - button on
the remote fluoro control is
pressed (IF I/I MODES IS
ENABLED DURING
GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION.


4.3.2 Console Fluoro Tests (Cont)

5. Press the ABS button on the console to enter
ABS mode.
A: The LED adjacent to the
button lights.
B: The LED adjacent to the ABS
button on the remote fluoro
control (if used) lights.

6. Press the ABS button on the remote fluoro
control if used, else press the ABS button on
the console.
The ABS indicator LEDs
adjacent to the ABS buttons on
the console and the remote
fluoro control (if used) switch off.

7.
Press the fluoro kV +/- buttons on the console
and remote fluoro control if used.
kV increases if kV + is pressed.
kV decreases if kV - is pressed.
Confirm tracking of the kV
displays on the console and the
remote fluoro control.

8.
Press the fluoro mA +/- buttons on the console
and remote fluoro control if used.
mA increases if mA + is pressed.
mA decreases if mA - is
pressed.
Confirm tracking of the mA
displays on the console and the
remote fluoro control.

9. Press the ACCUMULATED TIME button on
the console.
The accumulated time indicator
will light, then extinguish on the
console as the switch is toggled.

10. Press the ACCUMULATED TIME button on
the remote fluoro control if used.
The ACC indicator will light, then
extinguish on the remote fluoro
control as the switch is toggled.

11. Press the pulse fluoro button on the console (if
the pulse fluoro option is fitted).
The pulse fluoro indicator will
light, then extinguish as the
switch is toggled.

12. Press the power OFF button on the console. Unit switches off.

4.3.3 Generator Preliminary Tests

WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN MEASURING HIGH VOLTAGES.

NOTE: VERIFY THE POSITION OF EACH OF THE SWITCHES OF SW1 ON THE
GENERATOR CPU BOARD FOR THE GENERATOR UNDER TEST AS PER THE
FOLLOWING TABLE. THESE SWITCHES MUST BE SET CORRECTLY PRIOR
TO CONTINUING. REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION (SECTION 1D) AS NECESSARY FOR THE PRODUCT
DEFINITION.


4.3.3 Generator Preliminary Tests (Cont)

For GENERATOR POWER, refer to copy of the compatibility statement / product
description (PD) form in Chapter 1D
GENERATOR POWER SW1-3 SW1-2 SW1-1
30 kW (350 Series)
Millenia only
ON ON OFF
32 kW (Indico 100 only) ON ON OFF
40 kW (Indico 100 only) ON OFF ON
50 kW (650 Series) OFF ON ON
65 kW (850 Series) OFF ON OFF
80 kW (1050 Series) OFF OFF ON
100 kW (Indico 100 only) OFF OFF OFF

SW1-4: OFF for two filament boards, ON for one filament board.
SW1-5: OFF for 150 max kV, ON for 125 max kV.
SW1-6: OFF for dual speed, ON for low speed.
SW1-7: OFF for 2 tube, ON for 1 tube.
SW1-8: ON. Do not inadvertently switch this to OFF! Setting to OFF resets to the factory
defaults (calibration, configuration, etc).

1. Ensure unit is switched OFF. DS1 on generator interface
board is lit.

2. Press the power ON button on the console. One or more LEDs on the
driver/auxiliary board in HF
power supply are lit. Millenia
generators only.

3. Switch OFF the console.
Switch the NORMAL/LOCKOUT switch on the
generator interface board to LOCKOUT.
Switch the console ON.

The generator will not switch on
with the switch in the lockout
position.

4. Switch the NORMAL/LOCKOUT switch to the
NORMAL position.
Switch the console ON.

The unit switches on.

5. Verify that each active receptor (those that
have been enabled during generator
configuration) displays the desired X-ray tube
on the LCD display.
Receptor 1 Tube #_____


4.3.3 Generator Preliminary Tests (Cont)

6. Verify that each active receptor selects the
desired AEC channel. This must be done by
measuring the voltage at specified pins on the
AEC board edge connector.
Logic low (approx. 1 VDC) means CHANNEL
ENABLED, logic high (approx. 11.5 VDC)
means CHANNEL DISABLED.
Refer to figure 4-1 for pin assignments on the
AEC board:
CHANNEL 1 =PIN 8
CHANNEL 2 =PIN 7
CHANNEL 3 =PIN 6
CHANNEL 4 =PIN 5

Receptor 1 Ch #_______

7. Switch OFF the console. N/A

Figure 4-1: AEC board pin assignments

THE MILLENIA AND INDICO 100 FAMILY OF GENERATORS ARE FITTED WITH A LOW SPEED
STARTER, OR OPTIONAL DUAL SPEED STARTER. USE SECTION 4.3.4 OR 4.3.5, AS
APPLICABLE, FOR YOUR GENERATOR.

4.3.4 Low Speed Starter Verification

1. Connect a current probe to the common lead
of tube 1.
Switch ON the console.
Press and hold the PREP button.

A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
less than half amplitude after
prep complete.

2. Measure the rotor boost time. Should be approximately 1.5 sec.
3. Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at the
end of boost.

Speed 3300 RPM.

FOLLOW STEPS 4 TO 6 IF TUBE 2 IS USED (LOW SPEED STARTER)


4.3.4 Low Speed Starter Verification (Cont)

of tube 2.
prep complete.

5. Measure the rotor boost time. Should be approximately 1.5 sec.
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at the
end of boost.

Speed 3300 RPM.

7. Switch OFF the console. N/A

4.3.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification

From the product description, be sure the actual tube being used is correctly selected at the dual speed
starter. Refer to the dual speed starter table in chapter 2.

Tube 1 selection verified _______
Tube 2 selection verified _______

THE GENERATOR MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR DUAL SPEED STARTER OPERATION IN ORDER
TO BE ABLE TO VERIFY BOTH MODES OF OPERATION IN THIS SECTION.

***** PLEASE OBSERVE A MAXIMUM OF 2 HIGH SPEED BOOSTS PER MINUTE *****

of tube 1.
Switch ON the console.
Select 70 kVp, minimum mA, 50 ms.

prep complete.

2. Measure the rotor boost time. Should agree with the value in
the dual speed starter table in
chapter 2.

3. Select 100 kVp, maximum mA, 50 ms, small
focus.
prep complete.

chapter 2.

that the tube(s) reach operating speed at end
of boost. Use the techniques in steps 1 and 3
to select low and high-speed modes
respectively.

Low Speed 3300 RPM.
High Speed 9500 RPM.

6. After a high-speed prep, verify that the
dynamic brake is applied.
Will hear the X-ray tube slow
down to 60 Hz.

FOLLOW STEPS 7 TO 12 IF TUBE 2 IS USED (DUAL SPEED STARTER)
of tube 2.
Select 70 kVp, minimum mA, 50 ms.

prep complete.

chapter 2.


4.3.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification (Cont)

9. Select 100 kVp, maximum mA, 50 ms, small
focus.
prep complete.

chapter 2.

that the tube(s) reach operating speed at end
of boost. Use the techniques in steps 7 and 9
to select low and high-speed modes
respectively.

Low Speed 3300 RPM.
High Speed 9500 RPM.

12. After a high-speed prep, verify that the
dynamic brake is applied.
Will hear the X-ray tube slow
down to 60 Hz.

13. Switch OFF the console N/A

4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (KVP, TIME, MA AND MAS)

4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests

Measurement of kVp, mA, and time may be done via test points at the generator CPU board as per figure
4-2. These are direct feedback voltages and are scaled to represent the actual kVp and X-ray tube
current AS LONG AS THE GENERATOR IS CALIBRATED.

REFER TO NOTES ON PAGE 11.

NOTE: TEST EQUIPMENT TOLERANCES MUST BE ALLOWED FOR IN THE MEASUREMENTS IN
THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS. LIMITS STATED ARE THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED LIMITS,
INCLUDING EQUIPMENT TOLERANCES AND MEASUREMENT ERROR.

4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests (Cont)

TP6
TP8
TP7
TP10
TP9
TP12
TP11
TP14
TP13
TP15
TP24
TP25
TP22
TP23
TP16
TP17
TP18
TP19
TP20
TP21
TP6
TP8
TP7
TP10
TP9
TP12
TP11
TP14
TP13
TP15
KVP
1VOLT = 20 KV
+
-
RAD mA
FLUORO mA
1 VOLT = 100 mA
1 VOLT = 2.5 mA
-
-
+
+ AEC RAMP
ABS
+ -
- +
NOTE: THIS DIAGRAM IS TYPICAL, ACTUAL GENERATOR CPU
BOARDS MAY DIFFER IN DETAIL
THE SCALING FACTORS LISTED ABOVE ARE NOMINAL VALUES.
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
FILE: ML_CPU1.CDR

Figure 4-2: Test point locations


CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING TESTS REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RADIATION. USE
APPROPRIATE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL.

NOTE: IF USING TEST POINTS TP6 & 8, TP7 & 10, TP11 & 14 IN FIGURE 4-2 FOR
ACCEPTANCE TESTING, THE SCALING FACTORS SHOWN MUST BE
VERIFIED USING AN APPROPRIATE CALIBRATED REFERENCE STANDARD.
THE ACTUAL MEASURED SCALING VALUES SHOULD THEN BE USED IN THIS
PROCEDURE.

NOTE: A DYNALYZER IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR MA MEASUREMENTS WITH INDICO 100
GENERATORS. BANDWIDTH LIMITATIONS OF THE DYNALYZER WILL RESULT IN
INACCURATE MA MEASUREMENTS AT MA VALUES LESS THAN APPROXIMATELY 100 MA.
MA MEASUREMENTS SHOULD BE MADE WITH AN MA / MAS METER CONNECTED TO THE
MA TEST JACKS ON THE HT TANK. EXPOSURE TIMES MUST BE GREATER THAN 100 MS TO
ENSURE ACCURATE MEASUREMENTS.

Refer to figure 4-2 for test point locations referenced in the following section(s).

1. SEE NOTE ABOVE RE USE OF TEST
POINTS FOR VERIFYING CALIBRATION

Connect scope probe channel 1 input to TP6
and TP8 (kVp)
and TP10 (Rad mA).
Adjust scope gains as required. Use the KV
signal to trigger the scope.
N/A
2. Switch ON the generator and after initialization
select the following radiographic technique:
kVp =100, mA =100, Time =50 ms
Select an off-table receptor.
N/A
3. Make an exposure and measure the kVp at
TP6 and TP8 and the Rad mA at TP7 and
TP10. Using scaling factors in figure 4-2,
verify the following results:
kVp =100 KV 3%.
mA =100 mA 4% (Millenia).
mA =100 mA 5% (Indico 100).
Time =50 ms 2 ms.

4. Repeat step 3 but set the values to
kVp =65, mA =200.
kVp =65 KV 3%.
mA =200 mA 5% (Indico 100).
Time =50 ms 2 ms.



5. Repeat step 3 but set the values to
kVp =125, mA =200.
kVp =125 KV 3%.
mA =200 mA 4% (Indico 100).
Time =50 ms 2 ms.

6. Select 75 kVp, 200 mA.
Select the exposure times shown below (3
point operation).

(Measure time and mA on the scope and
check that their product is as per the RESULT
column).

Measure time at 75% of the peak kVp
waveform.

A: 10 ms (2 mAs)
B: 20 ms (4 mAs)
C: 63 ms (12 mAs)
D: 100 ms (20 mAs)

A: 2 mAs 5%.
B: 4 mAs 5%.
C: 12 mAs 5%.
D: 20 mAs 5%.

7. Select 75 kVp.
Select the mAs shown below (2 point
operation).

Measure time at 75% of the peak kVp
waveform.

A: 2 mAs (time per LCD display)
B: 8 mAs (time per LCD display)
C: 25 mAs (time per LCD display)
D: 63 mAs (time per LCD display)
NOTE: The time associated with
each mAs setting will vary
depending on generator
configuration.
Use the time displayed in the
LCD window as the reference for
the measurements below.

time per LCD disp (2% +1ms).

8. Select 200 mA, 50 ms (3 point operation).

Select the kVp values shown below.
The measurements may be done non-
invasively or from TP6 and TP8 using the
scope.

A: 50 kVp
B: 60 kVp
C: 80 kVp
D: 100 kVp
E: 125 kVp

A: 50 kVp (3% +1 kVp).
B: 60 kVp (3% +1 kVp).
C: 80 kVp (3% +1 kVp).
D: 100 kVp (3% +1 kVp).
E: 125 kVp (3% +1 kVp).



9. Select 75 kVp, 50 ms (3 point operation).

Select the mA values shown below.

Measure mA at 75% of the peak kVp
waveform.

A: 50 mA
B: 100 mA
C: 200 mA
D: 400 mA
E: 800 mA

Note: The higher mA values will not be
available on all generator models and /
or programmed tube types.

A: 50 mA (5% +1 mA).
B: 100 mA (5% +1 mA).
C: 200 mA (5% +1 mA).
D: 400 mA (5% +1 mA).
E: 800 mA (5% +1 mA).

4.4.2 Generator Fluoro Tests

This section applies only to R&F units.

1. Place the generator into the fluoro mode of
operation.
and TP8 (kVp).
and TP14 (fluoro mA).
Use the kV signal to trigger the scope.
N/A
2. Place imaging system into non-ABS mode or
cover the I.I. input with lead.
N/A
3. Set 3 mA fluoro.
Select the kV values shown below using the
remote fluoro control if fitted, or the fluoro
section of the console.

A: 50 KV
B: 65 KV
C: 80 KV
D: 100 KV
E: 110 KV

Measure the kVp at TP6 and TP8. Using
scaling factors in figure 4-2 verify kV values
per the RESULTS column:

A: 50 kVp (10% +1 kVp).
B: 65 kVp (5% +1 kVp).
C: 80 kVp (5% +1 kVp).
D: 100 kVp (5% +1 kVp).
E: 110 kVp (5% +1 kVp).


4.4.2 Generator Fluoro Tests (Cont)

4. Select 70 kVp fluoro.
Select the fluoro mA values shown below:

A: 1.0 mA
B: 2.0 mA
C: 4.0 mA
D: 6.0 mA

Measure the fluoro mA at TP11 and TP14.
Using scaling factors in figure 4-2 verify mA
values per the RESULTS column:

A: 1.0 mA 20%.
B: 2.0 mA 20%.
C: 4.0 mA 15%.
D: 6.0 mA 15%.

5.
Press the PPS + and - buttons (if the pulse
fluoro option is fitted).
Verify that the pulsed fluoro rate
increases and decreases.

6. Run a sufficiently long fluoro exposure to
accumulate some time on the console fluoro
display, and on the remote fluoro control if
used
Press the ZERO button on the console and on
the remote fluoro control if applicable.

Verify that the accumulated time
is reset to zero after pressing
each of the ZERO buttons.


4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (OPTIONAL INTERFACES)

Refer to separate supplements in this manual for further information IF APPLICABLE.

4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC)

This section applies only to generators with AEC.

Review Section 3D: AEC Calibration.
Recheck the mAs, Dose, and O.D. as recorded during initial installation. Follow the appropriate steps
in section 3D to verify the AEC calibration.

4.7.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (ABS)

This section applies only to non-digital R&F generators with ABS.

Review section 3E: ABS calibration.
Recheck the dose limits and input dose as described in the procedure.

4.8.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DAP)

This section applies only to Indico 100 X-ray generators with DAP.

Review Section 3F: DAP SETUP AND CALIBRATION.
Follow the appropriate steps in section 3F to verify the DAP calibration.



4.9.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY)

The procedure for performing reproducibility, linearity and HVL testing is contained in a separate
document, part number 740917 that immediately follows this page.

CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09 Rev. G Page 5-1
CHAPTER 5

TROUBLESHOOTING

CONTENTS:

SECTION TITLE
5.1.0 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES (NON-TOUCH SCREEN)....................................................................................5-2
5.2.1 Operator Messages (Non-Touch Screen) .......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Limit Messages (Non-Touch Screen)................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.3 Error Messages (Non-Touch Screen) ................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.3.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES (TOUCH SCREEN)...........................................................................................5-10
5.3.1 Operator Messages (Touch Screen)................................................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.2 Limit Messages (Touch Screen)....................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.3 Error Messages (Touch Screen) ...................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.4.0 MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS................................................................................................................................5-18
5.4.1 Erratic Console Faults ...................................................................................................................................... 5-18

5.1.0 INTRODUCTION

The Millenia and Indico 100 console will display status messages on the LCD display during normal and
abnormal operation of the generator. This chapter contains tables of those messages and suggests actions to
be taken by service personnel to correct any malfunctions that may occur.
Section 5.2.0 details status and error messages for generators with the standard (non-touch screen console).
Refer to section 5.3 for status and error messages for the touch screen console.
5 Troubleshooting CPI Canada Inc.

Page 5-2 Rev. G Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES (NON-TOUCH SCREEN)

5.2.1 Operator Messages (Non-Touch Screen)

These messages indicate the status of the generator. No action is required.

MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
INITIALIZATION Displayed during power up sequence.
SPINNING ROTOR Displayed when prep state is active.
X-RAY READY Displayed when generator is ready to expose
X-RAY ON Displayed during both a rad and fluoro exposure.
DAP NOT READY The optional DAP (Indico 100 only) is in its warm up state, and not ready to
make DAP measurements.

5.2.2 Limit Messages (Non-Touch Screen)

These messages indicate that an exposure has been requested that exceeds one or more limits.

MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION
TUBE KV LIMIT Requested kV not allowed as tube kV limit
has been reached.
None.
GEN KV LIMIT Requested kV not allowed as generator kV
limit has been reached.
None.
TUBE MA LIMIT Requested mA not allowed as tube mA limit
has been reached.
None.
GEN MA LIMIT Requested mA not allowed as generator
mA limit has been reached.
None.
TUBE KW LIMIT Requested parameter not allowed as tube
kW limit has been reached.
None.
GEN KW LIMIT Requested parameter not allowed as
generator kW limit has been reached.
None.
TUBE MAS LIMIT Requested mAs not allowed as tube mAs
None.
GEN MAS LIMIT Requested mAs not allowed as generator
mAs limit has been reached.
None.
GEN MS LIMIT Requested ms not allowed as generator ms
None.
CAL LIMIT Requested parameter not calibrated. Recalibrate X-ray tube
or select a calibrated
parameter.
AEC DENSITY LIM Requested density not programmed. Select another density
or program requested
density step.
ANODE HEAT WARN Anode has exceeded programmed warning
level.
Wait for anode to cool.
FL TIMER WARN Fluoro interval timer 5.0 mins. Reset fluoro timer.
INVALID PARAM Generator detected invalid parameter within
received message, message ignored.
Select valid
parameter.

5.2.2 Limit Messages (Cont)

HOUSE HEAT WARN X-ray tube housing heat has exceeded
housing warning limit.
Wait for housing to
cool.
GEN DUTY WARNING The generator has reached its duty cycle
warning limit.
Re-evaluate technique
factors. Allow
generator to cool if
possible. If exposures
are continued, serious
generator damage
may result due to
overheating.
DAP ACCUM WARN The accumulated DAP value has reached
the programmed DAP limit.
Reset the DAP.
DAP RATE WARN The current DAP rate exceeds the
programmed DAP rate limit.
Reduce the dose.

5.2.3 Error Messages (Non-Touch Screen)

These messages indicate that an error has occurred. The errors are logged in the error log, previous errors
should be reviewed by service personnel before taking further action.

ERROR CODE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION
APR MEMORY ERROR APR data has been
corrupted.
See note 1 near end
of this section.
E001 GEN EPROM ERR Generator CPU EPROM
has been corrupted.
Call product support
for new generator
CPU EPROM.
E003 GEN NVRAM ERR Generator CPU NVRAM
data has been corrupted.
Re-initialize
generator CPU
NVRAM using
generator factory
defaults.
E004 GEN RTC ERROR Generator CPU real time
clock is not functioning.
Reset time and date.
E005 PS CONTACT ERR Main contactor in HF power
supply did not energize.
Call product support.
E006 ROTOR FAULT 1. Rotor starter may have
detected a current fault
in the stator.

2. Power supply was not
ready to start rotor.
Power unit off and
retry rotor start.
E007 FILAMENT FAULT Power supply has detected
filament current <2 amps.
1. Check for open
filament in X-ray
tube.
2. Check for poor
connections in the
cathode cable.
3. Check fuses on
filament board(s).

5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont)

E008 KV/MA FAULT Power supply has detected
a fault in the kV or mA
output during an exposure
and immediately terminated
the exposure. This may be
caused by arcing in the X-
ray tube, arcing of the HV
cables, or HT tank.
1. If arcing of the X-
ray tube is
suspected, check
condition of tube.
The X-ray tube
may be damaged
or simply require
seasoning.
Refer to chapter 6
for tube
seasoning
procedure.
2. If failure of HT
tank is suspected,
contact product
support.
E009 PS NOT READY Power supply is not ready to
make an exposure.
Retry exposure.
E011 HIGH MA FAULT Generator CPU detected
mA greater than allowed
tolerance.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
E012 LOW MA FAULT Generator CPU detected
mA less than allowed
tolerance.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
E013 MANUAL TERMIN Operator released exposure
switch during exposure.
1. Re-take exposure
if necessary.
2. Check for faulty
switch contacts or
wiring.
E014 AEC BUT ERROR AEC exposure exceeded
allowed back up time.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Check that correct
AEC chamber is
energized.
E015 AEC BU MAS ERR AEC exposure exceeded
allowed back up mAs.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
AEC chamber is
energized.
E016 TOMO BUT ERROR Tomo exposure exceeded
back up time.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Increase tomo
back up time if
necessary.


E017 NOT CALIBRATED Selected mA not calibrated
for selected kV.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube.
E018 PREP TIMEOUT Generator has been in prep
state too long.
Reduce length of
time in prep state.
E019 ANODE HEAT LIMIT Selected parameters will
cause X-ray tube to exceed
its programmed anode heat
limit.
Reduce parameters
or wait for tube to
cool.
E020 THERMAL INT #1 X-ray tube #1 too hot and
its thermal switch has
opened.
Wait for X-ray tube #
1 to cool.
E021 THERMAL INT #2 X-ray tube #2 too hot and
opened.
2 to cool.
E022 DOOR INTERLOCK Door is open. Close door.
E023 COLLIMATOR ERR Collimator is not ready. Check collimator.
E024 CASSETTE ERROR Generator did not receive a
Bucky contact closure in a
reasonable time after start
of Rad expose state.
Check for grid
movement and drive
signal to Bucky.
E025 II SAFETY INT II safety is not ready. Check II safety.
E026 SPARE INT Spare input is not ready. Check spare input.
E028 PREP SW CLOSED Prep input active during
power on initialization
phase.
Check prep switch
and input for short
circuit.
E029 X-RAY SW CLOSED X-ray input active during
phase.
Check X-ray switch
and input for short
circuit.
E030 FLUORO SW CLOSED Fluoro input active during
phase.
Check fluoro switch
and input for short
circuit.
E031 REMOTE COMM ERR Communication error
detected with remote fluoro
control unit.
1. Check remote
fluoro control cable
for damage and
proper connection.
2. Turn power off
and then on to
Reset Generator.
E032 CONSOLE COMM ERR Generator has detected
error in communication to
console.
1. Check console
cable for damage
and proper
connection.
2. Turn power off and
then on to reset
generator.
E033 GEN BATTERY LOW Generator detects lithium
battery voltage is low.
Replace lithium
battery.


E034 +12VDC ERROR +12VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
Check +12VDC rail.
E035 -12VDC ERROR -12VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
Check -12VDC rail.
E036 +15VDC ERROR +15VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
Check +15VDC rail.
E037 -15VDC ERROR -15VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
Check -15VDC rail.
E038 CAL DATA ERROR Generator detects corrupt
calibration data.
Re-calibrate X-ray
tube(s).
E039 AEC DATA ERROR Generator detects corrupt
AEC data.
Reprogram AEC data
or set factory
defaults.
E040 FLUORO DATA ERROR Generator detects corrupt
Fluoro data.
Reprogram fluoro
data or set factory
defaults.
E041 REC DATA ERROR Generator detects corrupt
receptor data.
Reprogram receptor
data or set factory
defaults.
E042 TUBE DATA ERR Generator detects corrupt
tube data.
Reprogram tube data
or set factory
defaults.
E043 KV ERROR KV detected in non x-ray
state.
Switch OFF
generator. Prevent
further use of
generator. Call
product support.
E044 COMM ERROR Received communication
message not valid and
ignored.
Reset error.
E045 NOT SUPPORTED Received message valid,
but not supported by this
system.
Reset error.
E046 MODE INHIBITED Received message valid,
but not allowed during
present state.
Reset error.
E047 FL TIMER LIMIT Fluoro Timer has exceeded
time limit.
Reset Fluoro timer.
E048 FOCUS MISMATCH Focus selected does not
match current focus enabled
by power supply.
Check power supply
interface cables
between power
supply and generator
CPU board.
E049 NOT ENABLED Requested function not
programmed to be enabled.
Reprogram to enable
function.


E050 GEN DATA ERROR Generator detects corrupt
generator limit data.
Reprogram generator
limit data or set
factory defaults.
E051 AEC DEVICE ERR Generator has detected no
feedback signal from AEC
device.
1. Check that X-ray
tube is pointing at
correct AEC
device.
2. Check AEC cable
for damage and
proper
connection.
E052 HIGH SF CURRENT Generator detects small
focus filament current
greater than limits in
standby mode.
Check small focus
filament board.
E053 HIGH LF CURRENT Generator detects large
standby mode.
Check large focus
filament board.
E054 AEC OUT OF RANGE AEC reference has reached
a maximum or minimum
limit.
Re-adjust AEC
calibration including
density to operate
within AEC range (O
to 1OVDC).
E055 NO FIELDS ACTIVE AEC enabled but no fields
are selected.
Select AEC field(s).
E056 NO TUBE SELECTED All Receptors have no X-ray
tube programmed.
Program receptor(s)
with tube number.
E057 AEC STOP ERROR AEC stop signal (P.T. stop
signal) is active low
indicating exposure is
finished during prep state.
1. Check that P.T.
ramp does not
exceed P.T.
reference during
prep state.
2. Check AEC device
for proper
operation.
E058 CONSOLE BUT ERR Console has detected
exposure exceeded backup
time and terminated
exposure.
E059 HOUSE HEAT LIMIT X-ray tube housing has
exceeded limit.
Wait for tube to cool.


E060 EXP KV HIGH KV exceeds high KV
tolerance level.
1. Check the output
of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
E061 EXP KV LOW KV exceeds low KV
tolerance level.
1. Check the output
of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
E062 EXP_ SW ERROR The EXP_SW signal on the
generator Interface and
generator CPU board is
enabled when it should be
disabled.
E063 FACTORY DEFAULTS SW1 switch 8 on the
generator CPU board is set
to default the generator
CPU NVRAM with factory
defaults.
Set SW1 switch 8 to
its non default
position. The
generator will not exit
the initialization
phase until this
switch is set.
E066 NO SYNC PULSE Pulsed fluoro has been
requested, but no sync
pulse is present.
1. Check that the
imaging system is
active, and cables
are connected
properly.
2. Check J W22 on
the generator
interface board.
E070 SOFTWARE KEY ERR Defective or missing GAL
U29 on generator CPU
board 734573.
for new GAL U29.
E071 DAP OVERFLOW The accumulated DAP
value exceeds the display
limit.
Reset the DAP.


E072 DAP DEVICE ERROR The DAP device is not
functional.
1. Check the DAP
wiring.
2. Check the DAP
interface board.
E073 DAP DATA ERROR The DAP configuration data
is corrupted.
Reset factory
defaults.
E100 CAL_MAX MA ERR Maximum mA has been
exceeded during auto
calibration.
Repeat auto
calibration and/or
decrease standby
current.
E101 CAL_DATA LIMIT Auto calibration has
exceeded data table length
due to an excessive number
of exposures.
1. Check to see if
the filament
standby current is
too low.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
E102 CAL_MAX FIL ERR Maximum filament current
for the selected focus has
been exceeded.
1. Check to see if
the maximum
filament current
limit can be
increased.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
E103 CAL_MAN TERM Operator released exposure
button during auto
calibration.
Retry auto
Calibration.
E104 CAL_NO MA No mA feedback detected
during auto calibration.
Check power supply
Interface cables
between HF power
CPU board.
E105 CAL_MIN MA ERR Minimum generator mA was
exceeded at start of
calibration. This is usually
caused by too high a
filament standby current on
the primary and or
secondary filament.
(Primary is the current
filament being calibrated,
secondary is the other
filament and applies only to
generators with two
independent filament
supplies).
Reduce filament
standby current on
primary and/or
secondary filament.

5.3.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES (TOUCH SCREEN)

5.3.1 Operator Messages (Touch Screen)

These messages indicate the status of the generator. No action is required.

MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Generator Ready Indicates that the generator is ready to make an exposure.
Unable to establish
generator
communication.
Indicates that the console is unable to communicate with the generator.
Ensure that the generator is switched on, and that the console cable is properly
connected to J 2 on the rear of the console.
Communication with
generator re-
established
Indicates that the console has re-established communication with the
generator.

5.3.2 Limit Messages (Touch Screen)

These messages indicate that an exposure has been requested that exceeds one or more limits.

Anode warning level exceeded Anode has exceeded programmed warning
level.
Wait for the anode to
cool.
Calibration limit: selected
parameter not calibrated.
Requested parameter not calibrated. Recalibrate X-ray tube
or select a calibrated
parameter.
Deselect tomo table Request operator to deselect tomo table. Deselect the tomo
receptor.
Fluoro timer warning level
exceeded
Fluoro interval timer 5.0 mins. Reset fluoro timer.
Generator AEC density limit Requested density not programmed. Select another density
or program requested
density step.
Generator duty cycle warning The X-ray generator has reached its duty
cycle warning limit.
Re-evaluate technique
factors. Allow
generator to cool if
possible. If exposures
are continued, serious
generator damage
may result due to
overheating.
Generator kV limit Requested kV not allowed as generator kV
None.
Generator kW limit Requested parameter not allowed as
generator kW limit has been reached.
None.
Generator mA limit Requested mA not allowed as generator
mA limit has been reached.
None.
Generator mAs limit Requested mAs not allowed as generator
mAs limit has been reached.
None.
Generator ms limit Requested ms not allowed as generator ms
None.

5.3.2 Limit Messages (Cont)

Generator PPS limit Generator PPS limit has been reached. None.
Invalid communication
parameter
Generator detected invalid parameter within
received message, message ignored.
Select valid
parameter.
Select tomo table. Request operator to select tomo table. Select the tomo
receptor
Tube housing heat warning X-ray tube housing heat has exceeded
housing warning limit.
Wait for the tube
housing to cool.
Tube kV limit Requested kV not allowed as tube kV limit
has been reached.
None.
Tube kW limit Requested parameter not allowed as tube
kW limit has been reached.
None.
Tube mA limit Requested mA not allowed as tube mA limit
has been reached.
None.
Tube mAs limit Requested mAs not allowed as tube mAs
None.

5.3.3 Error Messages (Touch Screen)

These messages indicate that an error has occurred. The errors are logged in the error log, previous errors
should be reviewed by service personnel before taking further action.

E001 Generator CPU EPROM
checksum error
Generator CPU EPROM
has been corrupted.
for new generator
CPU EPROM.
E003 Generator CPU NVRAM
error
Generator CPU NVRAM
data has been corrupted.
Re-initialize
generator CPU
NVRAM using
generator factory
defaults.
E004 Generator CPU Real Time
Clock error.
Generator CPU real time
clock is not functioning.
Reset time and date.
E005 Main Contactor Error Main contactor in HF power
supply did not energize.
E006 Rotor Fault 1. Rotor starter may have
detected a current fault
in the stator.

2. Power supply was not
ready to start rotor.
Power unit off and
retry rotor start.


E007 Filament Fault Power supply has detected
filament current <2 amps.
1. Check for open
filament in X-ray
tube.
2. Check for poor
connections in the
cathode cable.
3. Check fuses on
filament board(s).
E008 mA Fault Power supply has detected
a fault in the kV or mA
output during an exposure
and immediately terminated
the exposure. This may be
caused by arcing in the X-
ray tube, arcing of the HV
cables, or HT tank.
1. If arcing of the X-
ray tube is
suspected, check
condition of tube.
The X-ray tube
may be damaged
or simply require
seasoning.
Refer to chapter 6
for tube
seasoning
procedure.
2. If failure of HT
tank is suspected,
contact product
support.
E009 Power Supply Not Ready Power supply is not ready to
make an exposure.
Retry exposure.
E011 MA During Exposure Too
High
Generator CPU detected
mA greater than allowed
tolerance.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
E012 MA During Exposure Too
Low
Generator CPU detected
mA less than allowed
tolerance.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
E013 Manually Terminated
Exposure
Operator released exposure
switch during exposure.
1. Re-take exposure
if necessary.
2. Check for faulty
switch contacts or
wiring.
E014 AEC Back-up Timer -
Exposure Terminated
AEC exposure exceeded
allowed back up time.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
AEC chamber is
energized.


E015 AEC mAs Exceeded -
Exposure Terminated
AEC exposure exceeded
allowed back up mAs.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
AEC chamber is
energized.
E016 Tomo Back-up Timer -
Exposure Terminated
Tomo exposure exceeded
back up time.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Increase tomo
back up time if
necessary.
E017 Uncalibrated Exposure
Parameter
Selected mA not calibrated
for selected kV.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube.
E018 Preparation Timeout Generator has been in prep
state too long.
Reduce length of
time in prep state.
E019 Anode Heat Limit Selected parameters will
cause X-ray tube to exceed
its programmed anode heat
limit.
Reduce parameters
or wait for tube to
cool.
E020 Thermal Switch Interlock #1
Error
X-ray tube #1 too hot and
opened.
1 to cool.
E021 Thermal Switch Interlock #2
Error
X-ray tube #2 too hot and
opened.
2 to cool.
E022 Door Interlock Door is open. Close door.
E023 Collimator Interlock Error Collimator is not ready. Check collimator.
E024 Cassette Interlock Error Generator did not receive a
Bucky contact closure in a
reasonable time after start
of Rad expose state.
Check for grid
movement and drive
signal to Bucky.
E025 Image Intensifier Safety
Interlock Error
II safety is not ready. Check II safety.
E026 Spare Input Interlock Error Spare input is not ready. Check spare input.
E027 Receptor Timeout Error -
Receptor did not respond
within the timeout period
The receptor is not
responding
Wait for receptor to
be ready, then retry
exposure.
E028 Prep Input Active During
Initialization Phase
Prep input active during
phase.
Check prep switch
and input for short
circuit.
E029 X-Ray Input Active During
X-ray input active during
phase.
Check X-ray switch
and input for short
circuit.
E030 Fluoro Input Active During
Fluoro input active during
phase.
Check fluoro switch
and input for short
circuit.


E031 Remote Fluoro
Communication Error
Communication error
detected with remote fluoro
control unit.
1. Check remote
fluoro control cable
for damage and
proper connection.
2. Turn power off
and then on to
Reset Generator.
E032 Console Communication
Error
Generator has detected
error in communication to
console.
1. Check console
cable for damage
and proper
connection.
2. Turn power off and
then on to reset
generator.
E033 Warning Lithium Battery
Voltage Low
Generator detects lithium
battery voltage is low.
Replace lithium
battery.
E034 +12VDC Error +12VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
Check +12VDC rail.
E035 -12VDC Error -12VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
Check -12VDC rail.
E036 +15VDC Error +15VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
Check +15VDC rail.
E037 -15VDC Error -15VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
Check -15VDC rail.
E038 Calibration Data Corrupt
Error
Generator detects corrupt
calibration data.
Re-calibrate X-ray
tube(s).
E039 AEC Data Corrupt Generator detects corrupt
AEC data.
Reprogram AEC data
or set factory
defaults.
E040 Fluoro Data Corrupt Generator detects corrupt
Fluoro data.
Reprogram fluoro
data or set factory
defaults.
E041 Receptor Data Corrupt Generator detects corrupt
receptor data.
Reprogram receptor
data or set factory
defaults.
E042 Tube Data Corrupt Generator detects corrupt
tube data.
Reprogram tube data
or set factory
defaults.
E043 High Voltage Error - kV
detected in non X-ray state
KV detected in non x-ray
state.
Switch OFF
generator. Prevent
further use of
generator. Call
product support.
E044 Invalid Communication
Message
Received communication
message not valid and
ignored.
Reset error.


E045 Communication Message
Not Supported
Received message valid,
but not supported by this
system.
Reset error.
E046 Mode Inhibited Received message valid,
but not allowed during
present state.
Reset error.
E047 Fluoro Timer Limit Fluoro Timer has exceeded
time limit.
Reset Fluoro timer.
E048 Focus mismatch error Focus selected does not
match current focus enabled
by power supply.
Check power supply
interface cables
between power
CPU board.
E049 Not Enabled Requested function not
programmed to be enabled.
Reprogram to enable
function.
E050 Generator Limit Data
Corrupt
Generator detects corrupt
generator limit data.
Reprogram generator
limit data or set
factory defaults.
E051 AEC Feedback Error (No
Feedback Signal Detected)
Generator has detected no
feedback signal from AEC
device.
1. Check that X-ray
tube is pointing at
correct AEC
device.
2. Check AEC cable
for damage and
proper
connection.
E052 High Small focus filament
current error in standby
Generator detects small
standby mode.
Check small focus
filament board.
E053 High Large focus filament
current error in standby
Generator detects large
standby mode.
Check large focus
filament board.
E054 AEC Reference out of range AEC reference has reached
a maximum or minimum
limit.
Re-adjust AEC
calibration including
density to operate
within AEC range (O
to 1OVDC).
E055 No fields selected in AEC AEC enabled but no fields
are selected.
Select AEC field(s).
E056 Receptor Disabled All Receptors have no X-ray
tube programmed.
Program receptor(s)
with tube number.


E057 AEC Stop Signal In Wrong
State
AEC stop signal (P.T. stop
signal) is active low
indicating exposure is
finished during prep state.
1. Check that P.T.
ramp does not
exceed P.T.
reference during
prep state.
2. Check AEC device
for proper
operation.
E058 Console Back-up Timer Console has detected
exposure exceeded backup
time and terminated
exposure.
E059 Housing Heat Limit
Exceeded
X-ray tube housing has
exceeded limit.
Wait for tube to cool.
E060 High kV Error KV exceeds high KV
tolerance level.
1. Check the output
of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
E061 Low kV Error KV exceeds low KV
tolerance level.
1. Check the output
of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
E062 EXP_SW Signal Active in
Standby State
The EXP_SW signal on the
generator Interface and
generator CPU board is
enabled when it should be
disabled.
E063 Factory Defaults Set SW1 switch 8 on the
generator CPU board is set
to default the generator
CPU NVRAM with factory
defaults.
Set SW1 switch 8 to
its non default
position. The
generator will not exit
the initialization
phase until this
switch is set.


E066 No Sync Signal Pulsed fluoro has been
requested, but no sync
pulse is present.
1. Check that the
imaging system is
active, and cables
are connected
properly.
2. Check J W22 on
the generator
interface board.
E067 Power Supply Duty Cycle
Limit
Power supply duty cycle
limit exceeded.
Re-evaluate
technique factors.
Allow generator to
cool if possible. If
exposures are
continued, serious
generator damage
may result due to
overheating.
E070 Generator software key
error
Defective or missing GAL
U29 on generator CPU
board 734573.
for new GAL U29.
E071
DAP overflow error
The accumulated DAP
value exceeds the display
limit.
Reset the DAP.
E072
DAP device error
The DAP device is not
functional.
1. Check the DAP
wiring.
2. Check the DAP
interface board.
E073
DAP data error
The DAP configuration data
is corrupted.
Reset factory
defaults.
E100 Calibration Error - Maximum
mA Exceeded
Maximum mA has been
exceed during auto
calibration.
Repeat auto
calibration and/or
decrease standby
current.
E101 Calibration Error -
Calibration Data Table
Exceeded
Auto calibration has
exceeded data table length
due to an excessive number
of exposures.
1. Check to see if
the filament
standby current is
too low.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
E102 Calibration Error - Maximum
Filament Current Exceeded
Maximum filament current
for the selected focus has
been exceeded.
1. Check to see if
the maximum
filament current
limit can be
increased.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
E103 Calibration Error - Manually
Terminated
Operator released exposure
button during auto
calibration.
Retry auto
Calibration.


E104 Calibration Error - No mA No mA feedback detected
during auto calibration.
Check power supply
Interface cables
between HF power
CPU board.
E105 Calibration Error - Minimum
mA Not Calibrated
Minimum generator mA was
exceeded at start of
calibration. This is usually
caused by too high a
filament standby current on
the primary and or
secondary filament.
(Primary is the current
filament being calibrated,
secondary is the other
filament and applies only to
generators with two
independent filament
supplies).
Reduce filament
standby current on
primary and/or
secondary filament.

* The generator purges the existing X-ray tube auto calibration data before starting the auto calibration
routine and saving new calibration data. Therefore, auto calibration should be a last resort during
general troubleshooting, and should only be done to recalibrate the tube. For example, if a low mA
fault is presented, you should ensure that the generator is fully functional, and actually needs
recalibration. If calibration is attempted on a partially functional generator, the auto calibration routine
may be aborted before any calibration is done, and the generator will inhibit further exposures until the
selected mA is calibrated for the selected kV.

1. For an APR MEMORY ERROR fault, the console factory defaults must be restored or the APR must
be restored via GenWare. The procedure for resetting console factory defaults is described in
chapter 6.

5.4.0 MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS

5.4.1 Erratic Console Faults

SYMPTOM: In some environments that are electrically noisy, the console may exhibit erratic faults i.e. RAM
data error, intermittent loss of communication, or random fault messages may be displayed.

SOLUTION: Connect a separate ground wire, #14 AWG (2.3 mm
2
) or larger from the ground stud on the rear
of the console (marked CONSOLE GROUND in the figure rear of control console in chapter 2)
to the ground stud located to the left of the main input fuse block. This is marked GROUND in the
figure generator mains connection in chapter 2.
CPI Canada Inc Regular Maintenance 6

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-10 Rev. L Page 6-1
CHAPTER 6

REGULAR MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS:

Section Title
6.1.0 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.0 X-RAY GENERATOR UPDATE/SERVICE RECORD............................................................................................6-2
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.................................................................................................................................6-2
6.4.0 OIL FILL/LEVEL CHECK (HT TANK) .....................................................................................................................6-4
6.4.1 Millenia Oil Fill/Level Check ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.2 Indico 100 Oil Fill/Level Check........................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.5.0 CLEANING.............................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.6.0 EPROM REPLACEMENT / SOFTWARE UPGRADE ............................................................................................6-6
6.6.1 Console Software / EPROM............................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.6.2 Power EPROM................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.6.3 Dual Speed Starter EPROM (If fitted) ................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.7.0 SOFTWARE KEY INSTALLATION / REPLACEMENT...........................................................................................6-9
6.8.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT.................................................................................................................................6-10
6.9.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING................................................................................................................6-10
6.9.1 Tube Conditioning (Overview).......................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.9.2 Tube Conditioning (Procedure) ........................................................................................................................ 6-11
6.10.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE...................................................................................................................................6-12

6 Regular Maintenance CPI Canada Inc

Page 6-2 Rev. L Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-10
6.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter of the manual provides a recommended schedule for periodic maintenance of the Millenia and
Indico 100 family of generators.

NOTE: REFERENCES IN THIS SECTION TO CONSOLE SERVICING (CONSOLE EPROM
REPLACEMENT, SETTING CONSOLE CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS, CONSOLE BATTERY
REPLACEMENT, ETC) DO NOT APPLY TO THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE.
THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE IS NOT FIELD SERVICEABLE, PLEASE CONTACT THE
FACTORY FOR SERVICE.

6.2.0 X-RAY GENERATOR UPDATE/SERVICE RECORD

The X-ray generator update / service record is stored in the upper cabinet of the generator (Millenia) or on the
back of the panel which accesses the control boards in the lower cabinet (Indico 100). The installation date
and location should be recorded on this form at the time of the original site installation.
Service and repairs must be recorded in the update / service record. The record should be as
thorough as possible, detailing the scope and type of work that was performed (all service and a record of all
replacement parts that were installed). Additionally, the person performing the work should date and sign the
record.
This information will be invaluable in the future for traceability and to ensure continued compatibility of
the generator.

6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

WARNING: MAINTENANCE IS TO BE PERFORMED ONLY BY COMPETENT, TRAINED PERSONNEL WHO
ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE POTENTIAL HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT.

NOTE: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FREQUENCY MAY BE DETERMINED BY CERTAIN REGULATORY
REQUIREMENTS OF THE COUNTRY OR STATE IN WHICH THE INSTALLATION IS LOCATED.
ALWAYS CHECK THE LOCAL CODES AND REGULATIONS WHEN DETERMINING A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.

WARNING: ALWAYS SWITCH OFF MAINS POWER TO THE GENERATOR AND WAIT A
MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE
BEGINNING ANY PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE, INCLUDING CLEANING.

WARNING: OBSERVE ESD PRECAUTIONS. KEEP ALL STATIC - SENSITIVE COMPONENTS
AND CIRCUIT BOARDS IN THEIR STATIC - SHIELDING PACKAGING UNTIL
READY TO INSTALL. ENSURE THAT YOU ARE GROUNDED AT ALL TIMES
WHEN HANDLING STATIC - SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AND CIRCUIT BOARDS.

6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (Cont)

Maintenance
Frequency
Description of Preventative Maintenance
As governed by local
regulations.
Check and recalibrate the DAP meter in the generator.
Every 6 Months AND
whenever a related
certifiable X-ray
component is replaced:
1. Clean and re-grease all HV connections using vapour proof
compound.

2. Clean the control console, remote fluoro control (if used) and main
cabinet as needed. REFER TO 6.5.0 CLEANING BEFORE
PROCEEDING

3. Perform the X-ray tube auto calibration routine, refer to chapter 2.

4. Verify the calibration of the generator; refer to chapter 4 of this
manual.

5. Test the X-ray tube thermal switch circuits in the generator.
Disconnect the tube thermal switch(s) and verify the correct error
message, and that X-ray exposures are inhibited.

6. For fan cooled Indico 100 generators in particular, remove
accumulated dust from the cooling vents. Vacuuming is
recommended.

7. Perform any additional tests required by laws governing this
installation.
Every 12 months: 1. Examine the following for any visible damage and replace any
damaged components:
The exterior of the control console and remote fluoro control if
used, including the membrane switch assembly.
The cable between the control console and the generator main
cabinet and between the remote fluoro control (if used) and
generator main cabinet.
The hand switch and fluoro footswitch (if used) and the cables
connecting these to the console.

2. Open the generator cabinet and examine the unit for any visible
damage: missing or loose ground connections, oil leaks, damaged
cables etc.

3. Ensure that there are no obstructions blocking any of the ventilation
holes or louvers on the generator cabinet.
Every 5 years: Replace the lithium battery on the CPU board in the control console
and on the generator CPU board in the main cabinet. Refer to the
spares list in chapter 8 for the required part number. Refer to
subsection 6.7.0 for battery replacement procedure.

6.4.0 OIL FILL/LEVEL CHECK (HT TANK)

The insulating oil level in the HT transformer does NOT require periodic checking under normal conditions.
However, if there is evidence of possible oil loss, the procedure for checking the correct oil level follows. Refer
to 6.4.1 for Millenia generators, and to 6.4.2 for Indico 100 generators.

6.4.1 Millenia Oil Fill/Level Check

1. Using a suitable wrench, remove the oil fill cap on top of the HT transformer.

2. Measure the oil level from the TOP surface of the oil fill flange using a clean ruler. The oil level should
be in the range of 7/8 (22 mm) to 1 3/8 (35 mm) from the top of the flange. Add oil if the oil level is
low, that is greater than 1 3/8 (35 mm) from the top.

3. Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. Take care not to damage delicate components
inside the tank if using a funnel for oil fill.

4. Replace the oil filler cap and tighten when finished. Wipe up any oil spills. Dispose of soiled absorber
in compliance with government requirements and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations.

Figure 6-1: Millenia HT tank oil fill

6.4.2 Indico 100 Oil Fill/Level Check

1. Loosen the oil fill plug screw on the Indico 100 tank lid.

2. With the screw sufficiently loosened, remove the rubber (neoprene) plug.

3. Use a clean ruler, strip of cardboard, or other equivalent material to determine the oil level --
measured always from the TOP surface of the HT tanks lid.
Normally the oil level should be between 0.88 - 1.25 inches (22 - 32 mm) from the top of the tank
lid.
If the oil level is between 1.25 - 1.6 inches (32 - 41 mm) from the top of the tank lid, then clean oil
should be added as needed.
If the oil level is greater than 1.6 inches (41 mm) below the top of the tank lid, please consult the
factory.

Figure 6-2: HT tank oil level

4. Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. It is critical that air is not added when topping up
the oil. The following procedure is strongly recommended when adding oil.
Use a new clean syringe to remove oil from the container. A 60 cc catheter tip syringe is
recommended. Approximately 60 cc of oil is required to raise the oil level by one millimeter.
Turn the syringe upright and expel any trapped air.
Place the tip of the syringe through the oil-fill plug and into the oil, ensuring that it is below the
surface of the oil.
Gently eject the oil from the syringe into the HT tank, while making sure that the tip of the syringe
remains below the surface of the oil until all of the oil is emptied from the syringe.
Repeat the previous steps until the required amount of oil has been added.

5. Replace the oil fill plug. Once the plug is installed and the screw properly seated, tighten the screw 4
turns. This will secure the oil fill plug. Wipe up any oil spills. Dispose of soiled absorber in compliance
with government requirements and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations. THE OIL DOES
NOT CONTAIN PCBs.

6.5.0 CLEANING

Never use anything other than soap and water to clean plastic surfaces. Other cleaners may damage the
plastic.
Never use any corrosive, solvent or abrasive detergents or polishes.
Ensure that no water or other liquid can enter any equipment. This precaution prevents short circuits and
corrosion forming on components.
Methods of disinfection used must conform to legal regulations and guidelines regarding disinfection and
explosion protection.
If disinfectants are used which form explosive mixtures of gases, these gases must have dissipated before
switching on the equipment again.
Disinfection by spraying is not recommended because the disinfectant may enter the X-ray equipment.
If room disinfection is done with an atomizer, it is recommended that the equipment be switched OFF,
allowed to cool down and covered with a plastic sheet. When the disinfectant mist has subsided, the
plastic sheet may be removed and the equipment be disinfected by wiping.

6.6.0 EPROM REPLACEMENT / SOFTWARE UPGRADE

WARNING: PLEASE TAKE APPROPRIATE ELECTROSTATIC PRECAUTIONS AT ALL TIMES WHEN
HANDLING THE EPROMs.

6.6.1 Console Software / EPROM

1. Console software for the 23 X 56 cm console and for the Rad-only console resides in an EPROM.
When the software for these consoles needs to be field upgraded, a replacement EPROM will be
supplied.

2. Console software for the 31 X 42 cm console initially resides in flash memory on the console board.
The console software will be field upgraded by one of the following methods:
The flash memory may be reprogrammed in the field if the required hardware is available (a
suitable computer, a flash loader, and the proper cables). For details, please consult the factory.
Alternatively, an EPROM may be supplied containing the updated software. Continue with the
following steps if upgrading the software via an EPROM.
3. With the generator mains power switched OFF, open the console to gain access to the console
EPROM. Refer to chapter 2, the section CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE, for
the procedure to access the console CPU board.
4. Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the console CPU board (refer to figure 1E-4).
This does not apply if the console software currently resides in flash memory as described in step 2.
5. Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-4.
6. For Indico 100 with the 31 X 42 cm console:
Ensure that J W1 on the console board is set to the EPROM BOOT position in order to run the
updated software on EPROM. Refer to figure 1E-4. This jumper is initially set to the FLASH
BOOT position in order to boot from flash memory.
J W1 on the console board must be set to the FLASH BOOT position in order to run existing or
upgraded console software from flash memory.
7. Re-assemble the console as per the procedure in chapter 2.
8. Refer to 6.6.4 before re-energizing the generator.

6.6.2 Power EPROM

1. With the generator mains power switched OFF, locate and carefully remove the existing power
EPROM on the generator CPU board (U38 or U41, refer to figure 1E-1).
NOTE THAT THE REPLACEMENT EPROM MAY HAVE FOUR LESS PINS THAN THE SOCKET IT
IS TO BE INSERTED INTO. IF THIS IS SO, THE EMPTY PINS MUST BE ON THE PIN 1 SIDE OF
THE EPROM AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1E-1.
3. Refer to 6.6.4 before re-energizing the generator.

6.6.3 Dual Speed Starter EPROM (If fitted)

1. Switch the generator mains power OFF, AND WAIT 5 MINUTES FOR THE DC BUS CAPACITORS
TO FULLY DISCHARGE.
STEPS 2 AND 3 APPLY TO MILLENIA GENERATORS ONLY. IN INDICO 100 GENERATORS, THE
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD IS FULLY ACCESSIBLE WITH THE APPROPRIATE GENERATOR
SIDE PANEL(S) REMOVED.
2. Loosen the two nuts securing the clamping bracket at the top of the dual speed starter. Slide the
bracket up and gently remove the dual speed starter assembly. The cables connected to the dual
speed starter do not need to be removed in order to change the EPROM.
3. Carefully rotate the dual speed starter chassis to fully expose the dual speed starter board inside the
unit.
4. Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the dual speed starter board (U26, refer to figure
1E-6).
6. Reinstall the dual speed starter assembly by reversing steps 2 and 3 (Millenia).

6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults

If the part number (not revision) of the replacement EPROM is different from the EPROM being replaced,
then the FACTORY DEFAULT procedure(s) must be performed as detailed below. This will initialize the CPUs
NVRAM as required by the new software and sets the data to its factory-configured state. Note that there are
separate procedures for the console CPU board and for the generator CPU board.
For Indico 100 with the 31 X 42 cm console, the console software is initially programmed into flash memory on
the console board. If the console software needs to be field-upgraded, an EPROM may be supplied containing
the updated software. As noted above, if the part number (not revision) of the replacement firmware is
different from that being replaced, then the FACTORY DEFAULT procedure(s) must be performed as detailed
below.
The part number and revision of the software in flash memory is displayed at the password screen, below the
message ENTER PASSWORD: _____, when initially entering into programming mode. This is only
displayed if running the software from flash memory. Refer to the section EPROM REPLACEMENT,
Console EPROM for details regarding the use of flash memory vs. EPROM.

6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults (Cont)

CONSOLE CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS:

31 X 42 CM CONSOLE USING AN EPROM AND 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE:

1. With the power OFF, set switch 8 of SW1 on the console CPU board to its ON position.
2. Power ON the generator. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to loading defaults for two
conditions (console settings and APR memory). Select YES to both.
3. Power OFF the console. Reset switch 8 of SW1 on the console CPU board to its OFF position.
This will initialize both the CONSOLE settings (refer to CONSOLE settings in chapter 3C) and the APR to the
factory default settings.

31 X 42 CM CONSOLE USING FLASH MEMORY AND RAD-ONLY CONSOLE:

1. In chapter 3C, refer to LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS. This is in the UTILITY menu, under the
CONSOLE submenu. Set LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS to YES.
2. Select << and EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
3. Select EXIT again to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
4. Briefly switch the generator OFF, and then ON again. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to
loading defaults when it is powered on again. Select YES to both prompts to reset the console and
APR defaults.
5. This will initialize both the CONSOLE settings (refer to CONSOLE settings in chapter 3C) and the APR
to the factory default settings.
The LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS setting automatically resets to NO the next time the generator is switched
on.

GENERATOR CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS:

1. With the power OFF, set switch 8 of SW1 on the generator CPU board to its OFF position.
2. Power ON the generator. After the initialization is complete, the console will display the message
FACTORY DEFAULTS.
3. Power OFF the generator. Reset switch 8 of SW1 on the generator CPU board to its ON position.
This will initialize all generator data to the factory defaults (tube selection, generator limits, receptor setup, I/O
configuration, AEC setup, AEC calibration, fluoro setup, tube calibration, time & date, error log and statistics).

6.7.0 SOFTWARE KEY INSTALLATION / REPLACEMENT

WARNING: PLEASE TAKE APPROPRIATE ELECTROSTATIC PRECAUTIONS AT ALL TIMES WHEN
HANDLING THE SOFTWARE KEY I.C.

This feature is available on Indico 100 generators only. The software key activates specific options in the
Indico 100 X-ray generator, and may need to be installed to add certain options, or may need to be replaced if
it is desired to alter the current configuration of the generator. To install or replace the software key follow the
procedure below.

1. With the generator mains power switched OFF, locate the socket for the software key, U29, on the
generator CPU board. Refer to figure 6-3.
2. Remove the existing I.C. U29, if fitted. The original I.C. should be placed in anti-static packaging, and
may be set aside for future use in a generator that requires the options that are activated by that I.C.
3. Carefully insert the replacement software key into the U29 socket observing the orientation per figure
6-3.
4. Perform setup and calibration, if required, of the new features that have been activated by the new
software key. Refer to the applicable sections of the service manual.

GENERATOR CPU BOARD
FILE: ML_CPU2.CDR
U29
EPROM U41

Figure 6-3: Software key location and orientation

6.8.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT

To replace the battery on the console CPU board or on the generator CPU board, follow the procedure below.
Refer to the figure showing the location of these batteries in chapter 2, in the section CHECKING THE RAM
BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE. Refer to that section in chapter 2 for console disassembly instructions to gain
access to the console CPU board if required.

NOTE: THE CONSOLE BATTERY SHOULD BE REPLACED WITH THE GENERATOR POWERED UP.
THIS WILL PREVENT THE CONSOLE DATA FROM BEING LOST WHEN THE BATTERIES ARE
REMOVED.

THIS IS THE ONLY EXCEPTION TO THE RULE OF NOT SERVICING THE GENERATOR WHILE
THE POWER IS ON. FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE LOCATIONS AND
HAZARDS BEFORE REPLACING THIS BATTERY.

1. Remove the battery from the holder by gently prying under the battery at the access slot in the battery
holder using a small screwdriver. Slide the battery over the edge of the holder and remove it when it is
free.

2. Check the voltage of the new battery prior to inserting it. This should be nominally 3.0V, do not use if it
is under 2.80 V.

3. Wipe the replacement battery with a clean cloth, and ensure that the holder is clean and free of debris
before inserting the battery.

4. Gently lift the spring contact on the holder and insert the replacement battery positive (+) side up

6.9.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING

Tube conditioning or seasoning is particularly important for new tubes or tubes that have not been used for
several days. This should be performed on each X-ray tube before attempting auto calibration, as an
unseasoned tube may not operate properly at higher kV values without arcing. Refer to the X-ray tube
manufacturers instructions, if available, for the tube conditioning or seasoning procedure. If the X-ray tube
manufacturers instructions are not available, the following procedure may be used:

6.9.1 Tube Conditioning (Overview)

The generator does X-ray tube auto calibration at 50 kV, 60 kV, 70 kV, 80 kV, 100 kV and 120 kV. The tube
normally needs to be seasoned before it can be operated at the higher voltages encountered during auto
calibration.
Tube seasoning is started by auto calibrating the kV stations up to and including part of the 70 kV
station. The tube is then seasoned at 70 kV. Progressively higher kV stations are then auto calibrated and
seasoned. Finally the entire kV and mA range is auto calibrated, then the tube is seasoned at the remaining
high kV values.
Manually releasing the exposure button during auto calibration of a particular kV station in the
following procedure prevents the generator from attempting operation beyond that kV/mA value.

NOTE: THE TUBE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED SEASONING PROCEDURE, IF AVAILABLE,
MUST ALWAYS BE USED IN PLACE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.

6.9.1 Tube Conditioning (Overview) Cont

NOTE: LOW SPEED ONLY EXPOSURES ARE RECOMMENDED FOR THE SEASONING EXPOSURES,
TO PREVENT EXCESSIVE HEAT BUILD-UP IN THE HOUSING FROM THE STATOR WINDINGS
OR THE ROTOR BEARINGS.

X-ray tubes that have not been used for more than 8 hours may suffer thermal shock if operated at
high mA and kV without a warm-up procedure. A cold anode (Molybdenum) is very brittle and when
suddenly heated over a small area may experience thermal cracking of the anode surface, eventually
leading to permanent tube damage.

6.9.2 Tube Conditioning (Procedure)

X-ray tube seasoning should be done on LARGE focus in order to minimize tube wear.

The procedure below is intended for seasoning an X-ray tube prior to attempting tube auto calibration. To
season a tube that does not need to be calibrated, simply follow steps 2, 4, 6, 8, and 9.

1. Start the tube auto calibration sequence, and manually terminate the exposure at 70 kV and 250 mA.

2. Season the tube at 70 kV by taking approximately 10 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.

3. Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 100 kV and 250 mA.


5. Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 120 kV and 160 mA.


7. Restart the auto calibration sequence and allow the auto calibration sequence to complete.


9. Repeat step 8 at 140 kV, and then at 145 kV.

6.10.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE

If the generator has completed its useful service life, local environmental regulations must be complied with in
regard to disposal of possible hazardous materials used in the construction of the generator.
In order to assist with this determination, the noteworthy materials used in the construction of this
generator are itemized below:

ITEM
Electrical insulating oil in HT tank. This is a mineral oil with trace additives (60 Litre (17 U.S. gal) for
Millenia, 25 Litre (6.5 U.S. gal) for Indico 100).
Solder (lead/tin).
Epoxy fiberglass circuit board materials, tracks are solder on copper.
Wire, tinned copper. Insulated with PVC, tefzel, or silicone.
Steel and / or aluminum (generator cabinet and console chassis).
Plastic (console enclosure and console membrane).
Electrical and electronic components: ICs, transistors, diodes, resistors, capacitors, etc.

WARNING: DO NOT DISASSEMBLE, INCINERATE, OR SHORT-CIRCUIT THE BATTERY(S) IN THIS
PRODUCT. DO NOT PUT IT IN TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE OF IT
AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL ORDINANCES.
THE FLUORESCENT LAMP IN THE LCD DISPLAY CONTAINS MERCURY. DO NOT PUT IT IN
TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE OF IT AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL
ORDINANCES.
THE LCD IS MADE OF GLASS. IF THE LCD BREAKS DUE TO ROUGH HANDLING OR
DROPPING, AND THE INTERNAL FLUID GETS IN YOUR EYES OR ON YOUR HANDS,
IMMEDIATELY WASH THE AFFECTED AREAS WITH WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES.
SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IF ANY SYMPTOMS ARE PRESENT AFTER WASHING.

CPI Canada Inc Theory of Operation 7

Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-06 Rev. J Page 7-1
CHAPTER 7

THEORY OF OPERATION

CONTENTS:

7.1.0 INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.0 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION....................................................................................................7-2
7.2.1 System ON (MD-0762).............................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (MD-0788) ................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.3 Room interface (MD-0763)........................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.2.4 X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (MD-0761) .................................................................................................... 7-8
7.2.5 kV control and feedback (MD-0759) ....................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (MD-0760) .............................................................................................. 7-11
7.2.7 Low speed starter (MD-0764) ................................................................................................................. 7-14
7.2.8 Dual speed starter (MD-0765)................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.2.8 Dual speed starter (Cont) ........................................................................................................................ 7-16
7.2.9 Rad / fluoro and power mode select (MD-0786) ..................................................................................... 7-16
7.2.10 Interlocks & tube 1 / tube 2 tellback (MD-0787).................................................................................... 7-16
7.2.11 AEC (MD-0757)..................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7.2.12 ABS (MD-0758) ..................................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.2.13 Remote fluoro control (MD-0766).......................................................................................................... 7-21
7.2.14 Digital interface (MD-0767) ................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.2.15 DAP (MD-0828)..................................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.2.16 Serial communications (MD-0829)........................................................................................................ 7-24
7 Theory of Operation CPI Canada Inc

Page 7-2 Rev. J Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-06
7.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter contains the theory of operation for the Indico 100 series of X-ray generators. The theory of
operation is organized by functional blocks as depicted in the functional drawings in chapter 9.

7.2.0 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION

Refer to the appropriate functional block diagram in chapter 9 in conjunction with the theory of operation
in this chapter. Waveforms and voltages at the pertinent test points are shown on the last page of each
functional drawing.

7.2.1 System ON (MD-0762)

The left side of this drawing shows the wiring from the ON and OFF switches on the console keyboard
assemblies to J 4-10, J 4-11 and J 4-12 on the generator interface board for the various Indico 100
consoles (J 16-3, J 16-6, J 16-7 for the Rad-only console).
The generator interface board on the Indico 100 X-ray generator includes power ON and OFF switches
S2 and S1 that may be used to switch the generator on and off locally while working on the equipment.
These switches are connected in parallel with the main generator power ON and OFF switches that are
located on the console.
Pressing either of the power ON switches described above turns on Q2 on the generator interface board.
This turns on Q3, holding the collector of Q3 low. This latches Q2 on by holding the base of Q2 low when
the ON button is released.
The collector of Q3 is connected to K2 and K3 via D16. These relays will energize if S3 is in the NORMAL
position when the generator is switched on. If S3 is in the LOCKOUT position, the generator cannot be
inadvertently switched on.
When K2 and K3 are energized, the DC rails (+5 V, +12 V, +15 V, +24 V, -12 V, -15 V, and -24 V) on the
generator interface board are established, and +24 V is supplied to the console via K3 (see MD-0788,
sheet 4).
The generator CPU will issue a P/S ON (power supply ON) command after the +5 V rail is detected as
described in 7.2.2.

J W1 on the generator interface board may be jumpered such that K1 is energized only when the
generator is switched on, or such that K1 is energized at all times that the AC mains to the generator is
on. K1 switches the 110 and 220 VAC supplies for the room interface board, as shown on sheet 4 of MD-
0788.

Pressing either of the OFF switches turns on Q1 on the generator interface board. This turns off Q2,
turning off Q3. This will de-energize K2, K3, and / or K1 on the generator interface board, removing the
DC rails from the generator interface board and removing the +24 V supply from the console. De-
energizing K1 (if applicable) will disconnect the 110 / 220 VAC supplies to the room interface board.

In normal operation, J 17-1 and J 17-2 are joined via a wire jumper. An emergency-off switch may be
connected to the generator by removing the jumper between J 17-1 and J 17-2, and then wiring the
emergency-off switch to J 17-1 and J 17-2.

7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (MD-0788)

Refer to MD-0788, sheet 1:
Sheet 1 of MD-0788 applies to three phase units. Portions of sheet 1 are common to single phase and
three phase units. Sheet 2 details the circuits that are different between single and three phase
generators.
Assuming that the AC mains is connected and switched on, line voltage is applied to the primary of room
interface transformer T2 via F1 and F2. This will establish the 24 VDC supply via F5 and D3 on the
generator interface board, as shown on sheet 4.
Several seconds after the generator has been switched on as per 7.2.1, the generator CPU will issue a
P/S ON (power supply ON) command, resulting in 24 VDC being applied to J 5-3 and J 5-4 on the auxiliary
board as described under MD-0788, sheet 3. This will energize K1 and K2 on the power input board via
relay K1 on the auxiliary board (K1 is shown in the normal, i.e. no soft-start fault position).
With K2 on the power input board energized, line voltage is applied to power supply auxiliary transformer
T1. The primary of T1, an autotransformer, supplies 120 VAC for the fans and for the tube 1 / tube 2
solenoid in the HT tank, 120 or 240 VAC for rotor boost, and 52 / 73 / 94 VAC for rotor-run as described
later in this section. The secondary of T1 supplies low voltage AC to the auxiliary board as per sheet 3.
When K1 on the power input board is energized, line voltage is applied to the input of D1 via soft-start
current limit resistors R10 and R11, thus pre-charging the DC bus capacitors. Normal charging of the DC
bus is sensed by U1 via R5 to R8, D3, R18 / R19 and R16 / R17.
The emitter of U1 will rise toward +6 V as the DC bus charges. The emitter is connected to the soft-start
protection circuit on the auxiliary board. If the DC bus capacitors charge normally, K1 on the auxiliary
board will remain de-energized, D3 will be lit, and the soft start driver circuit (U3B, Q6, etc) will issue a
contactor-closed signal after approximately 20 seconds. This will light D2 on the auxiliary board, output a
logic low signal to the CPU via J 5-7 of the auxiliary board to indicate that the main contactor is closed,
and close the main power contactor K5 on the power input board. The line voltage will then be directly
rectified by D1 to produce approximately 560 VDC for 400 V units, or approximately 670 VDC for 480 V
units. This DC bus voltage is switched by the inverter board(s) to produce the drive for the primary of the
HT transformers as described in 7.2.5.
If U1 on the power input board does not indicate normal bus charging, the soft start protection circuit will
energize K1 on the auxiliary board. This will open K1 on the power input board, but leave K2 energized
via R1 / R2. De-energizing K1 on the power input board opens the soft-start charging path via R10 and
R11. With K1 on the auxiliary board energized, Q6 on the auxiliary board cannot turn on. This keeps K5
on the power input board de-energized, and holds J 5-7 of the auxiliary board high to indicate to the
generator CPU that the main contactor is open.
For R&F generators, a logic circuit (U11, Q9, etc) on the auxiliary board controls the cooling fans in the
generator. During fluoroscopic operation, and for approximately 20 minutes after switching from fluoro to
Rad operation, the output of the fluoro fan timer / driver circuit will be low, lighting D37 on the auxiliary
board and energizing K4 on the power input board. This will supply 120 VAC to the cooling fans from T1
via F4 and K4 on the power input board.
When tube 2 is selected (two tube units only), J 1-6 on the auxiliary board is pulled low via the control
board. This will close K3 on the power input board, supplying 120 VAC to energize the tube 1 / tube 2
solenoid in the HT tank. The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal is also taken to J 2-9 on the low speed starter
board as described in 7.2.7.
When the generator is switched off, the loss of the DC rails on the generator interface board (which
supplies the generator CPU board) will remove the drive for K1 and K2 on the power input board, causing
these relays to open. Line voltage will then be removed from the power supply auxiliary transformer T1,
causing loss of the DC rails on the auxiliary board. When the 12 V rail has collapsed, U2 on the power
input board will turn off. This allows the DC bus discharge circuit to be biased on by R20, rapidly
discharging the DC bus capacitors through R16 / R17 and R18 / R19.

7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (Cont)

Depending on the tap settings on T1, the low speed starter boost voltage will be 120 or 240 VAC, and the
run-voltage will be 52, 73, or 94 VAC. Refer to chapter 2 of the service manual for the procedure for
setting these taps.


Sheet 2 of MD-0788 applies to single-phase units. The circuits that are common to single phase and
three phase units are described on sheet 1.
Assuming that the AC mains is connected and switched on, line voltage is applied to the primary of room
interface transformer T2 via F1 and F2. This will establish the 24 VDC supply via F5 and D3 on the
generator interface board, as shown on sheet 4.
Several seconds after the generator has been switched on as per 7.2.1, the generator CPU will issue a
generator-ON command, resulting in 24 VDC being applied to J 5-3 and J 5-4 on the auxiliary board as
described under MD-0788, sheet 3. This will energize K1 and K2 on the power input board.
With K2 on the power input board energized, line voltage is applied to power supply auxiliary transformer
T1. The primary of T1, an autotransformer, supplies 120 VAC for the fans and for the tube 1 / tube 2
solenoid in the HT tank, 120 or 240 VAC for rotor boost, and 52 / 73 / 94 VAC for rotor-run as described
later in this section. The secondary of T1 supplies low voltage AC to the auxiliary board as per sheet 3.
When K1 on the power input board energizes, line voltage is applied to the voltage doubler circuit via
soft-start current limit resistors R10 and R11, thus pre-charging the DC bus capacitors. Normal charging
of the DC bus is sensed by U1 via R6 to R8, R16 to R21, D3, etc. D2 will light to indicate that U1 is
energized (indicating that the DC bus is charged).
The emitter of U1 will rise toward +6 V as the DC bus charges. The emitter is connected to the soft-start
protection circuit on the auxiliary board, and is described on sheet 1. If the DC bus capacitors charge
normally, the main contactor K5 on the power input board will close, applying the line voltage directly to
the voltage doubler circuit where it is rectified and doubled to produce approximately 650 VDC. This DC
bus voltage is switched by the inverter board(s) to produce the drive for the primary of the HT
transformers as described in 7.2.5.
If U1 on the power input board does not indicate normal bus charging, the soft start protection circuit will
energize K1 on the auxiliary board, and K5 will remain de-energized as described previously
The operation of the cooling fans via K4 on the power input board and the operation of the tube 1 / tube 2
solenoid via K3 is described on the previous page.
The power down sequence is similar to that described on the previous page, except that single phase
units do not have a rapid discharge circuit. The DC bus capacitors will discharge through bleeder
resistors connected across the bus capacitors, with a time constant 5 minutes.
Depending on the tap settings on T1, the low speed starter boost voltage will be 120 or 240 VAC, and the
run-voltage will be 52, 73, or 94 VAC. Refer to chapter 2 of the service manual for the procedure for
setting these taps.


Line voltage is connected to the primary of power supply auxiliary transformer T1 when the generator is
switched ON, i.e. when K2 on the power input board is energized. The DC rails on the auxiliary board will
then be established (+/- 35 V via F3, F4 and D32, and +/- 12 V via F1, F2, D33, U5 and U6 which are
connected in parallel, and U4).
The required DC rails are then distributed to the filament supply board(s) and to the control and dual
speed starter boards as shown on sheet 3. Regulators on the control board and dual speed starter board
supply +5 V for those boards as shown.
When the main contactor K5 on the power input board closes, J 5-7 of the auxiliary board is taken low.
This logic low signal is taken to the control board, where it enables the prep signal to the dual speed
starter board as described in 7.2.8, and also turns on Q16 on the control board, turning on opto-coupler
U9 on the generator CPU board. The output of U9, which indicates the contactor-closed status, is
monitored by the CPU via U24. U9 also drives contactor-closed status LEDs DS9 / DS10, where DS9
lights to indicate that the contactor is closed.
When the +5 V rail on the generator interface board is established, the generator CPU will start to
function. The CPU will perform its start-up diagnostics, and then output data (bit 0) via U27, U19, and
U16 to energize opto coupler U17 on the generator CPU board. This will turn on Q4, applying 15 V to
J 5-3 and J 5-4 on the auxiliary board via current limit resistors R27 / R32 and the control board, resulting
in approximately 24 VDC to close K1 and K2 on the power input board, as described earlier. DS34 /
DS35 indicate the P/S ON status, where DS34 lights to indicate that the power supply is on.
The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal (bit 2) is generated by the CPU, then latched and buffered by U27 and
U19 on the generator CPU board. The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal is then applied to U16 and to the tube
1 / tube 2 tellback logic circuit as per 7.2.10. The output of U16 drives U7 on the control board, which in-
turn drives Q1. Q1 turns on when tube 2 is selected, pulling J 1-6 on the auxiliary board low. This
energizes K3 on the power input board as described earlier. The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal is also fed
to the dual speed starter as described in 7.2.8.
For continuous fluoro mode, the CPU sends data (bit 7) to data latch U27 on the generator CPU board.
This is then applied to driver U16, and to DS22 / DS23 which indicate continuous fluoro (FLUORO) or
Rad / pulsed fluoro (FLUORO bar) operation. The output of U16 drives opto coupler U40 on the control
board, which pulls J 1-5 on the auxiliary board high for Rad / pulsed fluoro operation and low for
continuous fluoro operation. This high / low signal is applied to the fluoro fan timer / driver circuit (sheet
1), and to the Rad / fluoro and power mode select circuits as described in 7.2.9.
When pulsed fluoro or low power Rad operation is selected, the CPU sends data (bit 3) to data latch U49.
The data latch drives Q1 and DS2 / DS4 on the generator CPU board. DS2 lights to indicate low power /
pulsed fluoro operation, while DS4 indicates high power Rad operation. Q1 on the generator CPU board
drives opto coupler U41 on the control board, which pulls J 1-3 on the auxiliary board high for PF / low
power operation, and low for high power Rad mode. This signal is then applied to the fluoro fan timer /
driver circuit (sheet 1), and to the Rad / fluoro and power mode select circuits as described in 7.2.9.
U3C and U3D on the auxiliary board monitor the +and -12 V supplies on that board. The outputs of U3C
and U3D will switch low if either of these supplies drops below predefined limits, lighting DS1 and sending
a fault signal to the control board and to the driver for K1 on the low speed starter board.
A soft-start fault signal is generated if the DC bus capacitors do not charge normally (SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL from the soft start driver circuit on page 1). This signal is fed to U3A on the auxiliary
board, whose output will switch low if a soft-start fault exists. This is ORed together with the outputs of
U3C and U3D, and has the same effect as described above for a +/-12 V fault.


Line voltage is connected to the primary of room interface transformer T2 whenever the AC mains is
connected and switched on. With the generator switched on, K2 on the generator interface board will
close, establishing the DC rails on the generator interface board via F3 / F4 and D1 (+/- 24 V, +15 V via
U5, +5 V via F6 and the +5 V / +16 V power supply circuit, +12 V via U3, -12 V via U2, and -15 V via U4).
The required DC rails are then distributed to the digital I/O board, to the AEC board, to the room interface
board, and to the generator CPU board, where DS33 and DS36-DS39 indicate the presence of the
associated DC rails.
The 24 VDC supply that is derived from D3 / C10 is used by the on / off circuit on the generator interface
board (MD-0762), and is also fed to the console when the on / off circuit closes K3. Power supplies and /
or voltage regulators on the console produce the required DC rails for the console circuits. Additionally,
the console includes a 300 VAC power supply that drives the cold-cathode fluorescent lamp that
backlights the LCD display.
110 and 220 VAC is supplied to the room interface board. The 110 / 220 VAC supplies are only present
when K1 on the generator interface board is closed. K1 may be configured to be closed at all times that
AC mains is supplied to the generator, or K1 may be configured to close only when the generator is
switched on. Refer to 7.2.1, SYSTEM ON, for details.
24 VDC is available at J 17-3 and J 17-4 to drive the coil of a power distribution relay in installations with
installer supplied power distribution circuits. The maximum current available from this source is 100
mA.

Sheet 5 shows the power distribution (DC rails) to the remote fluoro control, and to the Indico 100
consoles other than those shown on page 4.

7.2.3 Room interface (MD-0763)

Sheet 1 shows the room interface inputs. These are shown on the left side of the drawing. Nine of the
inputs energize opto couplers via 4-pin jumpers; the remaining inputs energize the associated opto
coupler directly. The inputs that have a connector (J W7, J W10, J W15, etc) in series with the opto
coupler(s) may be configured such that shorting the input turns on the opto coupler, or may be configured
such that applying 24 VDC across the input energizes the opto coupler. The remaining inputs are only
active when the inputs are shorted.
For inputs with a 4-pin jumper in series with the opto coupler, the jumper must be across pins 2 and 3 of
the connector if the input is a 24 VDC source. If using this configuration, observe the polarity of the 24
VDC source to ensure that the opto coupler is correctly driven. J umper across pins 1 and 2 and pins 3
and 4 of the connector if it is desired to activate the opto coupler by shorting across that input.
For the REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE input and the REMOTE EXPOSURE input, two or three opto
couplers are connected in series. MD-0763 shows the opto coupler relevant to the room interface
function. The second and / or third opto coupler is shown on MD-0761 and described in 7.2.4.
One set of thermal switch inputs is available on the room interface board as shown. A second set of
thermal switch inputs is available on the stator terminal block. The thermal switch inputs on the stator
terminal block are routed to T1 and T2 (at R33 and R34 respectively) on the generator interface board.
The generator CPU monitors the output of each opto coupler via logic circuits on the generator interface
board.

7.2.3 Room interface (Cont)

Sheet 2 shows the room interface outputs. These are shown on the right side of the drawing. Five of the
outputs may be configured to supply +24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC or to provide a dry contact closure
when the output is active. Three of the outputs may be configured to supply +24 VDC or to provide a dry
contact closure when the output is active, and the remaining three outputs are permanently configured to
provide a dry contact closure when the output is active.
When any of the outputs on the room interface board are to be made active, the generator CPU will send
data to address decoders, latches, and driver circuits on the generator interface board. These circuits
decode the data, and drive relays K1 to K13 on the room interface board. The contacts of each of these
relays drive the room interface outputs.
J W1 to J W5 may be configured such that the corresponding output is a dry relay contact by placing the
jumper in the DRY position. Placing the jumper in the LIVE position will cause +24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220
VAC to be output, depending on the voltage source selected at TB11. To select the desired voltage
source, a wire jumper must be connected from TB11 pins 1-5 to TB10 to select 220 VAC, to TB9 to select
110 VAC, or to TB8 to select 24 VDC. For example, if it is intended that the TOMO / BUCKY 4 SELECT
output should provide 110 VAC when that output is active, J W1 must be jumpered in the LIVE position
and a wire jumper must be connected from TB11-4 to one of the available positions on TB9.
With J W1 to J W5 in the LIVE position, relays K1 - K4 and K6 switch the return side of the circuit. If
multiple switched voltage outputs are required, jumper the desired voltage to TB11, select the DRY
position on J W1 to J W5, connect the switched output to the relay output (example TB1-1 for J W1), and
connect the common return directly to TB7.
Relays K1 to K4 and K6 have R-C snubbers connected across the contacts to quench contact arcing
when the relay opens while driving inductive loads. If the output is configured to supply 110 or 220 VAC,
and the load is an opto coupler or other low-current device, sufficient AC current may flow through the
snubber to energize the load when the relay is open. If this is the case, the jumper that is in series with
the snubber may need to be removed. Further details on this may be found in chapter 3B.
J W6 to J W8 may be configured such that the corresponding output is a dry relay contact by placing the
jumper in the DRY position. Placing the jumper in the LIVE 24 VDC position will cause +24 VDC to be
output.
The remaining outputs (collimator bypass, room light, and mag 1 to mag 3) are permanently configured to
provide dry contact closures when the output is active.

7.2.4 X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (MD-0761)

The keyboard assembly and console board shown on sheet 1 is used on the 31 X 42 cm console. The
console portion of these circuits for the other Indico 100 console types is shown on sheet 3 and 4.
Pressing PREP pulls J 4-7 on the generator interface board low via U25 on the console board. This turns
on U15 on the generator interface board. The generator CPU monitors the output of U15 via U18 and
U25, with a valid prep command being recognized when the output of U15 is low.
Pressing X-ray will pull J 4-8 on the generator interface board low via U26 on the console board. This will
turn on U37 and U38 on the generator interface board. The generator CPU monitors the output of U37 via
U18 and U25. The software will recognize a logic low at the output of U37 as a hardware X-ray request
(X-ray switch pressed), and consequently will pull the emitter of U38 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the
emitter of U38 held low and U38 energized, the collector of U38 will be held low. This energizes U22 on
the generator interface board, turning on U46 on the generator CPU board. The generator CPU monitors
the output of U46, recognizing a valid X-ray request when the output of U46 is low. DS42 on the
generator CPU board will light to indicate that an X-ray request is being made.
An input via the REMOTE TOMO SELECT input will energize U8 and U10 on the generator interface
board (refer also to 7.2.3). The generator CPU monitors the output of U10 via U18 and U25, and
recognizes a logic low at the output of U10 as a remote tomo X-ray request. When a remote tomo
exposure request is received, the CPU will pull the emitter of U8 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the
emitter of U8 held low and U8 energized, the collector of U8 will be held low. This turns on U22 and U46
as described above, indicating to the CPU that a valid remote tomo request is being made.
A remote X-ray exposure request via the REMOTE EXPOSURE input will energize U41and U43 on the
generator interface board (refer also to 7.2.3). The generator CPU monitors the output of U41 via U18
and U25, and recognizes a logic low at the output of U41 as a remote exposure request. When a remote
exposure request is received, the CPU will pull the emitter of U43 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the
emitter of U43 held low and U43 energized, the collector of U43 will be held low. This turns on U22 and
U46 as described above, indicating to the CPU that a valid X-ray request is being made.
Pressing the fluoro foot switch (if connected to the console) will pull J 4-6 on the generator interface board
low via U24 on the console board. This will turn on U30, U42, and U44 on the generator interface board.
These same opto couplers will be energized if the fluoro foot switch is connected to the room interface
board (refer to 7.2.3), and the fluoro foot switch is pressed. The generator CPU monitors the output of
U30 via U18 and U25. The software will recognize a logic low at the output of U30 as a fluoroscopic X-ray
request, and consequently will pull the emitter of U42 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the emitter of U42
held low and U42 energized, the collector of U42 will be held low. This turns on U22 and U46 as
described above, indicating to the CPU that a valid X-ray request is being made.
The generator interface board contains a last image hold circuit consisting of U44, U32, U39, C30, etc.
The last image hold circuit will keep U32 energized for approximately 100 milliseconds after the fluoro
foot switch has been released. The emitter of U32 will be held low by the generator CPU for the time of
the last image hold setting (up to 99 ms) in the receptor setup menu (chapter 3C). This will hold the
collector of U32 low, keeping U22 and U46 energized as previously described, and allowing the frame
store device to complete the last image.
The console CPU (U18) monitors the output of U24, U25, and U26 on the console board, recognizing a
console fluoroscopic X-ray request when the output of U24 is low, a prep request when the output of U25
is low, and a console X-ray request when the output of U26 is low.

7.2.4 X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (Cont)

When a prep request has been made as described on page 1, the CPU will write data to the kV enable
and prep latches within U27 on the generator CPU board. The kV enable and prep commands light DS30
and DS27 on the generator CPU board when active, and drive U4 and U2 respectively on the control
board via U19 and U16 on the generator CPU board.
The emitter of U4 on the control board is held low when the HT tank is properly connected. If the output of
U4 is high (HT tank not connected, or kV enable command not present), the ENABLE line (TP10) will be
held low by the comparator circuit consisting of U11A, RN8, etc. This will hold the output of the PREP
ENABLED and X-RAY REQUEST comparator circuits low via D21 and D24, inhibiting the prep and X-
ray functions. If the kV ENABLE command is present, the output of U4 will be low, and the kV enable line
(TP10) will be high. This will reverse bias D21 and D24, allowing the PREP and X-RAY lines to be pulled
high when requested. The RESET command resets kV and mA faults that are latched by circuits on the
control board. Pressing the MENU / RESET button on the console toggles the kV enabled circuit,
resetting the fault latches.
The output of U2 on the control board will be low when PREP is active, causing the prep line (TP18) to be
pulled high by the comparator circuit consisting of U11B, U10C, etc. The prep command is taken to the
GENERATOR READY detector circuit and the logic OR / NOR circuits via D25. If the prep command
is present, and no faults exist, the base of Q12 will be pulled low, turning on Q12, thus indicating a
generator-ready condition. The prep command also initiates the boost cycle on the low speed or dual
speed starter (refer to 7.2.7 and 7.2.8).
When the generator CPU has received a valid X-ray request, the CPU will send an X-ray command to
data latch U27 on the generator CPU board. This will light DS26 on the generator CPU board, and will
pull the anodes of U5 and U3 on the control board high. The cathodes of U5 and U3 are held low by the
EXPOSURE ENABLE command from U22 (the line connected to the cathode of U46 on the generator
CPU board, page 1) during an X-ray request. Therefore, opto couplers U5 and U3 will only be energized
if both the hardware and software X-ray commands are present. Because these opto couplers and the
comparator circuits (U11D, RN7, U10D, etc) are connected in parallel, both opto couplers must be turned
on for TP12 to be pulled high. The X-ray request line is taken to the OR / NOR circuits consisting of Q4,
Q13, D91, etc. If the prep request is present, and no faults exist at the time of the X-ray request, the line
at TP14 will be pulled high. This enables the output of the VCO as described in 7.2.5.
The GENERATOR READY detector and the logic OR / NOR circuits are shown as a functional block
with six inputs as shown (PREP input, X-RAY input, and four fault inputs), and three outputs
(GENERATOR READY, DRIVE ENABLE, and HV / MA FAULT). The generator-ready and drive enable
signals are inhibited if any of the fault inputs are active (+/- 12V/SS FAULT, FILAMENT FAULT,
STATOR FAULT, HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT, or HIGH MA FAULT). This will disable the inverter
drive, preventing any kV output.

Opto coupler U6 on the generator CPU board will be turned on when the power supply ready signal that
originates on page 2 is present. The generator CPU monitors the output of U6 via U24, and DS17 on the
generator CPU board will light to indicate the generator-ready status.
For the Rad-only console, pressing PREP and X-RAY energizes U9 and U10 respectively. The inputs to
the generator interface board at J 16-4 and J 16-5 are pulled low via the LED portion of U9 / U10 and the
closed prep or X-ray exposure switch.
For the 23 X 56 cm console, the operation is similar to that for the 31 X 42 cm console as described on
sheet 1, except that the component reference designations are different.

7.2.4 X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (Cont)

Sheet 4 shows the console prep and X-ray exposure circuits for the touch screen console. Pressing prep
or X-ray on the console directly pulls J 4-7 and J 4-8 on the generator interface board low, initiating the
appropriate action in the generator as described earlier.

7.2.5 kV control and feedback (MD-0759)

When the CPU is satisfied that all requirements have been met to allow an X-ray exposure as described
in 7.2.4, the kV reference voltage will be produced by D/A converter U22 on the generator CPU board.
This is buffered by U14A, inverted by U13A on the control board, and then summed with the positive
going kV feedback signal from U16B at the input of error amplifier U13B. Error amplifier U13B will
regulate the kV by producing a DC output that is proportional to the difference between the kV reference
voltage and the kV feedback voltage.
The HT primary current is sampled by T1, and rectified by D27 to D30 to produce a current limit signal (a
negative voltage proportional to the primary current). This is applied to the input of U21A, where it will
limit the kV demand if the primary current exceeds normal limits. This current limit signal is also fed to
comparator U15, which generates a fault pulse if excessive primary current is sensed. The fault pulse is
detected by latch U32D and inverted by U33D. A primary (resonant) over current fault will light D70 and
pull the input of U33E low via D66. This will force the output of U33E high. The output of U33E is one of
the inputs to the GENERATOR READY detector and logic OR / NOR circuits described in 7.2.4. The
presence of a fault will immediately remove the generator-ready and drive enable signals, inhibiting the
inverter gate drive, thus preventing inverter damage due to the over-current condition.
The output of U21A will swing increasingly negative for increased kV demand. This kV demand voltage is
buffered and inverted by U21B, and then applied to the VCO (voltage controlled oscillator).
The VCO generates complementary output pulses that vary in frequency. The frequency of these pulses
is inversely proportional to demanded generator output power. The current sense feedback from T2
synchronizes the start of the pulses.
The output pulses from the VCO are applied to AND gates U24A and U24B. The drive enable signal from
MD-0761 is applied to the control inputs of U24, holding these inputs high if all logic conditions to allow an
X-ray exposure are satisfied. The pulses are inverted and level shifted by U26A and U26B, and then
applied to the gate-drive circuit as described on page 2.
The differential kV feedback voltage from the HT tank is brought to J 9 on the generator control board.
This is applied to the inputs of U12A and U12B, where the kV feedback scaling is precisely set by R215.
The differential feedback signals are then summed by U16B. The output of U16B supplies a kV feedback
signal to error amplifier U13B as described earlier. The kV feedback signal is also fed to the CPU via
U16A on the control board, and U15A, U15B, and A/D converter U37 on the generator CPU board where
it is used to monitor the output voltage during an exposure. The kV feedback signal is also routed to the
high kV detector and latch, which drives D69 and U33E. The output of U33E, when high, will inhibit the
inverter gate drive as described previously.
The outputs of U14A and U15A on the generator CPU board are summed and compared by the HV ON
DETECTOR CIRCUIT, consisting of U30D, Q6, etc. This produces a HV ON signal when the actual kV is
greater than approximately 75% of the demanded kV. The HV ON signal is brought to the digital interface
board, where it is made available to those digital imaging systems that require this signal to synchronize
the exposure.

7.2.5 kV control and feedback (Cont)

The generator control board contains circuits that protect against an inverter shoot-through fault. If a
shoot through fault is sensed, current sense transformers on the inverter board(s) will supply a current
pulse that is fed to the control board at J 14-1 & J 14-3, J 15-1 & J 15-3, and / or J 16-1 & J 16-3. An inverter
fault is then detected by comparator circuits on the control board, latched, and inverted (a logic low at the
outputs of the INVERTER 1, INVERTER 2, or INVERTER 3 FAULT LATCH & LOGIC INVERTER circuits
indicates a fault). An inverter fault will light D80, D81, or D82, and will pull the output of the logic OR
circuit (D87-D89, U35C) low. This will take the input of U33E low, forcing the output of U33E high, thus
inhibiting the inverter gate drive as per high primary current and high kV faults described earlier.
The fault latches that drive the input of U33E are reset by the RESET command, which originates on MD-
0761.

The drive pulses from page 1 are applied to the input of the gate-drive circuit on the control board. The
gate-drive circuit utilizes MOSFETs that form a full bridge inverter circuit. This circuit provides current
gain for the gate pulses. The high frequency gate pulses are then applied to the power MOSFETS on the
inverter board(s) via J 10 and / or J 11 and / or J 12 on the control board.
The inverter board(s) produce the high power drive for the HT transformers (Indico 100 X-ray generators
use one, two, or three inverter boards, depending on output power). The output of the inverter board(s)
drive the primaries of the HT transformers via the resonant capacitor and the fluoro / EMC / sharing
inductors.
During radiographic operation, contactor K1 shorts out the fluoro inductor. This inductor is in-circuit during
fluoroscopy, and optimizes the output tuning during fluoroscopic operation. The drive circuit for K1 is
detailed in 7.2.9.
For 65, 80, and 100 kW units, the drive to inverter board #3 is disabled by a relay on the power mode
select board during low power operation. Refer to 7.2.9 for details.

The HT tank has similar anode and cathode sections. The cathode and anode sections each have their
own high voltage transformer and high voltage multiplier board. The anode section generates the anode
voltage, 0 to 75 kV, and the cathode section generates the cathode voltage, 0 to -75 kV. The anode and
cathode sections contain voltage dividers that supply kV anode and cathode feedback voltages. The kV
feedback from the HT tank is brought to J 9 on the control board as described earlier in this section.
The HT tank is not field-repairable. Defective HT tanks must be exchanged with equivalent units.

7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (MD-0760)

When the CPU receives a prep request, D/A converter U18 or U22 on the generator CPU board will
output the filament reference voltage (1 volt =1 amp of filament current). For units with two filament
supplies, U18 outputs the small filament drive and U22 outputs the large filament drive. For units with a
single filament board, U22 supplies the filament drive. The filament drives are buffered by U14D and
U14B, and then routed to the filament supply board via J 3 and J 10 of the generator CPU board.
The filament reference voltage is applied to U1B on the filament supply board. The output of U1B is
summed with the output of current limit clamp U1A. The filament current limit is set at 5.5 or 6.5 amps via
J W1.

7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (Cont)

The filament reference voltage may be measured at the cathode of D6 on the filament board (at the
output of U1B). Attempting to measure the filament reference at the input to U1B will provide erroneous
results.
The filament reference voltage is then summed with the filament feedback voltage at the input of error
amplifier U4B. When the filament reference is greater than the feedback, the output of U4B rises, causing
the pulse width at the output of U3 to increase.
The filament supply blocks are shown in very limited detail on sheet 1 of MD-0760. Refer to sheet 3 for a
more detailed functional diagram of the filament supply board.
PWM (pulse width modulator) U3 drives MOSFETS Q6, Q7, Q12, and Q13, which form a full bridge
inverter. The MOSFETS convert the +and - 35 V supplies to high frequency AC to drive the primary of
the filament transformers at the filament switching frequency, approximately 40 kHz, via C22, the primary
of T1, J 4 / J 8 / K1, J 5 on the filament supply board, and J 4 on the tank lid board.
The output of filament current sense transformer T1 on the filament supply board is rectified by D12, D13,
D27, and D28, and fed to the RMS converter circuit consisting of U7 and associated components. The
output of the RMS converter drives U4A, which is a variable gain amplifier. The filament current feedback
is calibrated such that 1 volt =1 amp of filament current. The calibrated filament feedback voltage
(representing actual filament current) appears at the input of buffer U2B and at the summing input of error
amplifier U4B as previously described.
The output of U2B is brought to J 2-2 or J 2-4 on the filament supply board, depending on configuration.
This filament current feedback signal is then fed to the CPU as shown on sheet 2 and 3.
The filament feedback signal from the output of U2B is compared with a 1.7 volt reference by U2A. The
output of U2A will swing low if the filament current drops below approximately 1.7 amps, indicating a
filament fault. This will turn off Q1 on the filament supply board, taking J 2-10 on the filament board and
J 3-10 on the control board high. The FILAMENT FAULT signal is taken to one of the inputs on the
GENERATOR READY detector and logic OR / NOR circuits described in 7.2.4, where a fault will
inhibit inverter drive by removing the generator-ready and drive enable signals. A filament fault condition
will also turn off Q15 on the control board, turning off opto coupler U7 on the generator CPU board. The
output of U7 drives filament fault status LEDs DS13 /DS14 and the input of U24, which is monitored by
the generator CPU.
The HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT and the HIGH MA FAULT signals from MD-0759 and MD-0760
respectively are ORed together, and designated as the HV / MA FAULT signal. This is fed to the base of
Q14 on the control board, and will be high for a fault. During a HV / mA fault, Q14 will be turned off,
turning off opto coupler U8 on the generator CPU board. The output of U8 is monitored by the CPU via
U24. U8 also drives DS11 / DS12, with DS12 being lit for a HV / mA fault condition.
For generators with a single filament board, U27 on the generator CPU board outputs the large / small
filament select command. The output of U27 will be low for large focus, lighting DS24. U19 and U16
invert the large / small focus signal and drive U1 on the control board. The output of U1 will be low for
large focus, causing the large / small select line, J 3-11 on the control board, to be pulled high by the
comparator circuit consisting of U11C, Q2 etc. This de-energizes K1 on the filament board, selecting
large focus.
The logic high signal at J 3-11 drives the base of Q3 on the control board, holding Q3 off when large focus
is selected. Q3 drives opto coupler U10 on the generator CPU board, turning off U10 for large focus. The
output of U10 is monitored by the CPU via U24.


The filament drive from page 1 is applied to the secondaries of the filament transformers, which provide
high voltage isolation and drive the X-ray tube filaments via the HV cathode board and the cathode high
voltage connector as shown.
When an exposure is being made, X-ray tube current flows through series resistors on the HV anode and
cathode boards. The voltage developed across these resistors, which is proportional to the X-ray tube
current, is taken to J 9 of the control board. Transient protectors on the high voltage boards clamp the
voltage across the series resistors during high voltage arcs.
The ground side of the high voltage boards in the HT tank is connected to the mA test jacks E17 / E18
on the tank lid board. Transient protectors on the tank lid board clamp the voltage across the mA
measuring device during high voltage arcs, and prevent the voltage at E17 and E18 from rising above
approximately 15 volts if the mA test jack shorting strap is removed.
The anode mA feedback that appears at J 9-1 and J 9-2 of the generator control board is scaled
approximately 0.4 volts =100 mA of anode current, and is applied to the input of differential amplifier
U6B. The output of U6B is taken to the anode over current detector, whose output is applied to the high
anode current latch and inverter circuit. The output of U33C will be low for a high anode current condition.
This will light D72 and pull the input of U33E low via D65, forcing the output of U33E high. The output of
U33E is one of the inputs to the GENERATOR READY detector and logic OR / NOR circuits described
in 7.2.4. An over current condition will immediately remove the generator-ready and drive enable signals,
preventing possible damage due to the over-current condition.
The ANODE OVERVOLTAGE signal from MD-0759 is also fed into the anode over current detector
circuit. Therefore, an anode over voltage condition will disable the inverter gate drive as described above.
The output of U6B is also applied to the input of U9 and U30B. U30B provides a scaled mA feedback
voltage, calibrated by R216, such that 1 volt =100 mA at the output of U30B. The output of U30B is fed to
the generator CPU board as shown on sheet 3.
U9 is a high gain amplifier, and provides a scaled mA feedback voltage 1 volt =2.5 mA. R212 calibrates
the mA feedback, and R213 provides offset voltage adjustment. The output of U9 is fed to the generator
CPU board as shown on sheet 3.
The cathode mA feedback at J 9-4 and J 9-3 of the generator control board is used for cathode over-
current detection only. The cathode mA feedback is applied to the input of differential amplifier U6A. The
output of U6A is taken to the cathode over current detector, whose output is applied to the high cathode
current latch and inverter circuit. The output of U33B will be low for a high cathode current condition. This
will light D71 and pull the input of U33E low via D64, inhibiting the inverter drive as described above for
an anode over voltage fault.
The CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE signal from MD-0759 is also fed into the cathode over current detector
circuit. Therefore, a cathode over voltage condition will disable the inverter gate drive as described
above.
The high anode and high cathode current fault latches are reset by the RESET command, which
originates on MD-0761.
The large and small filament current feedback signals from page 1 are brought to J 3 on the control board,
and then routed to J 2 and J 1 on the control board. From there, these signals are taken to the generator
CPU board as shown on sheet 3.


The large and small filament current feedback signals from page 2 are fed to differential amplifiers U30A
and U30B respectively on the generator CPU board. The CPU monitors the outputs of U30A and U30B
via A/D converter U37.
The Rad mA feedback voltage (1 volt =100 mA) is applied to U15C on the generator CPU board, and the
fluoro mA feedback signal (1 volt =2.5 mA) is applied to U23A. The outputs of U15C and U23A are fed to
A/D converter U37, which supplies the mA feedback values to the CPU. The CPU uses the Rad and
fluoro mA feedback information to regulate the X-ray tube mA and to perform mA monitoring functions
during exposures.
The figure on the right of sheet 3 is an expanded functional schematic of the Indico 100 filament supplies,
showing more detail than the figures on page 1.

7.2.7 Low speed starter (MD-0764)

The 120 / 240 VAC and the 52 / 73 / 94 VAC supplies originate on MD-0788. The boost voltage (120 or
240 VAC) and the run-voltage (52, 73, or 94 VAC) is supplied by the power supply auxiliary transformer
T1. These voltages must be properly selected via taps on T1 as described in chapter 2 of the service
manual.
When the CPU receives a prep request, the ENABLE command is generated as described in 7.2.4. This
command originates on the control board, and is brought to the cathode of D17 on the auxiliary board.
This is ORed with the TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH & THERMOSTAT OPEN and 12 VDC / SOFT
START FAULT signal in the base circuit of Q15. If all three of these lines are high, i.e. if the ENABLE
command is present and no tube 1 / tube 2 mismatch & thermostat open or 12 VDC / soft start faults
exist, the base of Q15 will be pulled high, turning on Q15. This will energize K1 on the low speed starter
board. K1 is a protection relay that is closed during normal operation, and open-circuits the stator drive if
any of the above faults are present.
Also when a prep request is made, the PREP command will be applied to the boost and run logic circuit
on the auxiliary board. This will pull J 4-11 on the control board low, energizing U2 on the low speed
starter board, initiating the boost cycle. The boost duration is 1.5 seconds or 2.5 seconds, and is
determined by the setting of J W1 on the auxiliary board.
At the completion of the boost cycle, the boost and run logic circuit will pull J 4-11 high, turning U2 on the
low speed starter off. Approximately 100 milliseconds after U2 turns off, J 4-12 will be pulled low, turning
on U1 on the low speed starter board, initiating the rotor-run cycle.
Q2 and Q1 are triacs that are triggered on the zero crossing points of the AC waveform when U2 or U1 is
energized. These act as low resistance switches when triggered, with Q2 switching the stator boost
voltage, and Q1 switching the stator run-voltage. The output of the triacs is ORed together; therefore
their common output will carry the boost voltage or run-voltage, depending on which triac is energized.
The COMMON line (AC return), connects to the common terminal on the stator terminal blocks via K1.
The boost / run voltages that are controlled by Q2 and Q1 are brought to protection relay K1, and then
applied to the main winding via K3 and K4, and to the shift winding via K2, shift capacitor C3, and K4.
K4 switches the main and shift currents to tube 1 or tube 2. The TUBE SELECT signal that drives K4 is
described in 7.2.2. K3 and K2 are current sense relays that are energized when the stator current is
above preset limits. With K3 and K2 closed, Q3 on the auxiliary board is supplied with base current. This
will turn on Q3, turning on Q18 on the control board.

7.2.7 Low speed starter (Cont)

The STATOR FAULT line (J 6-10) on the control board will be low if there is no stator fault, and high for a
fault. This is one of the inputs to the GENERATOR READY detector and logic OR / NOR circuits
described in 7.2.4. A stator fault condition will immediately remove the generator-ready and drive enable
signals, inhibiting kV output. When the CPU detects a stator fault condition (via the circuits depicted on
sheet 2), the kV enable and prep signals are immediately removed, opening relay K1 on the low speed
starter board.

When Q18 on the control board is turned on as described on sheet 1, indicating no stator fault, U5 on the
generator CPU board will be turned on. The CPU monitors the output of U5 via U24, and DS20 / DS21
indicate the stator fault status (DS20 indicates no stator fault, and DS21 indicates a stator fault).

7.2.8 Dual speed starter (MD-0765)

The CPU will determine whether the pending exposure should be made at low speed or high-speed
operation. Based on this determination, the CPU will output the high speed / low speed command via U27
on the generator CPU board. The output of U27 drives DS8 and DS7 on the generator CPU board, and
energizes U12 on the dual speed starter board via U19 and U16. The dual speed starter CPU monitors
the output of U12, and sets low or high-speed operation based on the state of U12.
The CONTACTOR CLOSED signal that originates on the auxiliary board and closes the main contactor
K5, is also brought to the emitter of Q7 on the control board via R94. This signal is low when the
contactor is closed, turning on U13 on the dual speed starter board if the prep command is present.
The PREP COMMAND is brought to the cathode of D47 on the control board. This is low when prep is
not requested, turning on Q7. With Q7 on, the cathode of U13 on the dual speed starter will be held high,
keeping U13 off. During prep, the prep command will be high. This turns off Q7, allowing U13 to turn on.
The dual speed starter CPU monitors the output of U13, and starts the boost cycle when the output of this
opto coupler is low.
The TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 select signal from MD-0788 is applied to J 4-16 of the control board. This will be
low when tube 2 has been selected, energizing U14 on the dual speed starter board. The dual speed
starter CPU monitors the output of U14, and selects tube 1 or tube 2 based on the state of U14. K1 on
the dual speed starter board will close to select tube 1, and K2 will close to select tube 2, all at the start of
prep. K4 is energized only when K1 or K2 is energized, thus isolating the high voltage from the stator
terminals at all times except during normal operation of the dual speed starter.
The dual speed starter contains an inverter (Q1 to Q4) that produces the required stator current at 50, 60,
150, or 180 Hz by precisely switching the 560 / 650 volt DC bus. The dual speed starter CPU controls the
switching of the inverter via the driver circuit consisting of U1-U10 and T1-T4, etc. The setting of DIP
switches SW1 and SW2 determines all stator drive parameters (boost voltage and boost time, run
voltage, brake voltage and brake time, etc).
The modulated output from the inverter is applied to the common stator terminal via one leg of the
inverter. The shift and main currents are taken from the other leg of the inverter via K5 and K6. K1-A and
K2-A switch the main current, and K1-A and K1-B switch the shift current.
K3 is open for high-speed operation. Therefore, only the high-speed phase shift capacitor will be in the
circuit. K3 will close for low-speed operation, connecting the low-speed phase shift capacitor in parallel
with the high-speed phase shift capacitor.

7.2.8 Dual speed starter (Cont)

The contacts of current sense relays K5 and K6 will be closed when the stator current is above preset
limits. With K5 and K6 closed, Q5 on the dual speed starter board is supplied with base current. This will
turn on Q5, whose output is monitored by the dual speed starter CPU. If a stator fault is detected, the
CPU will output a high at J 1-10 on the dual speed starter board. This signal is fed to the GENERATOR
READY detector and logic OR / NOR circuits described in 7.2.4. A fault condition will immediately
remove the generator-ready and drive enable signals, inhibiting kV output. Also, the dual speed starter
CPU will open K1 or K2 and K4 on the dual speed starter board, removing the stator drive.
The stator fault signal is also applied to the base of Q18 on the control board. The base of Q18 will be low
if there is no stator fault, turning on Q18. This will turn on U5 on the generator CPU board. The generator
CPU monitors the output of U5 via U24, and DS20 / DS21 indicate the stator fault status.

7.2.9 Rad / fluoro and power mode select (MD-0786)

The circuits shown on MD-0786 control the Rad / fluoro contactor on the resonant board, and the relay on
the power mode select board, both described in 7.2.5.
The Rad / fluoro select signal from J 1-5 of MD-0788 is applied to the base of Q5 on the auxiliary board
via R79. This is high for Rad / pulsed fluoro mode, and low for continuous fluoro mode. When in Rad /
pulsed fluoro mode, Q5 will be turned on, lighting D36 and energizing K1 on the resonant board. K1
shorts out the fluoro inductor as described in 7.2.5. In continuous fluoro mode, Q5 is off, de-energizing
K1.
Inverter #3 on 65, 80, and 100 kW generators is disabled during low power operation (pulsed fluoro,
continuous fluoro, or low power Rad exposures). This is accomplished as described below.
When in continuous fluoro mode, and the collector of Q5 is high, the base of Q4 will be pulled high via
D38. This will turn on Q4, energizing K1 on the power mode select board. This removes gate drive from
inverter #3.
The low / high power select signal from J 1-3 of MD-0788 is applied to the base of Q4 on the auxiliary
board via D44. This is low for high power Rad exposures, and high for pulsed fluoro / low power Rad
operation. Q4 will be turned on during pulsed fluoro / low power operation, energizing K1 on the power
mode select board, removing gate drive from inverter #3.

7.2.10 Interlocks & tube 1 / tube 2 tellback (MD-0787)

For R&F generators, J W4 on the auxiliary board is jumpered in the ON position, and a thermal switch is
mounted on the inverter heat sink. This switch will open if an inverter over temperature is detected. This
pulls J 2-4 on the auxiliary board high, turning on Q10 and lighting D42. With J 2-10 pulled high, Q8 is
turned on via D26 and R7. The output of Q8, low for a fault, holds the base of Q15 on the auxiliary board
low as described in 7.2.7. The output of Q8 is also ORed with the kV ENABLE signal on MD-0761,
inhibiting the prep and X-ray functions when the output of Q8 is low.
The tube 1 / tube 2 tellback portion of MD-0787 ensures that the actual tube selection matches the
requested tube selection. Logic circuits compare the tube 1 / tube 2 request signal to the feedback from a
contact closure in the HT tank.
The TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT command from MD-0788 is low when tube 2 is selected, and high for
tube 1. This is applied to one input of the tube 1 / tube 2 tellback logic circuit. The output of U7 is
connected to the other input of this logic circuit.

7.2.10 Interlocks & tube 1 / tube 2 tellback (Cont)

When the tank is in the tube 1 position, U7 and U8 on the auxiliary board are off, and the collector of U7
will be high. In the tube 2 position, U7 and U8 are turned on, and the collector of U7 will be low. If a
mismatch is detected, the base of Q8 is pulled high, turning Q8 on. With Q8 turned on, Q15 on the
auxiliary board will be turned off, and the prep command will be inhibited as described above.
When U8 on the auxiliary board is on (tube 2 position), U3 on the generator CPU board will be turned on.
The output of U3 and the TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT signal are connected to U35 on the generator CPU
board. U35 decodes the binary inputs, and lights DS5 or DS6 as appropriate.

7.2.11 AEC (MD-0757)

This shows the circuits on the generator interface board that connect to the A
2
EC
2
detector, and the
circuits between the generator CPU and the AEC board. Eight lines supply the AEC chamber select
signals, the field select signals, and the start signal to the AEC board via U25 / U23 and driver U33 on the
generator interface board. The AEC start signal is also connected to the base of Q7 on the generator
interface board, where it turns Q7 on when the start signal is present, taking J 14-3 high.
The AEC ramp (PT RAMP) from the AEC board is buffered by U23C on the generator CPU board, and
fed to A/D converter U37 such that it can be monitored by the CPU.
D/A converter U18 on the generator CPU board generates the AEC reference voltage. This is buffered by
U14C, and fed to the AEC board via J 10-10 on the generator interface board. The magnitude of the AEC
reference voltage is determined by the CPU, and will be a value between 0 and 10 volts. The AEC
reference is also taken to the A
2
EC
2
detector via J 14-1.
The AEC board generates the PT stop signal when the magnitude of the AEC ramp is equal to the AEC
reference voltage. This signal will switch low when the exposure is to be terminated. An active PT stop
signal will pull the base of Q5 low, turning Q5 off, thus turning Q6 on. The output of Q6 is connected to
one of the interrupt inputs on the CPU via U45C on the generator CPU board, where it will terminate the
AEC exposure immediately when the interrupt is received.

The A
2
EC
2
system, in conjunction with GenWare, establishes AEC calibration curves by using a pair of
photo diode detectors to measure the light output from the cassette screens. When A
2
EC
2
calibration is
about to be performed, and the exposure starts, the opto coupler that is connected to J 2-3 / J 2-4 on the
A
2
EC
2
detector circuit is energized. This releases the short on the integrating capacitor, which is part of
the integrator circuit, via the analog switch. The integrator will then generate a ramp whose slope is
proportional to the light sensed by the photo diode detectors.
The integrator output is amplified and compared to the AEC reference voltage. The output of the
comparator circuit drives U46 on the generator interface board when S1 is closed. The output of U46 will
be low when the magnitude of the ramp at the comparator input is equal to the AEC reference voltage.
This will terminate the exposure by generating an interrupt at the CPU as described for the PT stop signal
on the previous page.
The A
2
EC
2
detector assembly includes on-board +/-8 VDC regulators.

7.2.11 AEC (Cont)

This page shows the functional schematic of the AEC board used with solid-state AEC chambers. The
signal from the AEC chamber is applied between the common anode and the cathode inputs of J 1/J 11,
J 2/J 12, J 3/J 13, and / or J 4/J 14. The AEC board will either be fitted with 5 pin in-line connectors, or
circular style connectors, depending on the application. U11A, U11B, U1A, and U1B are extremely high
gain preamplifiers that convert the current output from the AEC diodes (several hundred pico amps,
typically) to a useable voltage.
The output of each preamplifier is connected to the AEC gain adjustment potentiometers, R1 to R4, used
for AEC calibration. The AEC signal is then taken to the input of analog switches U6A to U6D.
The chamber-select signals exit on the generator interface board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber may
be active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The
chamber-select signals are inverted by U2A to U2D; and then connected to the control inputs of analog
switches U6A to U6D. The analog switch corresponding to the selected AEC input channel will be closed
when that channel is selected, thus connecting the preamplifier for the active channel to gain stage U9B.
The field select signals from the generator interface board are also active-low. An active field select signal
will pull the base of Q1, Q2, or Q3 low. This will turn on that transistor, supplying +12 V at the field select
lines connected to D30, D18, or D19. More than one field may be active at one time.
The field select signals are connected to the control inputs of analog switches at the inputs of U11A,
U11B, U1A, and U1B. This will switch the selected combination of AEC inputs (L, M, R) to the summing
node of each preamplifier. The voltage output of the preamplifiers will be proportional to the number of
fields selected, i.e. the preamplifier output when 3 fields are selected will be 3 times that with a single field
selected.
The field select signals are also connected to three analog switches in the feedback loop of U9B. One of
these switches will be closed for each AEC field that is selected. With one field selected, the gain of this
stage will be maximum; with three fields selected the gain of this stage will be divided by three. The
variable gain of U9B, which depends on the number of fields selected, compensates for the variable
voltage output of the preamplifiers as described in the previous paragraph, thus keeping the signal output
from U9B constant relative to the number of fields that are selected. The output of U9B drives the input of
difference amplifier U10B, which subtracts the sample and hold voltage from the input voltage as
described in the next paragraph.
The start signal also exits from the generator interface board. This signal, when active, will cause DS5 on
the AEC board to light. The start signal is buffered and inverted by U2F and U2E, and will be logic low at
the output of U2E when the start signal is active. This opens the analog switch that is part of the sample
and hold circuit at the input of U10B, and also opens analog switch U12 during an AEC exposure. These
analog switches are closed at all other times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise
at the output of U9B during standby operation, and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC
exposure. This ensures that the output of U10B is proportional to the AEC chamber output current only,
and is not influenced by noise.
The output of 10B drives integrating amplifier U10A. Analog switch U12 opens when an AEC exposure
starts, allowing C37 to start integrating the AEC voltage. This will produce a ramp whose slope is
proportional to the input voltage at U10A.
The AEC ramp is taken to the generator interface board where it is processed as described earlier in this
section, and also fed to comparator U13 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC reference
voltage. The output of U13 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp equals
the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator interface board.

7.2.11 AEC (Cont)

This is the functional schematic of the AEC board used with ionization type AEC chambers. The AEC
chambers are connected to J 1/J 11, J 2/J 12, J 3/J 13, and / or J 4/J 14. The AEC board will either be fitted
with 12 pin in-line connectors, or 9 pin D connectors, depending on the application. The AEC signal from
the AEC chamber(s) is routed to the input of analog switches S1A to S1D on the AEC board. These
analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signals.
The chamber-select signals exit on the generator interface board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber may
be active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The
chamber-select signals are inverted by U3B, U3C, U3D, and U3F; and connected to the control inputs of
the analog switches described in the previous paragraph. The analog switch corresponding to the
selected AEC input channel will be closed when that channel is selected, thus connecting the AEC signal
to preamplifier U1A, which provides voltage gain. The input of U1A will be configured such that U1A is a
non-inverting amplifier for use with AEC chambers that have a positive going output, and as an inverting
amplifier for use with chambers with a negative voltage output.
The start signal also exits from the generator interface board. This signal, when active, will cause DS5 on
the AEC board to be lit. The start signal is buffered and inverted by U3E and U3A, and will be logic low at
the output of U3A when the start signal is active. This opens the analog switch that is part of the sample
and hold circuit at the input of U2A during an AEC exposure. This analog switch is closed at all other
times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U1A during standby
operation, and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the
output of U2A is proportional to the AEC chamber output voltage only, and is not influenced by noise.
The output of U2A connects to the common inputs of analog switches S2A to S2D. These analog
switches are controlled by the chamber-select signal, and the switch corresponding to the active channel
will be closed. This connects the output of U2A to the AEC gain adjustment potentiometer R1 to R4
corresponding to the active channel. The AEC signal, which will be either a ramp or a DC voltage
depending on AEC chamber type, is now fed to the input of U2B. This will be factory configured as an
integrating amplifier by connecting C4 into the circuit for use with AEC chambers that output a DC output
voltage, or U2B will be configured as a linear amplifier by connecting R32 into the circuit for use with AEC
chambers that provide a ramp voltage. The start signal also connects to analog switch S4. This switch
opens when an AEC exposure starts, allowing U2B to start integrating or amplifying the AEC signal.
The output of U2B will be a positive going ramp regardless of the AEC chamber type in use. This ramp
voltage is processed by U4A and U4B, and also fed to the short AEC exposure time compensation circuit
consisting of R11 to R14, S3A to S3D, R53 and C11. Analog switches S3A to S3D are controlled by the
chamber-select signal. The switch corresponding to the active channel will be closed, connecting the
phase-lead network C11 / R53 to the wiper of the AEC short-time adjustment potentiometer. This circuit is
disabled when the wipers of R11 to R14 are at the ground end of the potentiometers, and maximum
short-time compensation is provided when the wipers are set to the end of the potentiometers connected
to U2B.
The AEC ramp from U4B is taken to the generator interface board where it is processed as described
earlier in this section, and also fed to comparator U6 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC
reference voltage. The output of U6 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp
equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator interface board.
The START, and LEFT, MIDDLE, and RIGHT field select signals are brought to the AEC chambers via
J 1/J 11, J 2/J 12, J 3/J 13, and J 4/J 14. The AEC board will be factory configured to directly output the active
low signal from the generator interface board to the AEC chamber if required, or to output +12 V or +24 V
if the chamber requires active high signals. For AEC chambers that require active high outputs, the start,
left, middle, or right field select signal is taken from the collector of Q1 to Q4, respectively. The active low
signals from the generator control board turn on Q1 to Q4, outputting either +12 V or +24V (depending on
factory configuration) at the collector when active.

7.2.11 AEC (Cont)

J umpers J W1 to J W8 swap the left and right fields on J 11 to J 14. J umpering pins 2-3 of the field selector
jumpers (J W7 / J W8 for channel 1, J W5 / J W6 for channel 2, J W3 / J W4 for channel 3, J W1 / J W2 for
channel 4) connects the right field select signal to pin 6 and the left field select signal to pin 2. J umpering
pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the right field select signal to pin 2 and the left field select
signal to pin 6.

The AEC board also contains a DC to DC converter that produces +45 V, +or - 300 V, and +500 VDC.
The converter circuit consists of U7, T1, output voltage adjustment potentiometer R79, and associated
components. The +45 V output is hard wired to all of the AEC chamber connectors, and +or - 300 V is
permanently connected to J 1 to J 4. Additionally, the AEC board will be factory configured to supply either
+or - 300 V or +500 V to J 11 to J 13, and to pin 1 on J 1 to J 4 (in addition to the +or - 300 V fixed output
at pin 2).

Refer to schematics 734628 and 728401 for the universal AEC board. Schematic 728401 shows the DC
to DC converter (U3 and associated components) that produces +50, +300 and +500 VDC for use with
ion chambers, and up to -1000 VDC for photo multiplier tubes. R10 adjusts the high voltage output when
ABS operation is selected. R24 adjusts the high voltage output when AEC channel 1, 2, or 3 is selected.
R19 adjusts the high voltage output when AEC channel 4 is selected. Refer to chapter 3D, the section
Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation for further details.
The AEC chambers are connected to J 1 to J 4, and the high voltage for the PMT is taken from J 7 on the
AEC interface board. J 6 interconnects the signals between the AEC board and connectors J 1 to J 4 on
the AEC interface board.
Schematic 734628, sheet 1, shows the amplifier and control portion of the AEC circuits. These boards are
factory configured via jumpers J W2, J W3, and J W5-74 such that the AEC board is compatible with the
AEC chamber types that were specified at the time of the generator order. The individual AEC channels
are selected under software control, with the switching being done via analog switches on the AEC board.
R1 to R4 are the AEC gain potentiometers, and R91 to R94 are used for short time compensation.
Schematic 734628, sheet 2, shows the switching circuits for the start and field select signals. This also
shows the analog switches that switch the inputs from solid-state AEC chambers.
Schematic 734628, sheets 3 to 5 show the required jumper positions and circuit modifications needed for
compatibility with various AEC chambers. It is not recommended that the universal AEC board be field
reconfigured.

7.2.12 ABS (MD-0758)

The composite video signal is fed into J 8 on the generator interface board, and proportional DC is applied
to J 7. The jumpers (designated J W__) select the input source, input polarity, gain, etc. Refer to chapter
3E for the required positions for these jumpers.
Composite video applied to J 8 is amplified by U17D and applied to gain stages U17A and U17B.
Generators with the conventional fluoro option are fitted with analog gain potentiometer R48, and units
with the pulsed fluoro option use digital pot U49.
The processed ABS signal exits the generator interface board at J 11-3, and is buffered by U23D on the
generator CPU board. The ABS signal is then fed to the sample and hold circuit, which smoothes out the
ABS feedback signal during pulsed fluoro operation. The CPU monitors the output of the sample and hold
circuit via A/D converter U37, and uses this information to maintain constant image brightness by
regulating the fluoro kV and / or mA.

7.2.12 ABS (Cont)

The output of the PMT at J 7-12 of the generator interface board is split by R118 and fed to J 7-10 such
that the PMT output is also available for AEC control. This is applicable if a PMT is to be used for AEC
control on AEC channel 4. Refer to chapter 3D, the section AEC USING A PMT for further details.

7.2.13 Remote fluoro control (MD-0766)

The remote fluoro control communicates with the generator via an RS-232 protocol. Serial
communication is handled by U20 and U11 on the generator CPU board, and U7 on the remote fluoro
control board. DS15 on the generator CPU board will flash to indicate that the generator is sending data
to the remote fluoro control, and DS19 will flash to indicate that the remote fluoro control is sending data
back to the generator.
The micro controller on the remote fluoro control board handles all remote fluoro functions. It decodes
serial data from the generator and decodes inputs from the remote fluoro keyboard assembly. The micro
controller drives the speaker on the remote fluoro control board, transmits data to the data latches on the
remote fluoro display board in order to drive the desired LEDs, and sends data to the generator in order
to set up the requested fluoro parameters.

7.2.14 Digital interface (MD-0767)

This page shows the interface circuits between the generator CPU and the digital I/O board. Included are
eight data and address lines, and four control lines for the data and address bus.
The HV ON signal that originates on the generator CPU board is described in 7.2.5, and is routed to the
digital I/O board as shown.
The EXPOSURE ENABLE command is generated by some imaging systems, and is ORed with the
output of U22 on the generator interface board as shown in MD-0761. When this line is pulled low, U46
on the generator CPU board is energized, initiating an X-ray exposure as described in 7.2.4.
Some imaging systems generate a DIGITAL IMAGING ABS signal. This is fed into the input of U17B
on the generator interface board when J W21 is in the appropriate position to select that ABS signal
source. Refer to 7.2.12 for details.
A sync signal that synchronizes the start of exposures is fed to the CPU via U51, U45A / U45B, and U28
on the generator CPU board. Depending on the position of J W22 on the generator interface board, the
sync signal will be either 50 / 60 Hz line frequency pulses from the zero crossing circuit U40 on MD-0788,
or these may be sync pulses supplied by the digital imaging system. DS40 on the generator CPU board
will light when sync pulses are present.
This document does not detail the imaging system pin-outs. Refer to the imaging system documentation
and the appropriate CPI digital imaging supplement for this information.

This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 733752. The address decoder circuits
decode the address and data bus. U4 latches the output data, and driver U6 provides the required current
gain to drive the output devices. The emitter of U10 is taken low when the generator is ready to make an
exposure, and the imaging system will request an exposure by taking the cathode of U10 low. This
results in the collector of U10 being pulled low when the generator is ready and the imaging system
requests an exposure. The output of U10 is the EXPOSURE ENABLE command, described on sheet 1.
DS4 and DS6 to DS10 indicate the status of the outputs.

7.2.14 Digital interface (Cont)

Multiplexer U7 selects one of two ABS feedback signals, these are designated as the DIGITAL
IMAGING ABS signal, and fed back to the generator interface board as shown on sheet 1.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U11 to U13.
When active, these opto couplers will light DS3 to DS1 respectively, and pull the inputs of U8 low. The
output of U8 is read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.
The HV ON signal is applied directly to U6, which drives DS4 (EXON) and the corresponding input on the
imaging system.
U14 and U16 provide isolation for the corresponding outputs on the digital I/O board.
SW1 must be set as defined in the digital imaging supplement. This configures the software specifically to
be compatible with the imaging system in use.

This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 733947 and 735921. The address decoder
circuits decode the address and data bus. U13 and U14 latch the output data, and drivers U15 and U16
provide the required current gain to drive the output devices. Q2 and Q3 provide level translation for
those two outputs (these source +24 VDC when active).
The HV ON signal is applied to Q1 via D3. This takes the collector of Q1 low when the high voltage is on.
Monostable timer U17 holds Q1 on for approximately 13 milliseconds after the exposure has stopped.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U3 to U8.
When active, these opto couplers will pull the inputs of U12 low. The output of U12 is read by the
generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.

gain to drive U7, U10, and U16. U7 and U10 pull the associated inputs on the imaging system low when
active.
The emitter of U14 is taken low when the generator is ready to make an exposure, and the imaging
system will request an exposure by taking the anode of U14 high. This results in the collector of U14
being pulled low when the generator is ready and the imaging system requests an exposure, turning on
U16. The output of U16 is the EXPOSURE ENABLE command, described on sheet 1. The output of U15,
which will also be low when an exposure is requested, is monitored by generator CPU via U8 and the
address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U11 and
U13. When active, these opto couplers will pull the corresponding inputs of U8 low. The output of U8 is
read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.
This I/O board assembly includes an on-board +5 VDC regulator, U12, that connects to J 2-21 and to the
anode of U11.

7.2.14 Digital interface (Cont)

gain to drive U7, U10, and U13 to U15. These opto couplers pull the associated inputs on the imaging
system low when active. DS3, DS4, and / or DS7 to DS9 light to indicate the active outputs.
The HV ON signal is NANDed with an output from U4 at the input of U3C. With both inputs to U3C high,
the output of U3D will be high. This energizes U15 via driver U6 and DS9 / R9.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U11 and
U12. When these inputs are active, DS5 and / or DS6 will light, and the corresponding inputs of U8 will be
low. The output of U8 is read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O
board.

This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 736894. CPLD U1 decodes the address
and data bus, and latches the output data. The output data is applied to driver U3, U11, and U17. U3 and
U11 provide the required current gain to drive the corresponding inputs on the imaging system. The
associated LEDs will light to indicate which outputs are active. U17 drives the base of Q1, which provides
level translation for that output (sources +24 VDC when active). U17 also energizes K1, and pulls the
emitters of U5, U7, U14, and U16 low when the generator is ready to make an exposure.
Signals from the table or imaging system will request an exposure by taking the anode of U4, U6, U13, or
U15 high. This will energize opto couplers U4 / U5, U6 / U7, U13 / U14, or U15 / U16 respectively. The
outputs of U5, U7, U14, and U16 are ORed together, and provide the EXPOSURE ENABLE command,
described on sheet 1.
The outputs of U4, U6, U13, U15, and U8 are monitored by the generator CPU via U1.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U2, U9,
U10, and U12. The outputs of these drivers are monitored by the generator CPU via U1. The LED in
series with each input will light to indicate the status of that input.
The DIGITAL IMAGING ABS signal is taken directly from the imaging system to J 1-20.

7.2.15 DAP (MD-0828)

The DAP circuit consists of micro-controller U1, RS-232 driver U2, and associated components on the
DAP interconnect board. Micro-controller U1 operates under control of the CPU on the generator CPU
board via U31 and U38, and controls all DAP functions (switches the +15 V supply via Q1, Q2, Q3 / Q4,
Q5 / Q6, Q7 / Q8, and Q9 / Q10 as required to control and test the DAP devices. The micro-controller
also counts the DAP pulses via U5 for DAP chamber #1, and U6 for DAP chamber #2).
DS2 and DS3 on the DAP interconnect board indicate that the DAP chambers are sending pulses back to
the micro-controller, and DS29 and DS32 on the generator CPU board indicate that the CPU is
transmitting and receiving data respectively.
+24 VDC is supplied to the DAP interconnect board from the room interface board. Regulators on the
DAP interconnect board regulate this to +15 V and +5 V.

7.2.16 Serial communications (MD-0829)

The console board shown on sheet 1 is used on the 31 X 42 cm console. The console for the other Indico
100 console types is shown on sheet 2.
When the generator is switched on and the start-up diagnostics are completed, the console CPU will
attempt to communicate with the generator CPU. The console will send data to the generator, and then
wait for a response from the generator. If the console receives a response, communication may continue.
If the console CPU does not receive a response from the generator CPU, a communication error
message will be presented.
When the console is sending data to the generator, DS41 on the console board and DS3 on the
generator CPU board will flash. DS1 on the generator CPU board and DS42 on the console board will
flash to indicate that the generator CPU board is sending data to the console.
The console communicates with the generator via RS-232 drivers U23 (console board) and U12
(generator CPU board).
U27 on the console board is an RS-232 driver for the serial port, J 2. DS44 and DS43 will flash to indicate
that data is being sent to, and received from the serial port.
The generator CPU board may include optional communications ports J 1 and J 2. These are driven via
U31 and U42 / U38. Communication to and from these ports is indicated by DS29, DS32, DS43, and
DS44.
DS40 on the console board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational.

Sheet 2 shows the console board for the 23 X 56 cm console, and for the Rad only console. Also shown
are optional communications ports on the generator CPU board.
The generator CPU board may include optional communications ports J 15 and J 16. These are driven via
U50. Communication to and from these ports is indicated by DS45 to DS48.
DS16 on the generator CPU board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational.

For the 23 X 56 cm console:
When the console is sending data to the generator, D4 on the console board will flash. D3 on the console
board will flash to indicate that the generator CPU board is sending data to the console.
The console communicates with the generator via RS-232 driver U6, or RS-422 drivers U5 / U9 for
special applications.
U20 on the console board is an RS-232 driver for the serial port, J 2. D2 and D1 will flash to indicate that
data is being sent to, and received from the serial port.
D6 on the console board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational.

7.2.16 Serial communications (Cont)

For the Rad-only console:
When the console is sending data to the generator, DS2 on the console board will flash. DS3 on the
console board will flash to indicate that the generator CPU board is sending data to the console.
The console communicates with the generator via RS-232 driver U8.
U11 on the console board is an RS-232 driver for the serial port, J 4. DS4 and DS5 will flash to indicate
that data is being sent to, and received from the serial port.
DS1 on the console board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational.

Sheet 3 does not apply to Indico 100.


CPI Canada Inc Spares 8

Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-07 Rev. V Page 8-1
CHAPTER 8

SPARES
CONTENTS:

Section Title
8.1.0 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR..................................................................................................8-2

8.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter contains the list of recommended spare parts for the various models of Indico 100 generators.
8 Spares CPI Canada Inc

Page 8-2 Rev. V Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-07
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER NOTE SUGGESTED QTY
Generator CPU board See note 1b See note
Generator interface board See note 1c See note
Room interface board 733184-00 2 1
Power supply control board 732816-03 1a 1
Filament board See note 3 See note
Auxiliary board 732221-02 4 1
Inverter board See note 5 See note
Power input board See note 6 1
Resonant Board See note 7 1
AEC board See note 8 1
Console CPU board See note 1b See note
Console display board See note 9 1
Display assy, LCD See note 19 1
Remote fluoro display board 729053-00 10 See note
Remote fluoro control board 729038-00 10 See note
Low speed starter board See note 11 See note
Digital I/O board See note 17 See note
DAP interface board 735992-00 22 See note
Dual speed starter board 728877-03 12 See note
Dual speed starter subassembly See note 12 See note
Hand switch assembly See note 20 See note
Battery, lithium 3.0V 7412290100 2 2
Capacitor, DC bus 470 uF 450 VDC 4150394100 13 6
Capacitor, DC bus 9000 uF 400 VDC 4155001400 14a 4
Contactor, line SC2715 2 1
Diode, mains rectifier 160MT120K 6623071100 13 1
Diode, mains rectifier DD89N12K,
DD90N12L, IRKD91-12

6623507000

14a

1
Fuse, A70QS10-14F 6739951800 12 7
Fuse, FNM-3 6711907400 21 See note
Fuse, FNQ-2 5550005300 21 See note
Fuse, FNQ-10 6711905500 13 5
Fuse, GDC-1.6 5550033300 2 5
Fuse, GDC-2 5550032600 2 5
Fuse, GDC-2.5 5550034400 2 5
Fuse, GDC-5 5550035600 2 5
Fuse, MDA-2 6713000400 2 5
Fuse, MDA-5 6713000100 11 5
Fuse, MDA-7 6713000500 2 5
Fuse, MDA-10 6713000200 14a 5
Fuse, MDA-12 6713746500 2 5
Fuse, MDL-1 1/2 6713541500 14b 5

8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR (Cont)
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER NOTE SUGGESTED QTY
Fuse, MDL-4 6713544000 2 5
Fuse, NLN-100 6711906500 14a 5
Fuse, OTS-60 SC3434 13 5
Relay, DPST, 12V 7213011800 2 2
Connector, 4 pin 5618931800 12 1
Fan, axial 2084022900 18 1
Transformer, aux power supply 732417-00 2 1
Transformer, room I/F 735496-01 2 1
HT tank assembly (complete) See note 15 See note

NOTE:

1a. The part number shown is the suggested replacement for the original power supply control board. The
spares board is full featured and will replace the original board in your generator regardless of
configuration. This is intended to eliminate the need to stock multiple configurations of this board.
1b. Two versions of generator CPU boards and four versions of console CPU boards are used in Indico 100
generators. Please confirm the original part number(s) of these boards in your generator before ordering
spares. If your original generator CPU board is part number 732174-XX (where XX is a number from 00
to 08), order part number 732174-12. In this case, upgraded firmware will be required along with the
new CPU board. Please consult the factory for details.
If the original generator CPU board is part number 732174-12, it will be replaced with the same
part number. In this case, a firmware upgrade is not required.
If your original generator CPU board is part number 734573-00, order part number 734573-02. In this
case, upgraded firmware will be required along with the new CPU board. Please consult the factory for
details.
If the original generator CPU board is part number 734573-02, it will be replaced with the same
part number. In this case, a firmware upgrade is not required.
The generator CPU board and the console CPU board must be matched per the table below:
APPLICATION GENERATOR CPU BOARD CONSOLE CPU BOARD
23 X 56 cm console If the original board is 732174-
XX, order part number 732174-12
for spares usage. See note 1b.
<MUST USE WITH>
732218-00
<MUST USE WITH>
733903-00
<MUST USE WITH>
735852-00
Rad-only console If the original board is 734573-
<MUST USE WITH>
736805-00


NOTE (Cont):
1c. Two different generator interface boards are used in Indico 100 generators. For rad and R&F
generators, use part number 732177-06, for pulsed fluoro generators use part number 732177-08.
Spares should be stocked accordingly.
2. This part is common to all models of Indico 100 generators.
3. Three different filament boards are used in Indico 100 generators. RAD only generators use ONE
filament board, part number 731407-00. R&F generators use TWO filament boards, part number
731407-01 (large focus) and part number 731407-02 (small focus). Spares should be stocked
accordingly.
4. The part number shown is the suggested replacement for the original auxiliary board. The spares board
is jumper configurable in the field and as such will replace the original auxiliary board. This is intended
to eliminate the need to stock multiple configurations of this board.
5. Three different inverter board part numbers are used in Indico 100 generators. For 230 VAC 1 phase
and 480 VAC 3 phase generators use part number 732813-00, for 400 VAC 3 phase 30 / 50 / 80 kW
generators use part number 732813-04, for 230 VAC 1 phase 37.5 kW and for 400 VAC 3 phase 37.5 /
65 kW generators use part number 732813-05 (see note 17 for the definition of mains input voltage). 30
and 37.5 kW generators require one inverter board, 50 and 65 kW generators require two inverter
boards, and 80 kW generators require three inverter boards. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
6. Two part numbers of power input boards are used for spares. For 1 phase 230 VAC generators use part
number 733798-01, for 3 phase 400 or 480 VAC generators use part number 732161-01.
7. Five different resonant boards are used in Indico 100 generators. Refer to the table below for the correct
part number for your generator.
O/P POWER (kW) & MAINS VOLTS RESONANT BOARD
RAD POWER SUPPLIES
RESONANT BOARD
R&F POWER SUPPLIES
30 kW (230 VAC 1, 400 / 480 VAC 3) 732808-00
37.5 / 40 kW (230 VAC 1, 400 VAC 3) 732808-05 732964-02
50 kW (400 VAC 3) 732808-01 732964-00
50 kW (480 VAC 3) 732808-02
65 kW (400 VAC 3) 732808-06 732964-03
80 kW (400 VAC 3) 732964-01
80 kW (400 / 480 VAC 3) 732808-03

8. The AEC board for your generator was selected to be compatible with specific AEC device(s). To
maintain full compatibility, the original part number must be ordered as a replacement. Refer to chapter
9, section 9.2.0 for the part number of the original AEC board shipped in the generator for which this
manual was prepared.
9. THE CONSOLE DISPLAY BOARD IS ONLY USED WITH THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE. The console
display board is supplied pre-mounted to the console front panel switch assembly. Consult the factory
for the required spares part number for this assembly.

NOTE (Cont):
10. Remote fluoro control is an option; spares should be stocked accordingly.
11. These items only used on generators fitted with low speed starter, spares should be stocked
accordingly. The low speed starter part number with a 33F phase shift capacitor for standard R type
stators is 732752-00. The part number with a 12.5F phase shift capacitor is 732752-01, and the part
number with a 45F phase shift capacitor is 732752-02.

12. These items only used on dual speed starter option, spares should be stocked accordingly. Several part
numbers of dual speed starter (which are tube stator dependent) are used in Indico 100 generators. To
determine which dual speed starter assembly is in your generator, note the DUAL SPEED STARTER
ASSY part number on a label on the dual speed starter chassis. This will be the part number that must
be ordered for spares usage. For reference, this will be part number 733317-XX or 735925-XX where
XX is a two digit number designating the exact configuration.
The dual speed starter fuses listed are used on all versions of dual speed starter.
13. These items are used on the 400/480 VAC 3 phase power input board. Spares should be stocked
accordingly.
14a. These items are used on 1 phase 230 VAC units only (on the DC bus assembly or on the 1 phase
power input board). Spares should be stocked accordingly.
14b. This fuse used on 1 phase 230 VAC rad two tube generators, and on 1 phase 230 VAC R & F one tube
and two tube generators. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
15. For replacement HT oil tank part numbers, consult factory.
16. NOTE REGARDING MAINS (LINE) VOLTAGE AS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION: The mains
voltage referenced in this section is the mains voltage at the input to the generator (at the main fuses
on the power input board). This is not necessarily the same as the voltage at the main disconnect box in
the room, the reason being that an optional line adjusting transformer may be used with the generator
which steps the incoming line voltage to the generator up or down. To ensure that the correct part
number is selected for spares, it is suggested that the mains voltage be noted at the main input fuses
INSIDE THE GENERATOR.
17. The digital I/O board is optional, and used on generators intended to interface with digital imaging
systems. To ensure full compatibility, please order the same part number that is in your generator(s).
18. A cooling fan is used on R&F power supplies only. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
19. For 23 X 56 cm consoles, use LCD display assembly part number 733396-00. For 31 X 42 cm consoles,
use LCD display assembly part number 735895-00.
20. For 23 X 56 cm consoles, use hand switch assembly part number 733176-00. For 31 X 42 cm consoles,
use hand switch assembly part number 735203-00.
21. Single phase generators use fuse FNM-3, three phase generators use FNQ-2. Spares should be
stocked accordingly.
22. DAP is an option, spares should be stocked accordingly.


CPI Canada Inc Schematics 9

Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-08 Rev. B Page 9-1
CHAPTER 9

SCHEMATICS

CONTENTS:

9.1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX..............................................................................................................9-2
9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS............................................................................................................................9-2

9 Schematics CPI Canada Inc

Page 9-2 Rev. B Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-08
9.1.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter contains the functional schematics for your X-ray generator. Each schematic represents a
major function in the Indico 100 generator; the fourteen functional schematics in this chapter represent all
of the major functional blocks in Indico 100 generators.

9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX

The functional schematic index follows this page. The part number for the AEC board originally shipped in
your generator is listed at the bottom of this form.

9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS

The functional schematics immediately follow the functional schematic index.

CPI Canada Inc Functional Drawing Index

MF-0718E

INDICO 100 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS
DESCRIPTION DRAWING NUMBER
DC Bus and Power Distribution MD-0788
System ON MD-0762
Room Interface MD-0763
X-Ray Exposure - Rad / Fluoro MD-0761
kV Control and Feedback MD-0759
Filament Drive and mA Control MD-0760
Low Speed Starter MD-0764
Dual Speed Starter MD-0765
Rad / Fluoro and Power Mode Select MD-0786
Interlocks and Tube 1 / Tube 2 Tellback MD-0787
Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) MD-0757
Automatic Brightness Stabilization (ABS) MD-0758
Remote Fluoro Control MD-0766
Digital Interface MD-0767
DAP (Dose Area Product) MD-0828
Serial Communications MD-0829

INDICO 100 SCHEMATICS
DESCRIPTION SCHEMATIC NUMBER
Schematic, AEC Interface Board 728401
Schematic, AEC Board 734628

THE PART NUMBER OF THE ORIGINAL AEC BOARD IN THE GENERATOR FOR
WHICH THIS MANUAL WAS PREPARED IS LISTED BELOW:

AEC BOARD PART NUMBER (AS ORIGINALLY SHIPPED)
N/A

9 Schematics CPI Canada Inc

Page 9-4 Rev. B Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740895-08

PHASE 1
PHASE 2
PHASE 3
NEUTRAL
GROUND
F5B
K5
F1
K
1
K4
K3
K2
E23
E2 - E2 - E2 -
E1 + E1 + E1 +
DC BUS
OUT
560 VDC
E11
E16 E9
J1-3
J1-1
J1-4
E8 E10
J2-3
J2-4
J2-2
J2-9
J4-2
J4-8
J4-10
J4-2
J4-8
J4-10
K1
J4-4 J4-4
J4-1 J4-1
J4-3 J4-3
J4-17 J4-17
J4-5
J4-5
J4-13 J4-13
J2-1 P2-1
P2-2 J2-2
J4-14 J4-14
J4-16 J4-16
J4-15 J4-15
J4-18 J4-18
D3
AUXILIARY BOARD
INVERTER
BOARD
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD
H.T. TANK
TUBE 1 /TUBE 2
SOLENOID
(TWO TUBE HT
TANKS ONLY)
LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD
ROOM INTERFACE CHASSIS
3 PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE ONE, TWO, OR THREE
INVERTER BOARDS DEPENDING ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER
DUAL SPEED STARTER
IS OPTIONAL. LOWSPEED
STARTER IS STANDARD
IN INDICO 100 GENERATORS
FAN(S) USED ON FLUORO GENERATORS
ONLY. DEPENDING ON THE APPLICATION,
ONE, TWO, OR THREE FANS MAY BE USED
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 4
INVERTER
BOARD
INVERTER
BOARD
3 PHASE POWER INPUT BOARD
(REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR 1 PHASE POWER
INPUT BOARD)
D2
D37
+12VDC
OK
S.S.
OK
CNCTR
CLOSED
FLUORO
FAN ON
R&F GENERATORS ONLY
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
+12V
+12V
+12V
TP1
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
FROM PAGE 3
F5A
F1
F2
F4
F5C
~
~
~
+
-
F2
F1
F2
F2
F3
REFER TO MD-0764
OPTIONAL
***
OPTIONAL 400/480 VAC
***
230/277 VAC
NEUTRAL
GROUND
+
120 / 240 VAC
52 / 73 / 94 VAC
COMMON
-
JUMPER POSITION:
1 PHASE GENERATORS
JUMPER PINS 2-3
3 PHASE GENERATORS
JUMPER PINS 1-2
JUMPER POSITION:
1 PHASE GENERATORS
JUMPER PINS 2-3
3 PHASE GENERATORS
JUMPER PINS 1-2
J5-3
J5-4
J3-3
J3-4
J3-2
J3-9
J10-3
J10-1
J11-4
THREE FAN
UNITS ONLY
J11-6
J8-3
J8-1
J7-1
J7-3
J7-5
J5-7 J5-6 J5-3 J5-4 J1-6 J1-5 J1-3
1
2
3
JW2
JW3
FLUORO FAN
TIMER / DRIVER
CIRCUIT
(U11, Q9, ETC)
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 1 OF 6
DRAWN
G. SANWALD 10 MAR 2000
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL
TO AUXILIARY
BOARD, PAGE 3
+12V
TP4
TP1
+12V
E17 E21
T2 (SHOWN TAPPED
FOR 400 VACMAINS)
*
T1 AND T2 MUST BE TAPPED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOMINAL AC MAINS VOLTAGE.
REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF THE GENERATOR SERVICE MANUAL.
**
THIS VOLTAGE IS APPROXIMATELY 560 VDC FOR 400 V GENERATORS, AND APPROXIMATELY
680 VDC FOR 480 V GENERATORS
**
*** 480 VAC GENERATORS
F3
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT
COMMAND TO MD-0787
3 PHASE AC
MAINS INPUT
J5-4
J5-6
1
2
3
SOFT START
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
(U3B, Q6, ETC)
REFER TO PAGE 5 FOR LOGIC LEVELS,
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:

1
3
4
5
6
2
HTW 10 MAR 2000
________ ________
J6-1
240 VAC
380/400/480 VAC
120 VAC
94 VAC
52 VAC
RETURN
J6-5
J6-6
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 3
F1 J6-7
T1
73 VAC
208 VAC
N/C
*
240V
240V
200V
200V
180V
0V
0V
R
1
1
R
1
0
R
1
8
, R
1
9
R
2
0
R
1
6
, R
1
7
R
1
2
+12V
D9
1 2
5 4
U1
1
2
5
4
DC BUS
DISCHARGE
CIRCUIT
(Q1, D10)
DC BUS CHARGED
SENSING
CIRCUIT
(R5-R8, D3)
U2
D2
D7
DC BUS
OK
D4
D8
D5
D6
+12V
R
4
8
R
3
1
R1, R2
R72
D1
SOFT START OK
PROTECTION
CIRCUIT
(U1C, Q7, ETC)
K1
*
LINE 1
LINE 2
GROUND
F5A
K5
F3
K
1
K4
K3
K2
E2 - E2 -
E1 + E1 + 650 VDC
OUT
J4-2
J4-8
J4-10
J4-4
J4-1
J4-3
J4-17
J4-5
J4-14
J4-16
J4-15
J4-18
D9
AUXILIARY BOARD
REFER TO PAGE 1
INVERTER
BOARD
ROOM INTERFACE CHASSIS
SINGLE PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE
ONE OR TWO INVERTER MODULES DEPENDING
ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER
FAN(S) USED ON FLUORO GENERATORS
ONLY. DEPENDING ON THE APPLICATION,
ONE OR TWO FANS MAY BE USED
INVERTER
BOARD
1 PHASE POWER INPUT BOARD
+12VDC
OK
+12V
F5B
F1
F2
F4
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL 230 VAC
230 VAC
GROUND
J5-3
J5-4
J3-3
J3-4
J3-2
J3-9
J10-3
J10-1
J11-4
J11-6
J8-3
J8-1
J7-1
J7-3
J7-5
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 2 OF 6
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
+12V
E17 E21
H.T. TANK
REFER TO PAGE 1
LOW SPEED
STARTER BOARD
REFER TO PAGE 1
E33
E34
DC BUS ASSEMBLY
NO CONNECTION
BUS
CAPACITORS
MAINS
RECTIFIER
VOLTAGE DOUBLER CIRCUIT
J12-4 J12-1
P1-4 P1-1
230
VAC
J4-2
J4-8
J4-10
J4-4
J4-1
J4-3
J4-17
J4-5
J4-14
J4-16
J4-15
J4-18
1 PHASE AC
MAINS INPUT
1
HTW 10 MAR 2000
________ ________
J6-1
J6-5
J6-3
J6-6
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 3
J6-7
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 4
T2 (SHOWN TAPPED
FOR 240 VACMAINS)
240V
240V
200V
200V
180V
0V
0V
*
T1 / T2 MUST BE TAPPED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOMINAL
AC MAINS VOLTAGE. REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF THE GENERATOR
SERVICE MANUAL.
*
R
1
1
R
1
0
K4
+12V
6
D6
K1
K2
D8
D5
J4-13 J4-13
J2-1 P2-1
P2-2 J2-2
K5
+12V
D4
U1
1
2
5
4
DC BUS CHARGED
SENSING CIRCUIT
(R6-R8, R16-R21, D3, ETC)
D2
DC BUS
OK
R
1
2
K3
+12V
D7
208 VAC
240 VAC
380/400/480 VAC TAPS
120 VAC
94 VAC
52 VAC
RETURN F1
73 VAC
T1 *
J2-2
J10-2 J3-2
J2-2
J2-1
J10-1
J12-4
J12-3
J12-2
J12-1
J3-1
J2-1
J1-4
J1-3
J1-2
J1-1 K1
D36
+12V
AUXILIARY BOARD
POWER MODE SELECT BOARD
RESONANT BOARD
FROM J1-5 (AUXILIARY
BOARD), SEE MD-0788,
PAGE 3
FROM J1-3 (AUXILIARY
BOARD) SEE MD-0788,
PAGE 3
+12V
+12V
RAD
MODE
K1
K1
CONTROL BOARD INVERTER BOARD
J4-4
J4-3
J4-2
J4-1
J1-4
J1-3
J1-2
J1-1
INVERTER DRIVE SIGNAL
FROM MD-0759 INVERTER DRIVE SIGNAL
TO MD-0759
K
1REFER TO MD-0759
PAGE 2
ENERGIZING K1
DISABLES DRIVE
TO INVERTER
BOARD No. 3
THESE CIRCUITS USED
ON R&F GENERATORS
ONLY
THE POWER MODE SELECT
BOARD IS USED ON 65 / 80 kW
GENERATORS WITH THREE
INVERTER BOARDS ONLY
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
D36 LIT INDICATES RAD OR PULSED FLUORO
MODE. D36 NOT LIT INDICATES CONTINUOUS
FLUORO MODE.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = K1 ON
RESONANT BOARD ENERGIZED IN RAD / PULSED
FLUORO MODE. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC)
= K1 ON RESONANT BOARD DE-ENERGIZED IN
CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = K1 ON POWER
MODE SELECT BOARD ENERGIZED IN FLUORO OR
LOW POWER RAD MODE (< 20 kW APPROX). HIGH
(APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = K1 ON POWER MODE
SELECT BOARD DE-ENERGIZED IN HIGH POWER
RAD MODE (> 20kW APPROX).
1
2
3
MD-0786 REV B
SHEET 1 OF 1
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW 21 MAR 2000
________ ________
RAD / FLUORO AND
POWER MODE SELECT
Q5
R79
R
4
7
R
4
4
D44
Q4
R69
R
6
6
D38
D1
DUAL SPEED
STARTER
MD-0765 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 2
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
DATABUS
D0..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD CONTROL BOARD
DS8
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS7
+5V
HS LS
J10-2
J10-21
J1-2 J4-6
J4-2
J4-14
J4-10
J1-6
J1-2
J1-14
J1-21 J4-8
J4-4
J4-16
J10-1
J10-20
J1-1
J1-20
J1-8
J1-4
J1-16
J1-10
+12V
+12V
CONTACTOR
CLOSED
SIGNAL FROM
MD-0788, PAGE 3
TUBE 1/TUBE 2
SELECT SIGNAL
FROM MD-0788,
PAGE 3
+12V
PREP COMMAND
FROM MD-0761
TUBE 2
SELECT
PREP
INITIATED
HIGH SPEED
SELECT
* REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF SERVICE MANUAL FOR THE
PROCEDURE TO SET DIP SWITCHES SW1 AND SW2
560 / 650 VDC (+)
560 / 650 VDC (-)
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q4)
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q3)
SHIFT
SHIFT
MAIN
MAIN
COMM
COMM
TUBE 1
TUBE 2
TB2-3
TB2-2
TB3-3
TB3-2
TB3-1
TB2-1
K1
K2
K3
K4
K1-A
K1-B
K4
K2-A
K2-B
HIGH SPEED
PHASE SHIFT
CAPACITOR
LOWSPEED
PHASE SHIFT
CAPACITOR
K3
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q2)
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q1)
INVERTER
FAULT
DETECTOR
DS1
+5V
INVERTER
FAULT
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = NO FAULT
STATOR FAULTTO
GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT
ON CONTROL BOARD,
SEE MD-0761
6
7
5
3
4
2
1
STEVE BLAKE
L.FOSKIN
30 MAR 2000
30 MAR 2000
U27
DATA
LATCH
R
N
7
G
U19, U16
BUFFER AND
DRIVER
U5
1
2
5
4
DS20
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS21
+5V
ROTOR
GRN RED
8
U24
BUFFER
R
N
7
A
R94
Q7
D47
R
9
6
Q18
RN4E
R
1
2
1
+12V
R138
R
1
+12V
U17, U18
U19, U22, U24
R40
R41
R42
U12
U13
U14
1
1
1
2
2
2
5
5
5
4
4
4
SW1 * SW2 *
DUAL SPEED
STARTER CPU,
BUFFERS,
DRIVERS
R
2
4
DRIVER
CIRCUIT AND
FAULT
CURRENT
LATCH
(U1-U10,
T1-T4, ETC).
CS1, U10, U11
+12V
K5
K6
R32
Q5
R
3
1
D47
C22
K5
K6
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DS8 LIT INDICATES HIGH SPEED SELECTED, DS7 LITINDICATES LOW SPEED SELECTED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = HIGH SPEED SELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = LOW SPEED SELECTED.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 7 VDC) = CONTACTOR CLOSED AND PREP REQUESTED. THIS INITIATES THE BOOST CYCLE. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = BOOSTNOT REQUESTED (PREP COMMAND NOT
RECEIVED, OR CONTACTOR IS NOTCLOSED).
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 2 DESELECTED. THIS CONDITION DEFAULTS TO TUBE 1.
DS1 LIT INDICATES AN INVERTER CURRENT FAULT. POSSIBLE CAUSES INCLUDE INCORRECT DIP SWITCH SETTINGS FOR THE TUBE IN USE (SEE ** ON PAGE 1), INCORRECT STATOR IMPEDANCE, OR
DEFECTIVE STATOR CABLE.
K4 OPEN CIRCUITS THE STATOR COMMON LEAD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE DUAL SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBYMODE.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT).
DS20 LIT INDICATES NORMALSTATOR CURRENTS. DS21 LIT INDICATES STATOR FAULT, OR DUAL SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBYMODE.
DUAL SPEED
STARTER
MD-0765 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 2
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
STEVE BLAKE
L.FOSKIN
30 MAR 2000
30 MAR 2000
TP3
SHIFT
SHIFT
MAIN
MAIN
COMM
COMM
LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD
TUBE 1
TUBE 2
J3-9
J3-3
J3-7
J3-5
J3-1
K4
K1
+12V
ZERO
CROSS
CIRCUIT
ZERO
CROSS
CIRCUIT
120 / 240 VACFROM J1-1. REFER
TO LOWSPEED STARTER
BOARD ON MD-0788, PAGE 1
COMMON FROM J1-4. REFER
TO LOWSPEED STARTER
52 / 73 / 94 VACFROM J1-3.
REFER TO LOWSPEED STARTER
TP2
K4
+12V
LOW SPEED
STARTER
MD-0764 REV E
SHEET 1 OF 2
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
TUBE SELECT SIGNAL FROM J2-9. REFER TO LOW
SPEED STARTER BOARD ON MD-0788, PAGE 1
POWER INPUT BOARD
AUXILIARY BOARD
12 VDC / SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL
FROM MD-0788,
PAGE 3
K1
J2-8
J2-7
J2-6
J2-10
J3-8
J3-7
J3-6
J3-10
J4-9
J4-11
J4-12
J4-6
J4-9
J4-11
J4-12
J4-6
J1-4
J5-8
J8-4
J6-8
J5-10 J6-10
TP1
JUMPER POSITION:
INDICO 100 GENERATORS
JUMPER 1.5S FOR 1.5 SEC
BOOST, NO JUMPERS FOR
2.5 SEC BOOST. REFER TO
CH. 2 OF SERVICE MANUAL.
DO NOT USE JUMPER
POSITION .15S
JW1
.15S
1.5S
TP3
TP4
CONTROL BOARD
STATOR FAULT TO GENERATOR
READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON
CONTROL BOARD, SEE MD-0761
PREP COMMAND
FROM MD-0761,
PAGE 2
ENABLE COMMAND
FROM MD-0761,
PAGE 2
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH &
THERMOSTAT OPEN SIGNAL
FROM MD-0787
J1-1
J1-20
CONTINUED
ON PAGE 2
1
2
3
5
4
8
7
6
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:

HTW 10 MAR 2000
________ ________
F2
F3
F1
C3
K2
K3
+12V
+12V
+12V
R
5
R
1
U2
U1
Q2
Q1
D1
D2
Q15
D18
D17
D15
+12V
R
4
5
R
4
6
BOOST AND
RUN LOGIC
CIRCUIT
(U1, U10, U18
Q2, Q12, ETC.)
Q3
R29
R
3
0
D7
Q18
RN4E
R
1
2
1
+12V
R138
R
1
+12V
J2-9
R
3
6
R
3
5
CONTROL BOARD
DATABUS
D0..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
J10-1
J10-20
J1-1
J1-20
DS20
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS21
+5V
ROTOR
GRN RED
FROM
PAGE 1
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = NO FAULT
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
7
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 6-11 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, LOW (<APPROXIMATELY 2 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT).
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT).
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 10 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = BOOST REQUESTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = BOOSTNOT REQUESTED (BOOST REQUESTED FOR APPROXIMATELY 1.5 SEC AFTER PREP INITIATED).
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = RUN REQUESTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = RUN NOT REQUESTED (RUN REQUESTED AFTER BOOSTCOMPLETE, AND FOR DURATION THATPREP IS PRESSED).
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = LOW SPEED STARTER ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = STARTER DISABLED (SEE # 7).
DS20 LIT INDICATES NORMALSTATOR CURRENTS. DS 21 LIT INDICATES STATOR FAULT, OR LOW SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) ENERGIZES K1 ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD, ENABLING THE STARTER. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) DE-ENERGIZES K1 ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD.
AS PER # 6 AND 7, NO ENABLE COMMAND, OR PRESENCE OF ATUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH & THERMOSTAT OPEN FAULT, OR A12 VDC / SOFT START FAULT WILL INHIBIT LOW SPEED STARTER OPERATION.
THIS POINT MUST BE HIGH (AS PER # 6) TO ENABLE THE LOW SPEED STARTER. THIS REQUIRES THE ENABLE COMMAND TO BE PRESENT (HIGH), AND THE TUBE 1 /TUBE 2 MISMATCH &THERMOSTAT
OPEN SIGNAL TO BE HIGH. IF THE 12 VDC / SOFT START FAULT SIGNAL IS LOW (INDICATING A FAULT), J1-4 WILL NOT BE PULLED LOW DUE TO THE DIODE SHOWN CONNECTED TO THIS PIN ON PAGE 1.
9
LOW SPEED
STARTER
MD-0764 REV E
SHEET 2 OF 2
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW 10 MAR 2000
________ ________
U5
1
2
5
4
U24
BUFFER
R
N
7
A
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 1 OF 4
DRAWN
G. SANWALD 12 MAY 2000
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
DATABUS
D0..D7
J10-9
J3-2
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
TP3
TP1
J10-28
J3-10
CONTROL BOARD
J1-9
J2-2
J1-28
J2-10
DS24
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS25
+5V
LARGE SMALL
J10-17
J10-8
BUFFER AND
DRIVER
J10-36
J10-27
J1-17
J1-8
J1-36
J1-27
JW5 JUMPER POSITION:
INDICO GENERATORS
JUMPER PINS 1-2
DO NOT USE JUMPER
POSITION 2-3
1 2 3
J10-5
J10-4
J10-24
J10-23
J1-5
J1-4
J1-24
J1-23
DS11
DS13
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS12
DS14
+5V
+5V
HV
FIL
GRN
GRN
RED
RED
HV / MA FAULT
FROM MD-0761,
PAGE 2
J3-11
J3-6
J3-5
J3-7
J3-8
J3-10
SMALL FILAMENT DRIVE
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
J2-8
J2-6
J2-6
J2-7
J2-5
J2-5
J2-9
J2-9
J2-9
J2-10
J2-10
J2-10
J2-4
J2-2
J2-3
J2-4
J2-3
J2-1
J2-1
J2-11
J2-2
J5-4
J5-2
J5-2
J5-1
J5-4
J5-3
J5-3
J5-1
J3-9
BUFFER &
CURRENT LIMIT
CIRCUIT
BUFFER &
CURRENT LIMIT
CIRCUIT
BUFFER &
CURRENT LIMIT
CIRCUIT
ERROR
AMPLIFIER &
DRIVER CIRCUIT
ERROR
AMPLIFIER &
DRIVER CIRCUIT
ERROR
AMPLIFIER &
DRIVER CIRCUIT
RMS
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
RMS
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
RMS
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
BUFFER /
AMPLIFIER &
FILAMENT
CURRENT
COMPARATOR
BUFFER /
AMPLIFIER &
FILAMENT
CURRENT
COMPARATOR
BUFFER /
AMPLIFIER &
FILAMENT
CURRENT
COMPARATOR
FILAMENT SUPPLYBOARD (SMALL)
FILAMENT SUPPLYBOARD (LARGE)
FILAMENT SUPPLYBOARD (UNIVERSAL)
TP1
TP1
TP1
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(SM) TO PAGE 2
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(LG) TO PAGE 2
LARGE FILAMENT DRIVE
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
K1
+12V
TO J3-6, J3-5, J3-9, J3-10
ON CONTROL BOARD
FIL CURRENT FEEDBACK
SIGNAL (SM) TO PAGE 2
FIL CURRENT FEEDBACK
SIGNAL (LG) TO PAGE 2
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH OPTIONAL TWO FILAMENT BOARDS (TYPICALLYUSED IN R&F
GENERATORS) USE THE FILAMENT BOARD CONFIGURATION SHOWN ABOVE
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH STANDARD SINGLE FILAMENT BOARD (TYPICALLYUSED IN RAD
ONLYGENERATORS) USE THE FILAMENT BOARD CONFIGURATION SHOWN BELOW
SMALL FILAMENT DRIVE
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
LARGE FILAMENT DRIVE
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
K1
FILAMENT FAULT
TO MD-0761, PAGE 2
TP2
TP2
TP2
3
TP21
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = LARGE FOCUS
SELECTED
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = SMALL FOCUS
SELECTED
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = NO HV / MA
FAULT
OPTO-COUPLER
ON = NO FILAMENT
FAULT
1
2
4
3
3
3
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:

12 MAY 2000
15 MAY 2000
S. BLAKE
L. FOSKIN
JW1
JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM
FILAMENT CURRENT
5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
1 2 3
5.5 A 6.5 A
JW1
JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM
FILAMENT CURRENT
5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
1 2 3
5.5 A 6.5 A
JW1
JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM
FILAMENT CURRENT
5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
1 2 3
5.5 A 6.5 A
U7
1
2
5
4
U24
U24
U24
U18
U22
BUFFER
BUFFER
BUFFER
R
N
7
C
U8
1
2
5
4
R
N
7
E
D/A
CONVERTER
D/A
CONVERTER
U14D
U14B
12
5
13
6
14
7
-
-
+
+
R7
R24
R10
R17
R
5
R
1
1
1
U27
DATA
LATCH
R
N
1
1
E
U19, U16
JW5
U10
1
2
5
4
Q15
RN4D
RN2G
R137
R
N
2
H
+12V
+12V
Q14
R136
RN4C
RN1A
RN1B
U1
1
2
5
4
LG/SM REQUEST
DETECTOR CKT
(U11C, Q2, ETC)
RN2E
+12V
Q3
R75
RN4A
DUE TO SPACE RESTRICTIONS, THIS PAGE SHOWS
ONLY THE MAJOR FILAMENT BLOCKS. REFER TO
PAGE 3 FOR A MORE DETAILED FUNCTIONAL
DIAGRAM OF THE FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD.

R
N
6
E
+5V
C22
C22
C22
J4
J8
T1
T1
T1
J5-4 J4-4
J5-3 J4-3
J5-2 J4-2
J5-1 J4-1
FILAMENT SUPPLY
BOARD
FROM PAGE 1
S
C
L
J2
CATHODE
H.T.TANK
LARGE
SMALL
CATHODE
H.T. BOARD
H.T.TANK
CONTROL BOARD
J3-4
J3-2
J3-3
J3-1
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(SM) FROM PAGE 1
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(LG) FROM PAGE 1
FROM J2-4
FROM J2-3
FROM J2-2
FROM J2-1
**
** ONE TUBE H.T. OUTPUTS ARE SHOWN. TWO TUBE
TANKS WILL HAVE A SECOND PAIR OF H.T. OUTPUTS
5
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 2 OF 4
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
12 MAY 2000
15 MAY 2000
S. BLAKE
L. FOSKIN
R19 RN6C, RN6D
RN6A, RN6B U6B
5
6
7
-
+
R
3
8
J9-1
J9-2
R
8
J9-3
J9-4
R39
RN6F, RN6E
RN6G, RN6H
U6A
2
3
1
-
+ R
1
8
R
4
0
TANK LID
BOARD
HV CATHODE
BOARD
HV ANODE
BOARD
mA
TEST
JACK E18
J3-2
J3-4
-
S
S
C
C
L
L
J2
CATHODE
J1
ANODE
E17
J3-1
J3-3
+
PART OF HV OILTANK
R
7
R
9
TP2 TP3
7
D95
D96
ANODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL FROM MD-0759, PG 1
RESET COMMAND
FROM MD-0761, PG 2
CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL FROM MD-0759, PG 1
D72
D71
ANODE I
CATHODE
+12V
+12V
HIGH MA FAULT TO
GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT
ON CONTROL BOARD,
SEE MD-0761, PAGE 2
ANODE OVER-
CURRENT DETECTOR
(U18, RN9E-H, ETC.)
CATHODE OVER-
CURRENT DETECTOR
(U17, RN9A-D, ETC.)
HIGH ANODE
CURRENT LATCH
& LOGIC INVERTER
(U32C, U33C)
HIGH CATHODE
CURRENT LATCH
& LOGIC INVERTER
(U32B, U33B)
R
1
7
9
R
1
7
7
D65
D64
U33E
R163
U30B
5
6
7
-
+
R
1
6
5
R
1
6
4
R216
U9
3
2
6
-
+
R33, R32
R213
R212
R
3
6
R34
J2-3
J1-13
J1-11
J2-1
J1-30
J2-9
J2-11
J1-32
SM FILAMENT FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
LG FILAMENT FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
RAD MA FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
FLUORO MA FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
R4
R15
R3
R14
R
5
R
1
7
R
6
R
1
6
TP4
TP6
TP5
TP7
8
9
1
0
1
1
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 3 OF 4
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
12 MAY 2000
15 MAY 2000
S. BLAKE
L. FOSKIN
FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD
J2-8
J2-6
J2-7
J2-5
J2-2
J2-4
J2-1
J2-9
J2-10
J2-3
J2-11
RN2A
RN1A
RN3G
RN5G
RN2B
RN1B
R
N
3
F
6
5
7
U1B
-
+
-
+
MAXIMUM FILAMENT CURRENT
LIMIT CIRCUIT
-
+
-
+
SET MAX
CURRENT
JW1
3
2
1
6.5 A
5.5 A
-12V
D6
-
+
-
+
+35V
T1
RN4H
J5-2
J5-1
J5-4
J5-3
-35V
TP3
K1
+12V
K1
ERROR AMPLIFIER, PWM REGULATOR,
AND FILAMENT CURRENT DRIVERS
PWM
REGULATOR
RMS
CONVERTER
-
+
R
N
3
H
TP4
R
N
5
D
-
+
RN1C
RN2C
RN1D
RN2D
FILAMENT CURRENT SENSE, RMS
CONVERTER, AND FILAMENT FEEDBACK
10
11
U1A
U4B
U3
Q6
Q7
Q12
Q13
C22
U7
D12, 13
D27, 28
U4A
U2B
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
J10-30
J3-11
J10-32
J3-9
DATABUS
D0..D7
A/D
CONVERTER
U15C
U30B
U30A
U23A
9
6
2
2
10
5
3
3
8
7
1
1
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
R
N
1
C
R
N
8
C
R
N
8
A
R
N
4
D
RN2C
RN9C
RN9A
RN5D
RN2D
RN9D
RN9B
RN5C
RN1D
RN8D
RN8B
RN4C
TP7
TP25
TP23
TP11
TP10
TP24
TP22
TP14
11
6
6
12
R
3
8
R
5
7
R
6
4
R
4
5
R29
R63
R59
R79
R39
R61
R67
R50
R
2
3
R
6
2
R
6
0
R
8
7
U15D
13
12
14
-
+
R
3
4
R
8
8
J10-11
J3-3
J10-13
J3-1
U37
SM FILAMENT FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
LG FILAMENT FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
RAD MA FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
FLUORO MA FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
J8
J4
K1 IS FITTED ON UNIVERSAL (LARGE/SMALL)
FILAMENT BOARDS. J8 IS FITTED ON LARGE
FILAMENT BOARDS, AND J4 IS FITTED ON
SMALL FILAMENT BOARDS.
TP2
R21
-
+
U2A
1.7 V
Ref
Q1
TP1
3
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
FILAMENT REFERENCE OUTPUTS, GENERATED BYTHE CPU. SCALING IS 1 VOLTOUT = 1 AMP OF FILAMENTCURRENT.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = LARGE FOCUS SELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = SMALLFOCUS SELECTED. THIS SIGNAL IS USED IN SINGLE FILAMENT SUPPLY GENERATORS ONLY.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = FILAMENT FAULT (FILAMENT CURRENT < 2 A). LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO FILAMENT FAULT.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = LARGE FOCUS SELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) SMALLFOCUS SELECTED.
PRIMARY FILAMENT CURRENT AT THESE POINTS MAY BE CONFIRMED USING A CURRENT PROBE ON ONE OF THE OUTPUTLEADS ON THE SMALL OR LARGE PAIR OF OUTPUTS.
THE VOLTAGE AT THESE TEST POINTS WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT.
THESE TEST POINTS ALLOW MEASUREMENTOF AVOLTAGE PROPORTIONAL TO ANODE CURRENT. THE SCALING IS 0.4 VDC = 100 mA. SHORT EXPOSURE TIMES MUST BE CONSIDERED AND APPROPRIATE
MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES MUST BE USED.
THESE TEST POINTS ARE SCALED 1 VDC = 100 mAOF X-RAY CURRENT.
THESE TEST POINTS ARE SCALED 1 VDC = 2.5 mAOF X-RAY CURRENT(R&F GENERATORS ONLY).
FILAMENT FEEDBACK CURRENT TEST POINT. THIS IS SCALED 1 VDC = 1 AMP OF FILAMENTCURRENT.
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 4 OF 4
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
12 MAY 2000
15 MAY 2000
S. BLAKE
L. FOSKIN
PWM OUTPUT. THE WAVEFORM WILL BE AS PER FIGURE 1 FOR LOW AND HIGH FILAMENT CURRENT DEMAND.
FIGURE 1
0 V
0 V
+12 V
+12 V
Approx 25 usec (40 kHz)
LOW FILAMENT
DEMAND
HIGH FILAMENT
DEMAND
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 4
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
DATABUS
D0..D7
J10-7
J10-12
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
TP2
J10-26
J10-31
CONTROL BOARD
J1-7
J1-31
J1-26
J1-12
JW3
JUMPER POSITION:
125kV GENERATORS
JUMPER 125kV
150 kV GENERATORS
JUMPER 150kV
125kV 150kV
HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT
TO GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON
CONTROL BOARD,
SEE MD-0761, PG 2
OR
LOGIC
J13-4 J13-1
RESET COMMAND
FROM MD-0761, PG 2
DRIVE ENABLE
COMMAND FROM
MD-0761, PAGE 2
KV FEEDBACK SIGNAL
FROM PAGE 3
H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE
FROM PAGE 2
A/D
CONVERTER
D/A
CONVERTER
HV ON SIGNAL
TO MD-0767, PG 1
TP26
2
1
3
S. BLAKE
L. FOSKIN
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
U15A
2
3
1
-
+
R
N
4
B
RN2B
RN2A
RN4A
R
3
5
R
3
6
TP8 TP6
U15B
6
5
7
-
+
R26
R
3
1
U37
U22
U14A
2
3
1
-
+
R
2
5
HV ON DETECTOR
CIRCUIT (U30C
U30D, Q6, ETC)
R46
R25, R44
R26, R45
U13A
2
3
1
-
+
R
4
3
D92
J9-6
J9-8
R67
R53
R68
R49
R50
R69
R54
U16B
U12A
5
6
7
-
+
R
7
2
2
6
3
5
1
7
-
+
-
+
R
5
2
R
2
1
5
R
3
7
R
4
8
U12B
J9-5
J9-7
CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL TO MD-0760, PG 2
ANODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL TO MD-0760, PG 2
D93
U16A
2
3
1
-
+
R91
R23
R24
R89
2
R
4
2
R
4
1
TP8 TP9
D35
R71 R70
-
+
-
+
ERROR AMPLIFIERS
INCLUDES U13B, U21A
D27-D30
U13B
U21A
T1 T2
R
6
5 R
6
4
U15
2
3
7
-
+
R
6
3
R
6
6
R62
-12V
D70
Ir
+12V
HIGH RESONANT
CURRENT LATCH
& LOGIC INVERTER
(U32D, U33D)
R
1
7
5
D66
R106
R107
U21B
5
6
7
-
+
R
1
0
8
D48
D49
VCO
INCLUDES U19, U20,
U23, U25, U27, Q10
CURRENT SENSE
U24B
2
U24A
1
3
4
5
6
2 7
4 5
U26A
U26B
TP17 TP19
R
1
8
0
R
1
7
1
+5V
R
1
3
2
4
DRIVE PULSES
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
J14-1
J15-1
J16-1
J14-3
J15-3
J16-3
INVERTER FAULTSIGNALS
FROM PAGE 2
INVERTER 2
FAULT DETECTOR
(T4, U37, D84, ETC)
INVERTER 3
FAULT DETECTOR
(T5, U38, D85, ETC)
INVERTER 1
FAULT DETECTOR
(T3, U36, D83, ETC)
INVERTER 1
FAULT LATCH &
LOGIC INVERTER
(U39B, U35F)
INVERTER 2
FAULT LATCH &
LOGIC INVERTER
(U39C, U35E)
INVERTER 3
FAULT LATCH &
LOGIC INVERTER
(U39D, U35D)
D82 D81 D80
INV 1 INV 2 INV 3
+12V +12V +12V
R
2
1
0
R
2
0
9
R
2
0
8
D87-D89, U35C
HIGH KV
DETECTOR
AND LATCH
(U31, U32A, U33A)
D86
D69
kV
+12V
R
1
7
2
D63
1
1
1
0
U33E
R
2
2
1
R
2
2
0
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 4
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
CONTROL BOARD
E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+)
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)
E3
E4
J2-1
J2-3
J12-1
J12-3
J12-2
J12-4
J1-1
J1-3
J1-2
J1-4 MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
INVERTER BOARD #3
E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+)
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)
E3
E4
J2-1
J2-3
J11-1
J11-3
J11-2
J11-4
J1-1
J1-3
J1-2
J1-4 MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
INVERTER BOARD #2
E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+)
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)
E3
E4
J2-1
J2-3
J10-1
J10-3
J10-2
J10-4
J1-1
J1-3
J1-2
J1-4 MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
INVERTER BOARD #1
INVERTER FAULT
SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
TO J14-1
TO J14-3
INVERTER FAULT
SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
TO J15-1
TO J15-3
INVERTER FAULT
SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
TO J16-1
TO J16-3
H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT
SENSE, TO PAGE 1
H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
J1-1 J1-4
TO J13-1
TO J13-4
INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE ONE, TWO, OR THREE INVERTER
MODULES DEPENDING ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER
RESONANT BOARD
POWER MODE
SELECT
BOARD
(REFER TO
MD-0786)
K1 *
REFER TO MD-0786 FOR
K1 DRIVE CIRCUITS
*
* USED ON R&F
GENERATORS ONLY
S. BLAKE
L. FOSKIN
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
DRIVE PULSES
FROM PAGE 2
GATE DRIVE CIRCUIT
FOR MOSFET INVERTER
(INCLUDES Q19 TO Q26)
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 3 OF 4
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
RESONANT BOARD
FROM
PAGE 2
TO J9-6
TO J9-5
KV FEEDBACK
SIGNAL
TO PAGE 1
TO J9-7
TO J9-8
** ONE TUBE H.T. OUTPUTS ARE SHOWN. TWO TUBE
TANKS WILL HAVE ASECOND PAIR OF H.T. OUTPUTS
S. BLAKE
L.FOSKIN
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
TANK LID
BOARD
HV ANODE
BOARD
HV CATHODE
BOARD
J3-8
J3-7
J3-5
J3-6
E9
E10
S
S
C
C
L
L
J2
CATHODE
J1
ANODE
HV MULT
ASSY +
(ANODE)
HV MULT
ASSY-
(CATHODE)
PART OF H.V. OIL TANK
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 4 OF 4
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
kV REFERENCE OUTPUT, GENERATED BY THE CPU. SCALING IS 1 VOLT OUT= 15 kV OF GENERATOR OUTPUT.
kV FEEDBACK TO THE CPU. SCALING IS 1V = 20 KV OF GENERATOR OUTPUT.
HV ON SIGNAL. THIS IS HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) WHEN HIGH VOLTAGE IS ON, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) WHEN HIGH VOLTAGE IS OFF.
THE VOLTAGE AT TP17 AND TP19 SHOULD BE A50% DUTY CYCLE SQUARE WAVE, RANGING IN FREQUENCY FROM APPROXIMATELY 80 kHz TO APPROXIMATELY 250 kHz, DEPENDING ON GENERATOR
OUTPUT POWER. SEE FIGURE 1.
12 VDC
0 VDC
FIGURE 1
S. BLAKE
L.FOSKIN
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 1 OF 4
DRAWN
G. SANWALD 26 APR 2000
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
CPU
J13-7
J13-9
J13-3
J13-1
J13-5
J4-8
J6-6
J6-7
J6-5
J6-4
J6-5
J6-8
J6-17
J4-7
J4-6
J5-8
J12-6
J12-7
J12-5
J12-4
J12-5
J12-8
J12-17
J5-7
J5-6
CONSOLE BOARD
DATABUS
D0..D7
FOOT
SWITCH
HAND
SWITCH
PREP
X-RAY
COM
P1-18
P1-19
P1-20
PREP
X-RAY
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
J3-18 J3-19 J3-20
+24V
J9-8
SEE NOTE 1
REMOTE FLUORO
EXPOSURE INPUT
+24V
+24V
J9-3
J9-24
J9-4
J9-25
JW15
JW2
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
+24V
+24V
REMOTE
EXPOSURE
INPUT
REMOTE
TOMO
SELECT
INPUT
BUFFER AND ADDRESS
DECODER (U18, U25)
NOTE: THE PORTION OF THE REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE,
REMOTE EXPOSURE, AND REMOTE TOMO SELECT INPUTS
SHOWN WITHIN THE DASHED OUTLINES IS DETAILED ON
MD-0763, PAGE 1
+24V
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATALATCH, AND
DRIVER
SEE NOTE 1
SEE NOTE 1
J4-9
J16-3
J16-4
J16-5
J5-9
LAST IMAGE
HOLD CIRCUIT
(U39, C30, ETC.)
+5V
DS42
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS41
+12V
EXP
SWT
DATABUS
D0..D7
CPU
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
EXPOSURE ENABLE COMMAND
TO J10-35 (PAGE 2)
EXPOSURE ENABLE
COMMAND FROM
MD-0767, PAGE 1
KV CONTROL
REFER TO MD-0759
MA CONTROL
REFER TO MD-0760
1
1.
2
3
4
5
4
5
4
4
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:

S. BLAKE
L. FOSKIN
26 APR 00
26 APR 2000
TP4 TP5 TP6
THE CONSOLE BOARD &
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
SHOWN ON THIS PAGE IS
USED ON THE 31 X 42 CM
CONSOLE ONLY. REFER TO PAGE
3 FOR THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE
AND THE RAD-ONLY CONSOLE,
AND PAGE 4 FOR THE
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE.
U24
1
2
5
4
U25
1
2
5
4
U26
1
2
5
4
U18
R19 R20
R
1
1
3
R
1
1
8
R
1
1
9
R21
R23
1
2
5
4
U10
1
2
5
4
U8 U25, U12, U7
R77
R76
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATALATCH, AND
DRIVER
U25, U12, U7
1
2
5
4
U41
1
2
5
4
U43
BUFFER AND ADDRESS
DECODER (U18, U25)
1
2
5
4
U15
R
2
4
R25
R18 R72
R70
1
2
5
4
U30
BUFFER AND ADDRESS
DECODER (U18, U25)
U18, U25
BUFFER AND
ADDRESS
DECODER
1
2
5
4
1
2
5
4
U37
U18, U25
BUFFER AND
ADDRESS
DECODER
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATALATCH, AND
DRIVER
U25, U12, U7 U38
1
2
5
4
U42
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATALATCH, AND
DRIVER
U25, U12, U7
1
2
5
4
U44
1
2
5
4
U32
1
2
5
4
U22
R
3
9
, R
5
7
R
9
2
R
8
2
1
2
5
4
U46
U28
R
N
1
9
B
RN14C
RN14D
RN14B
RN14E
RN14D
RN14A
+5V +5V +5V
R
1
2
0
R
1
2
1
R
1
0
2
FROM
RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
(PAGE 3)
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 2 OF 4
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
DATABUS
D0..D7
DS30
DS26
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS31
+5V +5V
KV
EN
X-RAY
DS27
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS28
+5V
PREP
GRN RED
GRN RED
YEL
J10-15
J10-34
J10-16
J10-35
J10-33
J10-14
J1-15
J1-16
J1-14
J1-34
J1-35
J1-33
KV ENABLED
DETECTOR CKT
(U11A, RN8, ETC)
TP10
ENABLE COMMAND TO MD-0764
RESET COMMAND TO MD-0759, PAGE 1 &
MD-0760, PAGE 2
TP18
PREP COMMAND TO MD-0764 & MD-0765
TP12
J3-9
J3-7
J9-9
J9-7
H.T. TANK
+/- 12V/SS FAULTFROM MD-0788,
PAGE 3 (CONTROL BOARD)
FILAMENT FAULTFROM MD-0760, PAGE 1
STATOR FAULTFROM MD-0764 & MD-0765
HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT FROM MD-0759, PAGE 1
& HIGH MA FAULT FROM MD-0760, PAGE 2
DRIVE ENABLE COMMAND TO MD-0759, PAGE 1
J1-3
J1-22
CONTINUED
ON PAGE 3
TP14
HV / MA FAULT TO MD-0760, PAGE 1
FROM PAGE 1
J8-4
J1-4
THERMOSTAT OPENSIGNAL
FROM MD-0787
10
6
7
8
9
11
12
14
15
16
18
AUXILIARY BOARD
13
17
S. BLAKE 26 APR 00
L. FOSKIN 26 APR 2000
U27
DATA
LATCH
U19, U16
BUFFER AND
DRIVER
R
N
1
1
B
R
N
1
1
C
R
N
1
1
D
RN2B
RN1C
RN2A
RN1D
U4
1
2
5
4 RN5E
U2
1
2
5
4
D21
U3
1
2
5
4
RN1H
RN1F
RN1G
RN1E
U5
1
2
5
4
X-RAY REQUEST
DETECTOR CKT
(U11D, RN7, ETC)
X-RAY REQUEST
DETECTOR CKT
(U10D, RN7, ETC)
D24
13 12
U33F
D19
R173
+12V
R
1
7
4
LOGIC OR / NOR
CIRCUITS (U10B, U14,
Q4, Q13, D91, ETC)
GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT
(U10A, Q6, D37, ETC)
D25
PREP ENABLED
DETECTOR CKT
(U11B, U10C, ETC)
Q12
RN4B
R133
R
N
2
F
+12V
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 3 OF 4
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
DATABUS
D0..D7
J1-3
J1-22
FROM
PAGE 2
J10-3
J10-22
DS17
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS18
+5V
P/S
READY
GRN RED
OPTO-COUPLER ON
= GENERATOR READY
19
S. BLAKE
L. FOSKIN
26 APR 00
26 APR 2000
TB1-1
TB1-2
TB1-3
TB1-4
TB1-5
J4-8
J4-7
J4-6
J5-8
J5-7
J5-6
CONSOLE CPU BOARD
DATABUS
D0..D7
+5V
FOOT
SWITCH
HAND
SWITCH
PREP
X-RAY
COM
J2-18
J2-19
J2-20
P1-18 J3-6
P1-19 J3-8
P1-20 J3-10
PREP
X-RAY
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY DISPLAY BOARD
J6-6 J6-8 J6-10
J4-9
J5-9
1
TO
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
(PG 1)
CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN
DASHED LINES ARE USED
ON THE 23 X 56 CM
CONSOLE ONLY.
J3-3
J3-1
J3-5
J16-3
J16-5
J16-4
J8-3
J8-5
J8-4
CONSOLE CPU BOARD
HAND
SWITCH
PREP
X-RAY
COM
J7-3 J7-2 J7-1
1
TO
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
(PG 1)
DATABUS
D0..D7
CPU
P1-3
P1-2 PREP
X-RAY
P1-1
CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN
ON RAD-ONLYCONSOLE.
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
+5V +5V
TP12 TP13
U6
1
2
5
4
R
N
7
D
U24
BUFFER
U9
1
2
5
4
U10
1
2
5
4
U17
R
6
7
R
6
6
U11
1
2
5
4
U21
1
2
5
4
U13
1
2
5
4
BUFFER
U3
1
2
5
4
U10
1
2
5
4
U14
1
2
5
4
U12
R
8
R
9
R
1
0
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 4 OF 4
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) AT THESE POINTS INDICATES FOOT SWITCH INPUT CLOSED, PREP SWITCH PRESSED, OR X-RAYSWITCH PRESSED RESPECTIVELY. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 24 VDC) =
OPEN CIRCUIT (I.E. NOT PRESSED) FOOT SWITCH, OR PREP SWITCH, OR X-RAYSWITCH. FOR RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, LOW INDICATES PREP SWITCH PRESSED, OR X-RAYSWITCH PRESSED, RESPECTIVELY.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) = AN X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED VIA ONE OF SEVERALEXPOSURE INPUTS. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 24 VDC) = NO X-RAYEXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED.
EXPOSURE ENABLE LINE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) INDICATES AN X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUEST, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = NO X-RAYEXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED.
THE CATHODE OF THE ASSOCIATED LED IS HELD LOW UNDER CPU CONTROLDURING AN X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUEST ONLY. NO MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE MADE ON THIS LINE AS THIS IS A
DATA LINE. THE REQUIRED DATAIS LATCHED BY THE REGISTER CIRCUIT(S) AT THE APPROPRIATE TIME.
THE OUTPUT OF THE ASSOCIATED LED IS LATCHED BY A REGISTER. THIS IS THEN READ BYTHE DATA BUS AT THE APPROPRIATE TIME. AS THIS IS A DATALINE, NO MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE
MADE AT THIS CONNECTION.
DS30 LIT = KV ENABLE REQUEST SENT. THIS IS NECESSARY TO MAKE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE. DS31 LIT= KV ENABLE NOT REQUESTED.
DS27 LIT = PREP REQUEST SENT. DS28 LIT = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
DS26 LIT = X-RAYEXPOSURE IN PROCESS.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = KV ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = KV NOT ENABLED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = X-RAYREQUESTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = X-RAYNOT REQUESTED.
LOW = X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUESTED AS PER # 3. THIS LINE MUST BE LOW IN ORDER FOR THE X-RAY EXPOSURE LEDS ON THE CONTROL BOARD TO BE ENERGIZED (SEE # 16).
LOW = (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH OR THERMOSTAT OPEN FAULT. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = NO FAULT.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = KV ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = KV NOT ENABLED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = X-RAYREQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = X-RAYNOT REQUESTED.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = OUTPUT DRIVE ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = OUTPUTDRIVE DISABLED.
ALL INPUTS TO THE GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT MUST BE AT THE CORRECT LOGIC LEVEL IN ORDER TO BE ABLE TO MAKE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE. THIS MEANS ALLFOUR FAULT INPUTS SHOWN
MUST BE CLEARED, AND THE KV ENABLE AND PREP COMMANDS MUST BE PRESENT.
DS17 LIT INDICATES GENERATOR READY TO MAKE AN EXPOSURE. THIS REQUIRES THAT ALL CONDITIONS PER # 18 BE SATISFIED. DS18 LIT INDICATES AGENERATOR READYDETECTOR CIRCUIT INPUT IS
NOT SATISFIED TO ENABLE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE.
S. BLAKE
L. FOSKIN
26 APR 00
26 APR 2000
J5-6
J5-7
J5-5
P1-6 J3-7
P1-7 J2-8
P1-5 J2-9
PREP
X-RAY
KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE BOARD
J3-3
J3-1
J3-5
HAND
SWITCH
PREP
X-RAY
COM CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN
ON THE TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE ONLY.
J4-8
J4-7
J4-9
TO
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
(PG 1)
AUXILIARY BOARD
AUXILIARY BOARD
CONTROL
BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
FILAMENT BOARD
FILAMENT BOARD
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
JUMPER POSITION:
RAD GENERATORS
JUMPER "RAD"
R&F GENERATORS
JUMPER "FLUORO"
J1-25
J10-25
J1-6
J10-6
J1-10
J10-10
J1-29
J10-29
J1-18
J10-18
J1-19
J10-19
J2-14
J3-14
J2-6
J3-6
J2-15
J3-15
J2-7
J3-7
J6-7 J6-6 J6-3 J6-4
J1-6
J7-2
J5-7 J5-6
J7-1
J8-6
J1-5
J7-4
J5-3
J7-3
J8-5
J1-3
J7-5
J5-4
J7-6
J6-4 J7-4
J6-5 J7-5
J6-1 J7-1
J6-2 J7-2
J6-3
J5-5
J7-3
J6-5
J9-1 J1-1
J1-1
J9-4 J1-4
J1-4
J9-3 J1-3
J1-3
J9-2 J1-2
J1-2
J9-5 J1-5
J1-5
J9-6 J1-6
J1-6
J8-3
JW1
FLUORO
RAD
DS9
DS34 DS22 DS2
GRN
GRN
RED
RED
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS10
DS35 DS23 DS4
+5V
+5V
+5V +5V
CONT.
P/S ON
FLUORO HIGH FLUORO LOW
DATABUS
D0..D7
TO PAGE 1
0 V
0 V
26 VAC
15 VAC
26 VAC
15 VAC
FROM
PAGE 1, 2
F4
F2
F3
TP5
PAGE 3
+35V
-35V
D31
+/-35V
+12V
+35V +35V
+35V
+12V
+12V
+12V
-12V
-35V -35V
-35V
-12V
-12V
-12V
F2
F2
F1
F1
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 3 OF 6
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL
FROM AUXILIARY
BOARD, PAGE 1
+5 V
REGULATOR
+/- 12V/SS FAULT TO GENERATOR
READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON
CONTROL BOARD, SEE MD-0761
+5V
TP16
TP1 TP15
J4-1
J4-3
J4-5
J4-7
J4-9
J4-11
J4-12
J4-13
J4-15
J4-17
J4-19
J1-1
J1-3
J1-5
J1-7
J1-9
J1-11
J1-12
J1-13
J1-15
J1-17
J1-19
+12V +12V
+5 V
REGULATOR
+5V
DUAL SPEED STARTER IS
OPTIONAL. LOW SPEED
STARTER IS STANDARD IN
INDICO 100 GENERATORS
ONE FILAMENT BOARD IS
STANDARD IN INDICO 100
GENERATORS, THE SECOND
FILAMENT BOARD IS OPTIONAL
TP2
TP2
T1
+12V
-12V
TUBE 1/TUBE 2
SELECT SIGNAL
TO MD-0765
CONTACTOR
CLOSED
SIGNAL TO
MD-0765
*
THE POWER SUPPLYON COMMAND (P/S ON) WHICH ENERGIZES
K1 / K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD IS ISSUED BY THE GENERATOR
CPU BOARD AFTER THE +5 VDC RAIL IS DETECTED BY THE CPU.
THE DC RAILS, INCLUDING THE +5 VDC RAIL, ARE ESTABLISHED
WHEN THE SYSTEM ON COMMAND IS RECEIVED. REFER TO MD-0762.
* TUBE 1/TUBE 2
SELECT SIGNAL
TO MD-0787
TO MD-0786
7
5
8
9
10
11 12
13
14 15 16 17
HTW 10 MAR 2000
________ ________
Q16
R
2
R
N
4
F
+12V
R
1
2
3
1 1 1 2 2 2
5 5 5 4 4 4
U7 U40 U41
R
N
2
D
R
1
1
R
2
2
6
R
N
2
C
R
1
0
R
2
2
5
R22
R
2
1
R
2
1
7
+12V
Q1
R20
+12V
R
2
2
3
R
2
2
7
+12V
R
2
2
8
1
1
2
2
5 5
4
4
U9
U24
BUFFER
DATA
LATCH
DATA
LATCH
R
N
7
F
U27, U19
& U16
DATALATCH,
BUFFER, &
DRIVER
R
N
1
1
A
R
3
3U17
Q4
-15V
R
2
7
, R
3
2
+15V
D1
U16 U16
DRIVER DRIVER
DATALATCH
& BUFFER
R
N
1
1
I
12 11
U27, U19 U27 U49
R
9
Q1
R
1
4
R
1
3
+5V
D28
R71
D32
D33
C22
C21
R
6
5
R
6
4
F1
+12 VDC
REGULATOR
C19
C24,
C25
-12 VDC
REGULATOR
U4
U5,U6
D16
D30
-12V
-12V
R68
D27
+12V
R70
D29
+12V
U3C
U3D
U3A
-
+
-
+
-
+
5.1V REF
+12V +12V
-12V
D19
18
+/- 12V/SS FAULT
D1
+12V
R32
12VDC / SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL
TO MD-0764, PAGE 1
U34
U27
BIT 0 BIT 2 BIT 7 BIT 3
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 CM CONSOLE)
J1-5
J1-7
J17-3
J1-9
J17-4
J1-2
J1-1
J1-3
J1-4
J5-12
J5-14
J3-3
J10-13
J10-19
J2-1
J4-14
J4-12
J4-13
J16-3
J4-15
J16-8
J3-6
J2-3
J3-1
J2-6
J2-7
J3-8
J3-5
J10-11
J10-16
J3-2
J3-4
J2-8
J3-7
J10-17
J2-9
18 VAC
0 V
18 VAC
0 V
18 VAC
220 VAC
110 VAC
FROM
PAGE 1, 2
REFER TO SYSTEM ON, MD-0762
F6
F4
F3
F5
F1
F2
+5 / +16VDC
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
(U47, Q4, T1,
D17, D18, ETC.)
+24V
+5V
+12V
+15V
-15V
-12V
-24V
+15V +24V
+12V
+24V
220 VAC
110 VAC
220 VAC
+12V
+15V
110 VAC
+5V
+5V
+24V
-24V
-12V
-12V
-15V
-15V
K2
K3
K1
K1
K2
K3
TP4
24 VDC
24 VDC RETURN
TP13
T2
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 4 OF 6
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
J5-13
J5-15
TP11
J1-1
J1-3
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J1-9
220 VAC
110 VAC
+24VDC
AEC BOARD
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
J11-5
J11-1
J13-3
J13-6
J13-1
J13-8
J13-5
J13-2
J13-4
J13-7
+15V
+12V
+5V
-12V
-15V
TP21
TP20
TP19
TP18
+12V
REFER TO MD-0757 (AEC) FOR
PINOUTS OF THE DC RAIL CONNECTIONS
ON THE AEC BOARD
J13-9 J13-21 J13-23 J13-11 J13-13 J13-17 J13-15
+24V +15V +5V -15V
THE DIGITAL I/O BOARD IS OPTIONALWITH R&F
GENERATORS
REFER TO MD-0767 (DIGITALINTERFACE) FOR
PINOUTS OF THE DC RAIL CONNECTIONS
SHOWN TO THE RIGHT OF THIS TEXT
ZERO CROSS
DETECTOR
LINE SYNC
TO MD-0767
HTW 10 MAR 2000
________ ________
DS1
POWER ON
CONSOLE BOARD & LCD DISPLAY
ASSEMBLYSHOWN WITHIN DASHED
LINES USED ON 31 X 42 CM CONSOLE
ONLY. REFER TO PAGE 5 FOR
23 X 56 CM CONSOLE AND FOR
RAD-ONLYCONSOLE.
J10-1
J10-4
FLUORESCENT LAMP
LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
D3
C10
D1
C16
U4
U2
R
5
TP6
R
2
TP2
-15 V
REGULATOR
-12 V
REGULATOR
+15 V
REGULATOR
+12 V
REGULATOR
U3
R4
R6
TP7
TP5
R3
TP3
U5
R
8
1
TP13 R1
TP1
U40
R78
D15
R77
R80
R85
R89
R75
TP17
TP16
DS36
DS37 DS39
DS38 DS33
R
7
8
R
8
1
R
9
0
R
8
6
R
7
6
+15V +12V +5V
-15V -12V
TO REMOTE FLUORO
CONTROL, PAGE 5
R7
+12V
+24V
-24V
-12V
+5V
TP9
19
F1
TP7
+5V
-15V
TP8
TP10
+ 5 / -15VDC
POWER SUPPLY
& REGULATOR
(U28, L1, D9-D13, ETC)
300 VAC
BACKLIGHT
POWER SUPPLY
(Q7, Q8, T1,
C57, ETC)
+24V
TO COIL OF POWER DISTRIBUTION
RELAY(CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
MAXIMUM 100 MA
TO RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
(PAGE 5)
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 5 OF 6
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW 10 MAR 2000
________ ________
CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 x 56 CM CONSOLE)
CONSOLE BOARD (RAD-ONLYCONSOLE)
J5-12
J5-14
J8-3
J5-13
J8-8
J5-15
F1
J8-1
J8-2
J8-23
J8-24
J8-25
J8-26
+5V
CONSOLE DISPLAY BOARD
J1-1
J1-2
J1-23
J1-24
J1-25
J1-26
+5V
TP2
TP3
-12V
J10-1
J5-1
J10-5
J5-5
FLUORESCENT LAMP
FLUORESCENT LAMP
-12V
+5V
+5V
THESE ITEMS ARE
USED ON THE 23 X 56
CM CONSOLE ONLY.
FROM GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD
(PAGE 4)
FROM GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD
(PAGE 4)
19
TP9
THESE ITEMS ARE
USED ON THE RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE ONLY.
J16-3
J16-4
REMOTE FLUORO
CONTROL BOARD
J11-5
J11-1
P1-5
P1-1
+12V
+5V
J1-19
J1-20
J2-19
J2-20
J1-17
J1-18
J1-15
+5V
J2-17
J2-18
J2-15
+5V
+12V
+12V +12V
REMOTE FLUORO
DISPLAY BOARD
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL OPTIONAL WITH
INDICO 100 R&F GENERATORS
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
(FROM PAGE 4)
F1
+5V
-20V
TP2
TP7
TP8
+ 5 / -20VDC
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
(U12, L1, D2,
D3-D7, ETC.)
300 VAC
BACKLIGHT
POWER SUPPLY
(Q1, Q2, T1,
C36, ETC.)
+ 5 / -20VDC
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
(U30, Q5, T1,
D7, D8, ETC.)
-12 V
REGULATOR
U31
U32
300 VAC
BACKLIGHT
POWER SUPPLY
D4
+5 V
REGULATOR
U8
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
THIS VOLTAGE WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC WHEN THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE NOT CHARGED. THIS WILL RISE TO APPROXIMATELY 6 VDC WHEN THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE FULLY CHARGED.
THE DC BUS CAPACITORS MUSTCHARGE WITHIN APPROXIMATELY 0.25 SECONDS OF THE GENERATOR BEING SWITCHED ON. IF THE DC BUS CAPACITORS DO NOTCHARGE NORMALLY, THE SOFT START
OK PROTECTION CIRCUIT ENERGIZES RELAY K1 (SEE # 4) AND INHIBITS OPERATION OF THE SOFT START DRIVER CIRCUIT(SEE # 3).
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) COMMANDS THE MAIN CONTACTOR K5 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD TO CLOSE. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = CONTACTOR OPEN. THIS OUPUT WILL NOT SWITCH
LOW IF THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE NOT CHARGED (SEE # 1 & 2).
K1 REMAINS DE-ENERGIZED (CONTACTS AS SHOWN) IF NO SOFT-START FAULT IS DETECTED. THEREFORE, K1 AND K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD WILL ENERGIZE WHEN THE GENERATOR IS SWITCHED
ON. ASOFT-START FAULT ENERGIZES K1 ON THE AUXILIARY BOARD, DE-ENERGIZING K1 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD. THIS WILLINHIBIT FURTHER DC BUS CHARGING.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
LOW INDICATES CONTACTOR CLOSED (SEE # 3). THE CONTACTOR CLOSEDSIGNAL OCCURS APPROXIMATELY 10 SECONDS AFTER INITIAL GENERATOR TURN-ON, ASSUMING NORMALDC BUS CHARGING.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = RAD / PULSED FLUORO MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = RAD / PULSED FLUORO MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. NOT USED ON ALLMODELS, REFER TO MD-0786 FOR DETAILS.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. NOT USED ON ALLMODELS, REFER TO MD-0786 FOR DETAILS.
DS9 LIT = CONTACTOR CLOSED, DS10 LIT = CONTACTOR NOT CLOSED.
DS34 LIT = GENERATOR ON COMMAND ISSUED (CONSOLE PASSED ALL SELF TESTS). DS35 LIT = GENERATOR ON COMMAND NOT ISSUED (DURING CONSOLE SELF TESTS, OR IF SELF TESTS FAILED).
DS22 LIT = FLUORO SELECTED, DS23 LIT = RAD SELECTED.
DS2 LIT = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. DS4 LIT = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. SEE # 13.
D1 LIT INDICATES + OR - 12 VDC FAULT, OR SOFT START FAULT.
24 VDC (APPROXIMATELY) ENERGIZES K1 AND / OR K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD, INITIATING THE POWER-ON SEQUENCE. SEE # 4.
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = FLUORO FAN(S) ON, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = FLUORO FAN(S) OFF. FAN(S) ARE SWITCHED ON DURING PULSED OR CONTINUOUS FLUORO OPERATION, AND
REMAIN ON FOR APPROXIMATELY 20 MINUTES AFTER SWITCHING TO RAD MODE.
THE VOLTAGE WAVEFORM AT THIS TEST POINT IS DEPICTED IN FIGURE 1 BELOW.
FIGURE 1
4 V
-8 V
18 s
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 6 OF 6
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW 10 MAR 2000
________ ________
SYSTEM ON
MD-0762 REV E
SHEET 1 OF 2
DRAWN
G. SANWALD 02 JUN 2000
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
J2-3 J6-9
J3-3
J7-16
J5-2
J4-10
J16-7
J4-10
J2-2 J6-7
J3-2
J7-15
J5-3
J4-11
J16-6
J4-11
J2-1 J6-5
J3-1
J7-17
J5-4
J4-12
J16-3
J4-12
JUMPER POSITION:
TO ENERGIZE K1 ONLY WHEN
THE CONSOLE IS SWITCHED ON
JUMPER JW1 PINS 1-2
TO ENERGIZE K1 AT ALL TIMES THAT
THE GENERATOR AC MAINS IS ON
JUMPER JW1 PINS 2-3
(K1 SWITCHES THE 110 & 220 VAC
SUPPLIES TO THE ROOM
INTERFACE BOARD)
JW1
P1-3
P1-3
P1-16
P1-2
J3-9 J5-10
J5-10
J8-7
J2-10
P1-2
P1-2
P1-15
P1-3
J3-7 J5-11
J5-11
J8-6
J2-11
P1-1
P1-1
P1-17
P1-4
J3-5 J5-12
J5-12
J8-3
J2-12
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
DISPLAY BOARD
CONSOLE CPU
BOARD
CONSOLE
BOARD
CONSOLE
BOARD
TOUCH SCREEN
INTERFACE
BOARD
T2
+ 24 VDC
24 VDC RETURN
24 VDC SUPPLY FOR
SYSTEM ON/OFF.
SEE MD-0788, PAGE 4
K3
K2
K1
REFER TO DC BUS &
POWER DISTRIBUTION,
MD-0788, PAGE 4
3 2 1
DS1
USE DRAWING DC BUS & POWER DISTRIBUTION, MD-0788, IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS DOCUMENT
* TO CONNECT AN EMERGENCY-OFF SWITCH, REMOVE JUMPER FROM J17-1 TO J17-2. THEN CONNECT
THE EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH TO J17-1 AND J17-2.
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
1
2
3
L. FOSKIN 02 JUN 2000
_________ _________
R
1
3
S3
NORMAL LOCKOUT
D4
Q3
OFF
ON
S1
S2
Q1
Q2 R
1
5
D16
F5
J4-10
J4-11
J4-12
TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE
RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
23 X 56 CM
CONSOLE
31 X 42 CM
CONSOLE
D3
J17-1 J17-2
*
SYSTEM ON
MD-0762 REV E
SHEET 2 OF 2
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
MOMENTARILY PRESSING ON CONNECTS THIS LINE TO 24 VDC RETURN. THIS LATCHES RELAY DRIVERS ON THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD,
ENERGIZING K2 AND K3, AND POSSIBLY K1 (DEPENDING ON JW1 SETTING). SEE NOTE ADJACENT TO JW1 ON THIS DOCUMENT.
MOMENTARILY PRESSING OFF CONNECTS THIS LINE TO 24 VDC RETURN. THIS UNLATCHES RELAY DRIVERS ON THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD,
DE-ENERGIZING K2 AND K3, AND POSSIBLY K1 (DEPENDING ON JW1 SETTING).
DS1 LIT INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF THE 24 VDC SUPPLYSHOWN. THIS 24 VDC SUPPLYWILL BE PRESENT IF THE GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO A
LIVE AC MAINS SUPPLY.
_________ _________
ROOM
INTERFACE
MD-0763 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 2
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT POSITION
FOR JW2, JW3, JW6, JW7, JW8, JW9,
JW10, JW14, JW15 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 2-3; 24 VDC
APPLIED EXTERNALLY ACTIVATES
THE INPUT(S) BY ENERGIZING THE
APPROPRIATE OPTO-COUPLER.
*
THIS PAGE SHOWS THE ROOM INTERFACE INPUTS. ROOM INTERFACE OUTPUTS ARE
SHOWN ON PAGE 2
TB1-5
TB1-4
TB2-5
TB2-4
TB2-7
TB2-6
TB3-5
TB3-4
TB3-7
TB3-6
TB4-4
TB4-5
TB4-6
TB4-7
TB4-8
TB4-9
TB5-12
TB5-11
TB6-4
TB6-3
TB6-5
TB6-6
TB6-8
TB6-7
TB6-10
TB6-9
J2-15
J2-16
J2-13
J2-14
J2-11
J2-12
J2-24
J2-25
J2-22
J2-23
J2-21
J2-20
J2-19
J2-17
J2-18
J2-9
J2-10
J2-8
J2-7
J2-5
J2-6
J2-3
J2-4
J2-1
J2-2
TABLE
STEPPER
INPUT
BUCKY
CONTACTS
COLLIMATOR
INTERLOCK
REMOTE TOMO
SELECT
TOMO
EXPOSURE
ROOM DOOR
INTERLOCK
THERMAL
SWITCH 2
THERMAL
SWITCH 1
MULTIPLE SPOT
EXPOSURE
I.I.
SAFETY
REMOTE FLUORO
EXPOSURE
REMOTE
PREP
REMOTE
EXPOSURE
TP14
J9-15
J9-16
J9-13
J9-14
J9-11
J9-12
J9-24
J9-25
J9-22
J9-23
J9-21
J9-20
J9-19
J9-17
J9-18
J9-9
J9-10
J9-8
J9-7
J9-5
J9-6
J9-3
J9-4
J9-1
J9-2
JW3 4 3 2 1
+24V
JW7 4 3 2 1
NOTE *
JW10 4 3 2 1
+24V
JW9 4 3 2 1
+24V
+24V
+24V
JW6 4 3 2 1
+24V
JW8 4 3 2 1
+24V
NOTE *
NOTE *
NOTE *
JW2 4 3 2 1
+24V
NOTE *
JW15 4 3 2 1
+24V
NOTE *
JW14 4 3 2 1
+24V
NOTE *
+24V
NOTE *
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J12-5
J12-6
J12-7
J12-8
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J6-4
J6-5
J6-6
J6-7
J6-8
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
BUFFER, DRIVER
AND ADDRESS
DECODER CIRCUITS
DATABUS
DO..D7
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD GENERATOR CPU BOARD
DRY CONTACT INPUT POSITION
FOR JW2, JW3, JW6, JW7, JW8, JW9,
JW10, JW14, JW15 SHOWN. JUMPER
CONNECTS PINS 1-2 AND 3-4; AN
EXTERNAL DRY CONTACT CLOSURE
ACTIVATES THE INPUT(S) BY ENERGIZING
THE APPROPRIATE OPTO-COUPLER.
**
**
ADDITIONAL CIRCUITS ARE USED IN THE AREAS INDICATED **. THESE CIRCUITS ARE NOT
RELEVANT TO THIS ROOM INTERFACE DIAGRAM, HOWEVER, THEY ARE PARTOF THE X-RAY
EXPOSURE FUNCTION AND ARE SHOWN ON MD-0761
**
*
NOTE *
T1 FROM MD-0787
T2 FROM MD-0787
S. BLAKE
L. FOSKIN
14 APR 2000
13 APR 2000
R53
R54
U31
1
2
5
4
U21
1
2
5
4
R55
R56
R66
R67
U29
1
2
5
4
R23
R21
U8
U9
1
2
5
4
R32
R22
R29
1
2
5
4
+24V
U14
R38
1
2
5
4
+24V
U13
R34 R36
R33 R37
U16
U30, U42,
U44
R70
R71
U27
1
2
5
4
R68
R69
U20
1
2
5
4
R35
R52
U28
1
2
5
4
R75
R74
U41,
U43
R77
R76
U7, U12, U18,
U19, U25
U10
SEE
MD-0761
TB1-1
TB3-1
TB3-2
TB4-1
TB4-3
TB4-2
TB5-2
TB5-4
TB5-3
TB5-7
TB5-6
TB5-5
TB5-8
TB5-10
TB5-9
TB5-1
TB1-2
+24V
LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
LIVE CONTACT POSITION
FOR JW1 TO JW5 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 6-8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K1
JW1
DRY * LIVE *
K5
1 2 3 4
JW13
DRY **
LIVE 24 VDC **
K7
K9
K10
K11
TB1-12
TB1-11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K2
JW2
DRY * LIVE *
TB2-1
TB2-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K3
JW3
DRY * LIVE * TB2-12
TB2-11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K4
JW4
DRY * LIVE *
TB3-12
TB3-11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K6
JW5
DRY * LIVE *
TB4-11
TB4-12 K8
TB6-1
TB6-2
+24V
1 2 3 4 JW7
DRY **
LIVE 24 VDC **
TB6-11
TB6-12
+24V
1 2 3 4 JW8
DRY **
LIVE 24 VDC **
K13
K12
LIVE CONTACT 24VDC POSITION
JUMPERS CONNECT
PINS 1-2 AND 3-4
LIVE CONTACT 24VDC
DRY CONTACT
DRY CONTACT POSITION
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 4-6
DRY CONTACT POSITION FOR
JW6 TO JW8 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS
PINS 2-3
LIVE CONTACT 24VDC
DRY CONTACT
* **
J2-30
J2-39
J2-40
J2-29
J2-28
J2-27
J2-34
J2-32
J2-31
J2-35
J2-36
J2-37
J2-38
J2-33
J2-26
J9-30
J9-39
J9-40
J9-29
J9-28
J9-27
J9-34
J9-32
J9-31
J9-35
J9-36
J9-37
J9-38
J9-33
J9-26
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10
K11
K12
K13
1
2
3
4
5
TB11
1
2
3
4
5
TB10
220 VAC
1
2
3
4
5
TB9
110 VAC
1
2
3
4
5
TB8
24 VDC
1
2
3
4
5
TB7
NOTE THE FOLLOWING IF USING JW1, JW2,
JW3, JW4, OR JW5 IN THE LIVE CONTACT
POSITION:
A JUMPER WIRE MUST BE CONNECTED TO
TB11 PIN 1, 2, 3, 4 OR 5 AS APPROPRIATE
FROM TB8, TB9, OR TB10 IN ORDER TO
SUPPLY 24 VDC, 110 VAC, OR 220 VAC
FROM THE SELECTED OUTPUT
TOMO / BUCKY 4
SELECT
BUCKY 2
SELECT
BUCKY 3
SELECT
COLLIMATOR
BYPASS
TOMO / BUCKY
START
ROOM
LIGHT
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
INDICATOR (COMM)
TUBE 1 INDICATOR
TUBE 2 INDICATOR
MAG 3
MAG 2
MAG 1
ALE
OUTPUT
SPARE
OUTPUT
DRIVE 1
DRIVE 2
DRIVE 3
DRIVE 4
DRIVE 5
DRIVE 6
DRIVE 7
DRIVE 8
DRIVE 9
DRIVE 10
DRIVE 11
DRIVE 12
DRIVE 13
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J6-4
J6-5
J6-6
J6-7
J6-8
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J12-5
J12-6
J12-7
J12-8
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD GENERATOR CPU BOARD
ADDRESS DECODERS,
BUFFER, REGISTER,
AND DRIVER
CIRCUITS
DRIVE 1 TO
DRIVE 13 = LOW
ENERGIZES
THE RELAYS
THIS PAGE SHOWS THE ROOM INTERFACE
OUTPUTS. ROOM INTERFACE INPUTS ARE
SHOWN ON PAGE 1
+24V
FOR +24 VDC SOURCE, REFER TO
MD-0788, PAGE 4, ON
DATABUS
DO..D7
BUCKY 1
SELECT
JW14
JW10
JW11
JW9
JW12
JW6
ROOM
INTERFACE
MD-0763 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 2
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
S. BLAKE
L. FOSKIN
14 APR 2000
13 APR 2000
R2
R1
C1
R3
C3
R4
C4
R6
C6
R
5
C5
U6, U7, U11, U12
U24, U25, U34
+24V
C2
K6
K3
K4
K1
K2
INTERLOCKS &
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
TELLBACK
MD-0787 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 1
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
FOR TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
SOLENOID DRIVE
CIRCUITS SEE
MD-0788, PAGE 1
J5-2
J5-1
H.T. TANK
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
RELAY CONTACTS
(SHOWN IN TUBE
1 POSITION)
POWER INPUT
BOARD
J11-2
J11-1
J4-19
J4-20
AUXILIARY BOARD
J4-19
J2-3
J4-20
J2-4
+12V
D39
TUBE 2
SELECTED
THERMOSTAT OPENSIGNAL TO
MD-0764 AND MD-0761, PAGE 2
COMMAND FROM MD-0788,
PAGE 1
J1-1 J8-1 J2-13
JUMPER POSITION:
R&F GENERATORS (WITH THERMALSWITCH)
JUMPER JW4 PINS 1-2 (ON)
RAD GENERATORS (NO THERMALSWITCH)
JUMPER JW4 PINS 2-3 (OFF)
JW4
1 2 3
INVERTER BOARD
THERMAL SWITCH ON
INVERTER HEATSINK
(R&F UNITS ONLY)
ON OFF
D42
THERMAL
CUTOFF
OPEN
+12V
CONTROL BOARD
J3-5
J3-13
OPTO COUPLER
ON = TUBE 2 SELECTED
+12V
J1-2 J8-2 J2-5
DS5 DS6
+5V +5V
TUBE
2
TUBE
1
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
DECODER/
DEMULTIPLEXER
SIGNAL FROM MD-0788,
PAGE 3
TUBE 1
STATOR
TERMINAL
BLOCK
TUBE 2
STATOR
TERMINAL
BLOCK
THERMAL
SWITCH
THERMAL
SWITCH
J5-1
J5-3
J5-2
J5-4
TUBE 1 THERMOSTATTO T1
ON MD-0763, PAGE 1
TUBE 2 THERMOSTATTO T2
ON MD-0763, PAGE 1
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
4
5
3
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = INVERTER THERMAL SWITCH CLOSED (OR JUMPERED VIAJW4), HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) =
INVERTER THERMAL SWITCH OPEN, OR JW4 JUMPER OMITTED ON RAD GENERATORS.
THE TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 TELLBACK LOGIC CIRCUIT ENSURES THAT THE TUBE ACTUALLY SELECTED MATCHES THE TUBE THAT WAS
REQUESTED. FOR EXAMPLE, IF TUBE 2 WAS REQUESTED BY THE CONSOLE BUTTUBE 1 WAS ACTUALLY SELECTED BYTHE H.T. TANK,
THE LOGIC CIRCUIT WILL INDICATE AFAULT CONDITION.
DS6 LIT INDICATES TUBE 1 SELECTED. DS5 LIT INDICATES TUBE 2 SELECTED. NEITHER LED LIT INDICATES A MISMATCH BETWEEN THE
TUBE THATHAS BEEN REQUESTED, AND THE TUBE THAT HAS ACTUALLY BEEN SELECTED (SEE # 5).
1
REFER TO MD-0763 (ROOM INTERFACE) FOR INTERLOCKS ACCESSED VIA THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
2
3
4
5
L. FOSKIN
S. BLAKE 18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
R38
U8
1
2
5
4
U7
1
2
5
4
Q10
Q8
R40
R7
R
4
3
R
8
R
4
1
+12V
R
3
9
R28
D26
+12V
R
6
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
TELLBACK LOGIC
CIRCUIT
(U9, U10, R84)
U3
1
2
5
4
U35
R
N
7
H
R
N
1
1
H
REMOTE FLUORO
CONTROL
MD-0766 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 1
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
DATABUS
D0..D7
DS15 DS19
+5V +5V
TXD RXD
J11-3 P1-3
J11-7 P1-7
J11-2 P1-2
J11-8 P1-8
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
UART
RS-232
TRANSMITTER /
RECEIVER
MICRO-
CONTROLLER
(CPU, EPROM **,
ADDRESS DECODERS
& LOGIC CIRCUITS)
U1, U2, U3, U4
J1-1 J2-1
J1-2 J2-2
J1-3 J2-3
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J1-9
J1-10
J1-11
J1-12
J1-13
J1-14
J2-4
J2-5
J2-6
J2-7
J2-8
J2-9
J2-10
J2-11
J2-12
J2-13
J2-14
DATA& ADDRESS
BUS
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL BOARD
DATALATCHES
(U6-U9)
LED
DISPLAYS
(7 SEGMENT
DISPLAYS &
STATUS LEDs)
DS1-DS23
J1-1 P1-1
J1-2 P1-2
J1-3 P1-3
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J1-9
J1-10
P1-4
P1-5
P1-6
P1-7
P1-8
P1-9
P1-10
BUFFER
REMOTE FLUORO DISPLAY BOARD
FRONT PANEL
KEYBOARD
SWITCHES
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL UNIT
RS-232
RECEIVER /
DRIVER
** U3 IS THE EPROM.
LIMITED TROUBLESHOOTING CAN BE PERFORMED ON THE REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL ASSEMBLYIN THE FIELD. THE DC RAILS CAN BE CHECKED (REFER TO MD-0788),
AND THE TXD AND RXD LEDs ON THE GENERATOR CPU BOARD MAY BE OBSERVED (THESE WILL FLASH ON AND OFF TO INDICATE DATAFLOW). MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS
CANNOT BE MADE ON COMMUNICATIONS, DATA, AND CONTROL LINES.
_________ _________
R
4
3
R
4
6
U20 U11 U7
RN3E
RN3F
RN3G
RN3H
LS1
U5
DRIVERS
(U1-U4, U10)
ABS
(AUTOMATIC BRIGHTNESS
STABILIZATION)
MD-0758 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 1
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
J7-12
J7-7
J7-5
J7-4
J7-10
+12V
1
2
3
JW19 *
J8
JW20 *
JW5 *
-12V
1
2
3
4
JW11 *
JW13 *
JW12 *
1
2
3
JW21 *
DIGITAL IMAGING ABS
FROM MD-0767, PAGE 1
JW24
(IN)
JW25
(OUT)
R48
Set
ABS gain
DIGITAL
POTENTIOMETER
CONTROL SIGNALS
FROM DATA BUS
ADDRESS REGISTERS
(U24, U25)
GAIN CONTROL SIGNAL
TO MD-0757
**
**
* REFER TO CHAPTER 3E OF SERVICE MANUAL TO DETERMINE REQUIRED JUMPER
POSITIONS FOR THESE CONNECTORS.
** ANALOG POTENTIOMETER R48 IS USED ON GENERATORS WITH THE CONVENTIONAL
(CONTINUOUS) FLUOROSCOPY OPTION. THE DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER IS FITTED
ON GENERATORS WITH THE PULSED FLUORO OPTION. THE DIGITALPOTENTIOMETER
IS ADJUSTED VIATHE ABS SETUP MENU ON THE CONTROL CONSOLE.
JW23 INSTALLED FOR UNITS FITTED
WITH ANALOG POTENTIOMETER, OMITTED
FOR UNITS WITH DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER
J11-3
TP8
TP9
GENERATOR CPU BOARD GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
J7-3
DATABUS
D0..D7
TP15 TP13
A/D
CONVERTER
COMPOSITE VIDEO
INPUT
PMT / PHOTO DIODE /
PROPORTIONAL DC
VIDEO INPUT &
AEC OUTPUT
REFER TO CHAPTER
3E OF SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS ON
ABS INPUT CONNECTIONS
TP14
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
A DC VOLTAGE WILLBE PRESENT FROM TP8 (TO TP9 OR GROUND),
AND FROM TP13 TO TP15 WHEN OPERATING WITH ABS ON. THIS
VOLTAGE WILL TYPICALLY RANGE FROM 0.5 TO 5 VDC, AND WILL
VARYDEPENDING ON THE NOMINAL DOSE VALUE IN THE
ABS SETUP MENU.
1
1
KVR
L. FOSKIN
16 MAY 2000
16 MAY 2000
R49
U17D
12
13
14
-
+
R
4
6
R
2
8
C20
C21
R47
R26
D11
R65
U17A
3
2
1
-
+
R
4
4
R63
R64
R43
R62
U17B
5
6
7
-
+
R45
R42
U49
R41
U17C
10
9
8
-
+
R
5
1
D13
JW4 *
JW23
C19
R27
R
3
1
R
5
0
C22
R52
U23D
12
13
14
-
+
R
N
5
A
R56
R
5
4
R
5
8
SAMPLE AND HOLD
CIRCUIT (U47,
R95, C102, ETC.)
U37
R
3
0
U34
DRIVER
R
6
1
R118
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 5
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J6-4
J6-5
J6-6
J6-7
J6-8
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J12-5
J12-6
J12-7
J12-8
DATABUS
DO..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
J10-2
J10-3
J10-4
J10-5
J10-7
J10-8
J10-9
J10-6
GAIN CONTROL SIGNAL
FROM MD-0758
+12V
J14-6 J14-7 J14-14 J14-3 J14-1 J14-2 J14-4 J14-12 J14-13 J14-15 J14-8 J14-9 J14-10 J14-11
J10-1
J11-19
TP10
1
J10-15
J10-10
J10-17
J10-11
J10-16
J10-19
J10-13
J11-4
J11-1
TP11
TP12
2
3
J7-19
J7-4
J7-1
+12V
-12V
CH 4 SELECT
CH 3 SELECT
CH 2 SELECT
CH 1 SELECT
L FIELD SELECT
M FIELD SELECT
R FIELD SELECT
PTSTOP
PTRAMP
PTREF
(NOT USED ATTHIS TIME)
2 2
TO A EC DETECTOR CIRCUIT
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
CONTINUED
ON PAGES
3 TO 5
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:

4
4
4
4
5
5
5
7
02 JUN 2000 L. FOSKIN
__________ __________
11 8
12 7
13 6
14 5
15 4
16 3
17 2
18 1
U33 U25, U23
DRIVER
BUFFER &
DATALATCH
START
R
1
1
6
R
1
1
7
D/A
CONVERTER
U18
TP4
3
U14C
9
10
8
-
+
R
3
0
U37
TP9 TP12
2
U23C
10
9
8
-
+
R
N
5
B
R
4
4
R
4
2
A/D
CONVERTER
U28
10
9
8
CPU
U45C
R100
R
8
8
R
8
9
Q7
Q5
R86
R
8
5
R
9
9
+5V
Q6
R
8
7
+5V
U46
1 2
5 4
-12V -24V
+12V +24V
RN14H
RN14F
RN14D
RN14B
RN14G
RN14E
RN14C
RN14A
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
6
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 5
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
__________ __________
PHOTO DIODE DETECTOR UNIT
PHOTO DIODE
DETECTORS
2 2
A EC DETECTOR CIRCUIT
J1-1
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
INTEGRATOR
CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIER
CIRCUIT
J2-3 J2-7
ANALOG
SWITCH
J2-4 J2-14 J2-1 J2-6 J2-2 J2-12 J2-13 J2-15
OPTO-COUPLER
"ON" = AEC START
COMPARATOR
& DRIVER
CIRCUIT
S1
+8 VDC
REGULATOR
CIRCUIT
-8 VDC
REGULATOR
CIRCUIT
J2-8 J2-10 J2-9 J2-11
+8V
-8V
2 2
OPTIONAL A EC
FROM GENERATOR INTERFACE
BOARD, PAGE 1
J7-2
J7-3
J7-4
J7-5
J7-6
J7-7
J7-8
J7-9
J7-13
J7-14
J7-17
J7-18
J7-11
J7-12
J7-15
J7-10
J7-1
CHAMBER 4 SELECT
CHAMBER 3 SELECT
CHAMBER 2 SELECT
CHAMBER 1 SELECT
START
LEFT FIELD SELECT
MIDDLE FIELD SELECT
RIGHT FIELD SELECT
PT RAMP
PT REF
PT STOP
FROM
PAGE 1
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD AEC BOARD
J5-2
J5-3
J5-4
J5-5
J5-6
J5-7
J5-8
J5-9
J5-13
J5-14
J5-17
J5-18
J5-11
J5-12
J5-15
J5-10
J5-1
R
8
0
U10A
3
2
1
-
+
R14
TP3
D24
U2F U2E
R
1
1
+12V
DS5
R51
R26
D20
-
+
-
+
R23
SAMPLE
& HOLD
R
8
1
R60
U13
2
3
7
-
+
R88
TP1
R85
R
5
0
D33
TP5
+12V
+12V
+12V
R63
R87
R69
R
6
4
R
6
2
R
8
6 Q3
Q2
Q1
R55
R54
R61
D19
D18
D30
R
4
5
R
2
2
R
8
2
J1-1
J2-1
J3-1
J4-1
J1-2
J2-2
J3-2
J4-2
J1-3
J2-3
J3-3
J4-3
J1-4
J2-4
J3-4
J4-4
J1-5
J2-5
J3-5
J4-5
J1-6
J2-6
J3-6
J4-6
J1 (shell)
J2 (shell)
J3 (shell)
J4 (shell)
J11-1
J12-1
J13-1
J14-1
J11-2
J12-2
J13-2
J14-2
J11-3
J12-3
J13-3
J14-3
J11-4
J12-4
J13-4
J14-4
J11-5
J12-5
J13-5
J14-5
U11A
U11B
U1A
U1B
3
5
3
5
2
6
2
6
1
7
1
7
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
R75
R76
R21
R5
R71
R57
R17
R70
R72
R58
R18
R56
R
7
3
R
5
9
R
1
9
R
3
3
R74
R77
R20
R6
AEC CH 1
AEC CH 2
AEC CH 3
AEC CH 4
J
W
1
J
W
2
J
W
3
J
W
4
R SELECT
M SELECT
L SELECT
L SELECT
R SELECT
M SELECT
R
1
R
2
R
3
R
4
ANODE
ANODE
ANODE
ANODE
CATH (L)
CATH (L)
CATH (L)
CATH (L)
CATH (R)
CATH (R)
CATH (R)
CATH (R)
CATH (M)
CATH (M)
CATH (M)
CATH (M)
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
ANODE
ANODE
ANODE
ANODE
CATH (L)
CATH (L)
CATH (L)
CATH (L)
CATH (M)
CATH (M)
CATH (M)
CATH (M)
CATH (R)
CATH (R)
CATH (R)
CATH (R)
L SELECT
R SELECT
M SELECT
L SELECT
R SELECT
M SELECT
L SELECT
R SELECT
M SELECT
D6
D12
D10
D11
U2D
U2C
U2B
U2A
R
3
7
R
3
8
R
3
9
R
4
0
+12V +12V +12V +12V
DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4
R43
R31
R30
R29
D13 D16 D15 D14 R
2
8
R
3
2
R
4
2
R
4
1
R84
D31
DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. SWITCHES
THAT ARE SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE
LOGIC LEVEL (0V = OFF, 12V = ON).
+12V
-12V
TP2 TP4
3
2
6
U6A
U6B
U6C
U6D
U9B
U10B
C37
U12
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 733347
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 3 OF 5
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
__________ __________
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS.
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD AEC BOARD
DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. SWITCHES THAT ARE
SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE LOGIC LEVEL.
DESIGNATES A FACTORY CONFIGURED LOGIC OR SIGNAL LEVEL. AEC
BOARDS ARE CONFIGURED AT THE TIME OF ORDER TO BE COMPATIBLE
WITH THE SPECIFIED AEC CHAMBER(S). FOR EXAMPLE, THE START
SIGNAL TO THE CHAMBER MAY BE FACTORYCONFIGURED TO BE ACTIVE
LOW (0 V), ACTIVE HIGH +12 V, OR ACTIVE HIGH +24 V.
SAMPLE
& HOLD
-
+
TP2
-
+
STRT
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4
R1
R2
R3
R4
J10-2
J10-3
J10-4
J10-5
J10-6
J10-7
J10-8
J10-9
J10-15
J10-10
J10-1
CHAMBER 4 SELECT
CHAMBER 3 SELECT
CHAMBER 2 SELECT
CHAMBER 1 SELECT
START
LEFT FIELD SELECT
MIDDLE FIELD SELECT
RIGHT FIELD SELECT
PT RAMP
PT REF
PT STOP
FROM
PAGE 1
J5-2
J5-3
J5-4
J5-5
J5-6
J5-7
J5-8
J5-9
J5-15
J5-10
J5-1
-
+
STRT
TP20
TP19
-
+
-
+
R11
R12
R13
R14
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4
TP17
R54
J5-1
U6
2
3
7
-
+
RN4B
D22
R56
D27
RN4C
TP3
J10-13
J10-19
J10-17
J10-11
J10-16
J5-13
J5-19
J5-17
J5-11
J5-16
+12V
+24V
-12V
-24V
TP5 TP6 TP7
D6
D5
D12
D4
D11
U3C
U3B
U3F
U3D
U3E U3A
R
N
6
A
R
N
6
B
R
N
6
C
R
N
6
D
R
N
6
E
+12V +12V +12V +12V +12V
DS1 DS5 DS2 DS3 DS4
RN4A
RN3D
RN3C
RN3A
RN3B
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4
STRT
TP18
TP23
TP4
TP21
Q2 Q3 Q4
+12V +12V +12V +24V +24V +24V
D30 D40 D65
LEFT MIDDLE RIGHT
Q1
+12V +24V
D16
START
+45V
TP9
TP24
TP10
SET
VALUE
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
12 VDC TO 45 VDC
AND 300 / 500 VDC
INCLUDES U7 AND T1
+12V
TP22
R
7
9
R
6
6
+500V
H.V.
+/-300V
3
2 8
12
9
10
U1A
U2A
S2A
S2B
S2C
S2D
U2B
C4
R32
S4
C11
R53
S3A
S3B
S3C
S3D
U4A
U4B
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 734614
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 4 OF 5
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
__________ __________
J11-1
J11-4
J11-3
J11-2
J11-6
J11-5
J11-9
+/-300 V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
START
M FIELD SEL
L FIELD SEL
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
J1-2
J1-1
J1-3
J1-8
J1-10
J1-9
J1-11
J1-12
J1-7
+/-300V
AEC CH 1
R89
TP11
R90
H.V.
+45V
START
LEFT
RIGHT
13
S1D
JW8
JW7
3
3
2
2
1
1
MIDDLE
L/R
R/L
J12-1
J12-4
J12-3
J12-2
J12-6
J12-5
J12-9
+/-300 V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
START
M FIELD SEL
L FIELD SEL
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
J2-2
J2-1
J2-3
J2-8
J2-10
J2-9
J2-11
J2-12
J2-7
+/-300V
AEC CH 2
R67
TP12
R68
H.V.
+45V
START
LEFT
RIGHT
13
S1C
JW6
JW5
3
3
2
2
1
1
MIDDLE
L/R
R/L
J14-1
J14-4
J14-3
J14-2
J14-6
J14-5
J14-9
+/-300 V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
START
M FIELD SEL
L FIELD SEL
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
J4-2
J4-1
J4-3
J4-8
J4-10
J4-9
J4-11
J4-12
J4-7
+/-300V
AEC CH 4
R35
TP14
R36
H.V.
+45V
START
LEFT
RIGHT
13
S1A
JW2
JW1
3
3
2
2
1
1
MIDDLE
L/R
R/L
J13-1
J13-4
J13-3
J13-2
J13-6
J13-5
J13-9
+/-300 V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
START
M FIELD SEL
L FIELD SEL
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
J3-2
J3-1
J3-3
J3-8
J3-10
J3-9
J3-11
J3-12
J3-7
+/-300V
AEC CH 3
R57
TP13
R58
H.V.
+45V
START
LEFT
RIGHT
13
S1B
JW4
JW3
3
3
2
2
1
1
MIDDLE
L/R
R/L
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4
*
* * *
* * *
*
*
*
*
11
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS.
THE -24V OUTPUTS ON J1 TO J4 AND THE +/- 12V OUTPUTS ON J1 TO J4
AND J11 TO J14 ARE NOT SHOWN ON THIS DIAGRAM. THESE ARE
DETAILED ON THE CONNECTOR PIN OUTTABLES IN CHAPTER 3D.
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 5 OF 5
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
__________ __________
FOR UNIVERSAL AEC ASSEMBLY 734630, REFER TO SCHEMATICS 734628, 728401
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = NO PTSTOP (PHOTOTIMER STOP) SIGNALRECEIVED FROM AEC BOARD. LOW (APPOXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PTSTOP SIGNAL RECEIVED FROM AEC BOARD.
PTRAMP IS THE AEC RAMP FROM THE AEC BOARD. THE RAMP SLOPE AND MAGNITUDE WILL DEPEND ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE. THE MAXIMUM POSSIBLE RAMP MAGNITUDE IS 5 TO 10 VDC,
DEPENDING ON MODEL.
PTREF (THE AEC REFERENCE VOLTAGE FROM THE CONSOLE) WILLVARYFROM 0 TO 10 VDC, DEPENDING ON TECHNIQUE.
HIGH (> 10 VDC) = AEC CHANNEL DESELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC CHANNELSELECTED.
HIGH (> 10 VDC) = L, M, R, FIELD DESELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = L, M, R, FIELD SELECTED.
HIGH (> 10 VDC) = NO AEC STOP REQUEST(INSUFFICIENT RAMP TO TERMINATE AEC EXPOSURE), LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC STOP REQUESTED (AEC EXPOSURE TERMINATED).
HIGH (> 10 VDC) = AEC START NOT REQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC STARTREQUESTED.
THE VOLTAGE AND MAGNITUDE OF THE RAMP AT THIS POINT SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY THE SAME AS AT TP17 ON THIS BOARD (NOTE REFERENCE 2) .
THIS WILL BE ANEGATIVE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP, DEPENDING ON AEC CHAMBER OUTPUT. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP IS DEPENDENTON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE.
THIS WILL BE APOSITIVE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP, DEPENDING ON AEC CHAMBER OUTPUT. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP IS DEPENDENTON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE.
R79 ADJUSTS THE +45V, +300V, AND +500V OUTPUTS FROM THE DC TO DC CONVERTER CIRCUIT. REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR DETAILS.
THE VOLTAGE AT TP22 SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1 (BELOW). THE MAXIMUM DUTY CYCLE WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 45%, DEPENDING ON THE LOAD ON THE HV SUPPLIES.
THE VOLTAGE AT THIS TEST POINT IS THE OUTPUT OF THE AEC CHAMBER. REFER TO THE AEC CHAMBER MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR DETAILS.
200 kHz
0 VDC
FIGURE 1
12 VDC
CONSOLE BOARD (INDICO 100)
DATABUS
D0..D7
R
1
0
1
CPU
U18
DS40
TP3
+5V
14
7
13
8
U27
RS-232
11
10
12
9
R126
R127
R128
R129
3
7
2
8
5
TXD
RTS
RXD
CTS
J2
14
13
8
U23
11
12
9
R122
R123
R124
J5-1 J11-7
J11-11
J5-4 J11-6
J11-13
J11-18
J11-10
J5-5 J11-17
J11-12
J5-3
J11-9
GENERATOR INTERFACE
BOARD
J4-1 J7-7
J7-11
J6-1
J4-4 J7-6
J7-13
J6-3
J4-2 J7-18
J7-10
J6-2
J4-5 J7-17
J7-12
J6-4
J4-3
J16-2
J16-1
J16-3
J7-9
RXD- (RS-422)
TXD (RS-232)
RXD+ (RS-422)
RTS (RS-232)
TXD- (RS-422)
RXD (RS-232)
TXD+ (RS-422)
CTS (RS-232)
7
6
U2
RS-422
O/P
4
7
6
U1
RS-422
I/P
1
R16
*
*
15
14
14
13
12
12
14
15
15
12
13
13
U12
U42
U38
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
2
3
3
4
5
5
3
2
2
5
4
4
RN3C
RN12E
RN12A
RN3D
RN12F
RN12B
RN3A
RN12G
RN12C
RN3B
RN12H
RN12D
14
5
1
13
6
2
16
7
3
15
8
4
3
12
16
4
11
15
1
10
14
2
9
13
*
*
*
*
DATABUS
D0..D7
DUART
DUART
U20
U31
R
1
8
R
1
5
DS3 DS1
+5V +5V
Y2
C40
C35
R
9
8
R
6
9
R
9
3
R
7
1
DS43
DS29
DS44
DS32
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
3
3
7
7
2
2
8
8
5
5
J1
J2
THIS SHEET SHOWS THE CONSOLE BOARD FOR
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH THE 31 X 42 CM
CONSOLE. REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR

INDICO 100
GENERATORS WITH THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE
AND THE RAD-ONLY CONSOLE.
R
7
2
-12V
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS PORTS ARE SHOWN ON PAGE 2
CONSOLE
CABLE
RXD TXD
RXD TXD
RXD TXD
FOR RS-232: U1, U2, AND R16 ARE NOTFITTED.
FOR RS-422: U12, RN3C, RN3D, RN3A, AND RN3B
ARE NOT FITTED.
*
SERIAL PORT FOR REMOTE
FLUORO CONTROL. REFER
TO MD-0766 FOR INDICO 100,
OR SCHEMATIC 734571 FOR
MILLENIA GENERATORS.
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
1 Hz
ALTERNATE
CONSOLE
CONNECTIONS
REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR MILLENIAGENERATORS.
*
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
MD-0829 REV D
SHEET 1 OF 3
DRAWN
G. SANWALD 13 DEC 2001
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
J. BARNES
L. FOSKIN
9 JAN 2002
9 JAN 2002
R
1
1
4
R
1
1
5
DS41 DS42
+5V +5V
TXD RXD
RS-232
R
1
1
7
R
1
1
6
DS44 DS43
+5V +5V
TXD RXD
FROM
RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
(PAGE 2)
14
12
15
13
10
11
U50
RS-232
3
5
2
4
7
6
RN18B
RN18C
RN18D
RN18A
RN17D
RN17C
3
5
7
1
8
5
4
6
8
2
7
6
DATABUS
D0..D7
CPU
U28
R
N
1
6
B
R
N
1
6
A
R
N
1
6
D
R
N
1
6
C
DS48 DS46 DS45 DS47
+5V +5V +5V +5V
3
3
7
7
2
2
8
8
5
5
J16
J15
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
MD-0829 REV D
SHEET 2 OF 3
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
R
9
4
-12V
COMMUNICATIONS PORTS SHOWN BELOW ARE OPTIONAL
DATABUS
D0..D7
R
5
CPU
U23
RXD
Q1
D6
TP1
+5V
14
7
13
8
U20 R
N
2
D
D2
+5V
RS-232
Q2
R
N
2
C
D1
+5V
11
10
12
9
TXD
RN1C
RN1B
RN1A
RN1D
6
4
2
8
5
3
1
7
3
7
2
8
5
TXD
RTS
RXD
CTS
J2
14
13
8
U6
RS-232
11
12
9
RN4A
RN4C
RN4D
2
6
8
1
5
7
6
7
U9
RS-422
O/P
4
6
7
U5
RS-422
I/P
1
Q3
R
N
2
B
D3
+5V
RXD Q4
R
N
2
A
D4
+5V
TXD
R
7
-12V
JP2
3
2
1
R
6
JP2 CLOSED FOR RS-422,
OPEN CIRCUIT FOR RS-232
J5-1
J5-4
J5-2
J5-5
J5-3
FOR RS-232: U5, U9, JP2, AND R6 ARE NOTFITTED.
FOR RS-422: U6, RN4A, RN4C, RN4D AND R7 ARE
NOT FITTED.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
THIS AREA SHOWS THE CONSOLE CPU BOARD
FOR INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH THE 23 X 56 CM
CONSOLE.
R
6
5
DS16
TP5
+5V
TXD RXD TXD RXD
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
TO GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD (PG 1)
1 Hz
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
1 Hz
*
*
J. BARNES
L. FOSKIN
9 JAN 2002
9 JAN 2002
DATABUS
D0..D7
R
1
0
CPU
U17
DS1
TP1
+5V
U11
RS-232
U8
RS-232
R23
R24
J8-1
J8-2
J8-3
THIS AREA SHOWS THE CONSOLE CPU BOARD FOR
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH RAD-ONLY CONSOLE.
TO GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD (PG 1)
1 Hz
R
1
9
R
2
0
DS2 DS3
+5V +5V
TXD RXD
R
2
2
R
2
1
DS5 DS4
+5V +5V
TXD RXD
R25
R26
R27
R28
TXD
RTS
RXD
CTS
J4
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
3
7
2
8
5
TP10 TP11
J16-1
J16-2
J16-3
CONSOLE CPU BOARD (MILLENIA)
DATABUS
D0..D7
DUART
U25
RXD
Q1
14
7
13
8
U20 R
N
2
D
D2
+5V
RS-232
Q2
R
N
2
C
D1
+5V
11
10
12
9
TXD
RN1C
RN1B
RN1A
RN1D
6
4
2
8
5
3
1
7
3
7
2
8
5
TXD
RTS
RXD
CTS
J2
14
7
13
8
U6
RS-232
11
10
12
9
RN4A
RN4B
RN4C
RN4D
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
6
7
U9
RS-422
O/P
4
6
7
U5
RS-422
I/P
1
Q3
R
N
2
B
D3
+5V
RXD Q4
R
N
2
A
D4
+5V
TXD
R
7
-12V
JP2
3
2
1
R
6
JP2 CLOSED FOR RS-422,
OPEN CIRCUIT FOR RS-232
J5-1 J11-7
J11-11
J5-4 J11-6
J11-13
J5-2 J11-18
J11-10
J5-5 J11-17
J11-12
J5-3
J11-9
FOR RS-232: U9, U5, JP2, AND R6 ARE NOTFITTED.
FOR RS-422: U6, RN4A, RN4B, RN4C, RN4D, AND R7
ARE NOT FITTED.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
GENERATOR INTERFACE
BOARD
J4-1 J7-7
J7-11
J6-1
J4-4 J7-6
J7-13
J6-3
J4-2 J7-18
J7-10
J6-2
J4-5 J7-17
J7-12
J6-4
J4-3
J7-9
RXD- (RS-422)
TXD (RS-232)
RXD+ (RS-422)
RTS (RS-232)
TXD- (RS-422)
RXD (RS-232)
TXD+ (RS-422)
CTS (RS-232)
7
6
U2
RS-422
O/P
4
7
6
U1
RS-422
I/P
1
R8
*
*
12
11
11
9
10
10
11
12
12
10
9
9
U12
U43
U39
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
13
14
14
8
7
7
14
13
13
7
8
8
RN4C
RN13E
RN13A
RN4D
RN13F
RN13B
RN4A
RN13G
RN13C
RN4B
RN13H
RN13D
14
5
1
13
6
2
16
7
3
15
8
4
3
12
16
4
11
15
1
10
14
2
9
13
*
*
*
*
DATABUS
D0..D7
DUART
DUART
U24
U29
R
1
5
R
1
DS2 DS1
+5V +5V
Y1
C39
C30
3
3
7
7
2
2
8
8
5
5
J1
J2
R
6
6
R
6
5
-12V
-12V
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONSOLE
CABLE
RXD TXD
FOR RS-232: U1, U2, AND R8 ARE NOTFITTED.
FOR RS-422: U12, RN4C, RN4D, RN4A, AND RN4B
ARE NOT FITTED.
*
SERIAL PORT FOR REMOTE
FLUORO CONTROL. REFER
TO MD-0766 FOR INDICO 100,
OR SCHEMATIC 734571 FOR
MILLENIA GENERATORS.
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
*
*
ALTERNATE
CONSOLE
CONNECTIONS
THIS SHEET SHOWS THE SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
CIRCUITS FOR MILLENIA GENERATORS
Y2
C35
C41
Q1 Q2
R
4
7
R
6
3
R
4
8
R
6
4
DS31
DS47
DS35
DS48
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
TXD
TXD
RXD
RXD
Q8
Q11
Q9
Q12
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
MD-0829 REV D
SHEET 3 OF 3
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
J. BARNES
L. FOSKIN
9 JAN 2002
9 JAN 2002
DAP
MD-0828 REV B
SHEET 1 OF 1
DRAWN
G. SANWALD 16 JULY 2001
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
DAP INTERCONNECT BOARD
28 AUG 2001 L. FOSKIN
DS1
+5V
J1-2
J1-3
J1-7
J1-5
J4-2
J4-1
+5 AND +15 VOLT
REGULATORS
(U7, U4, L1, D4
D5, ETC)
+15V +5V
TP2 TP3
TP1
J2-2
J2-3
J2-7
J2-5
1
2
3
4
5
TB8
24 VDC
1
2
3
4
5
TB7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
M. LODER 21 AUG 2001
DATABUS
D0..D7
DS32 DS29
+5V +5V
UART
RS-232
TRANSMITTER /
RECEIVER
RS-232
TRANSMITTER /
RECEIVER
R
7
1
R
6
9
U31 U38 U2
RN12C
RN12B
RN12A
R45
R
2
5
R
2
6
U1
R
2
J2-1
J2-6
J2-7
J2-2
J2-3
J2-4
J2-5
J2-8
J2-9
SWITCHED +15V
TEST +15V
TEST +15V
+ DOSE
- DOSE
OPTO
RELAY
GROUND
GROUND
DAP
CHAMBER
#1
+15V
+15V
+5V
R
5
RS-422
DRIVER
U5
+5V
R10
Q1
D2
R11
R31
R44
+5V +5V
R
7
R
8
R
9
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
DS3
DAP
CHANNEL 1
J3-1
J3-6
J3-7
J3-2
J3-3
J3-4
J3-5
J3-8
J3-9
SWITCHED +15V
TEST +15V
TEST +15V
+ DOSE
- DOSE
OPTO
RELAY
GROUND
GROUND
DAP
CHAMBER
#2
+15V
+15V
+5V
R
5
RS-422
DRIVER
U6
+5V
R16
Q2
D3
R17
+5V +5V
R
1
3
R
1
4
R
1
5
Q9
Q10
Q7
Q8
DS2
DAP
CHANNEL 2
MICRO-
CONTROLLER
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV B
SHEET 1 OF 6
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
DATA, ADDRESS,
AND CONTROL BUS
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J6-4
J6-5
J6-6
J6-7
J6-8
J6-9
J6-11
J6-13
J6-20
J6-15
J7-20
J7-15
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
J13-1
J13-15
J13-17
J13-13
J13-11
J13-2
J13-3
J13-4
J13-5
J13-6
J13-7
J13-8
J13-9
J13-21
J13-23
J13-10
J13-12
J13-16
J13-18
J13-19
J13-14
J13-20
J13-22
TO MD-0761, PAGE 1
DIGITAL IMAGING ABS
TO MD-0758
JUMPER POSITION:
INTERNAL (LINE SYNC)
JUMPER PINS 1-2
EXTERNAL (DIGITALIMAGING SYNC)
JUMPER PINS 2-3
JW22
3
2
1
LINE SYNC FROM
MD-0788, PAGE 4
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J12-5
J12-6
J12-7
J12-8
J12-9
J12-11
J12-13
J12-20
J12-15
J11-20
J11-15
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
WRITE ENABLE
READ ENABLE
RESET
ADDRESS LATCH ENABLE
HV ON SIGNAL FROM
MD-0759, PAGE 1
DS40
SYNC
JUMPER POSITION:
INVERTED SYNC
JUMPER PINS 1-2
NON-INVERTED SYNC
JUMPER PINS 2-3
JW3
3
2
1
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
KVR
L. FOSKIN
RN14H
RN14G
RN14F
RN14E
RN14D
RN14C
RN14B
RN14A
R91
U51
1
2
5
4
+5V
R97
R
N
1
9
D
2
1
3
U45A
5
4
6
U45B
U28
CPU
CONTINUED
ON PAGES
2 TO 6
+5V +15V +24V
-15V
RN4A
RN4B
RN4C
RN4D
RN4E
RN4F
RN4G
RN4H
RN3A
RN3B
RN3C
RN3D
RN3E
RN3F
RN3G
RN3H
R115 R84
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV B
SHEET 2 OF 6
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
KVR
L. FOSKIN
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
J1-1
J1-19
J1-14
J1-20
J1-15
J1-23
J1-21
J1-9
J1-17
J1-13
J1-11
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J1-10
J1-12
J1-16
J1-18
-15V
+5V +15V +24V
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U3A, U6A)
DATA
LATCH
BUFFER
U4
U9 SW1
BUFFER
U8
DRIVER
U6
JW1
3
2
1
5
4
6
U3B U10
1
2
5
4
R
1
+24V
DS4 DS6 DS7 DS8 DS9 DS10
EXON PFL HCF PREP GEN
READY
TOMO
+24V +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V
R
1
0
R
1
2
R
1
3
R
1
4
R
1
5
R
1
6
FROM
PAGE 1
R2
R3
U7
MUX
1
1
1
2
2
2
5
5
5
4
4
4
R
6
R
5
R
4
U13
U12
U11
+24V
+24V
+24V
DS1
DS2
DS3
OFL
STOP
EXP.
O.EXP
+24V
+24V
+24V
R
7
R
8
R
9
J2-11
J2-2
J2-1
J2-10
J2-12
J2-23
J2-9
J2-22
J2-6
J2-5
J2-4
J2-3
J2-7
J2-21
J2-20
TP1 TP2
+24V
F1
1
2
5
4
R
1
7
U14
+24V
1
2
5
4
R
1
1
U16
+24V
J3-9
J3-10
J3-7
J3-1
J3-3
J3-5
J3-6
J3-2
J3-4
J3-8
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 733752.
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV B
SHEET 3 OF 6
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
KVR
L. FOSKIN
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
J1-1
J1-19
J1-22
J1-20
J1-15
J1-17
J1-13
J1-11
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J1-10
J1-12
J1-16
J1-18
-15V
+5V +15V +24V
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U9, U10C)
DATA
LATCH
BUFFER
U13
U11 SW1
DRIVER
U15
13
12
11
U10D
FROM
PAGE 1
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 733947, 735921.
F1
+24VR
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
R4
R1
R5
R2
R6
R3
U6
U3
U7
U4
U8
U5
+24VR +24VR +24VR
U12
J2-21
J2-15
J2-24
J2-14
J2-19
J2-18
J2-20
J2-17
J2-13
J2-11 J3-35
J3-46
J2-9 J3-33
J3-44
J2-7 J3-31
J3-42
J2-5 J3-29
J3-40
J2-3 J3-27
J3-38
J2-1 J3-25
J2-12
J2-10
J2-8
J2-6
J2-4
J2-2
J3-41
J3-47
J3-34
J3-32
J3-30
J3-28
J3-26
J3-36
J3-39
J3-37
J3-45
J3-43
J3-48
+24VR +24VR
R12
Q3
D2
+24V +24VR
R
1
4
J2-23
J2-16
J2-22
+24VR
R
1
6
J1-23
J1-21
J1-9
U17
MONOSTABLE
TIMER
D3
D4
Q1
R
9
R10
D5
D6
R13
Q2
D1
+24V +24VR
R
1
5
DATA
LATCH
U14
DRIVER
U16
BUFFER
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV B
SHEET 4 OF 6
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
KVR
L. FOSKIN
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
J1-1
J1-17
J1-13
J1-11
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J1-10
J1-12
J1-16
J1-18
J1-14
+5V +15V +24V
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U3A, U5A)
BUFFER
U9 SW1
FROM
PAGE 1
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 735406.
J1-23
J1-21
J1-9
U12
+5 V
REGULATOR
+5V(A)
1
1
2
2
5
5
4
4
+24V
+5V(A)
R4 R5
R3
1
1
1
2
2
2
5
5
5
4
4
4 R
7
R
6
DS2
R
8
R
9
+24V
U15
U14
U16
U11
U13
DS5
DS1
1
2
5
4
+15V
R2
DS4
U7
1
2
5
4
+15V
U10
BUFFER
U8
U4 U6
DATA
LATCH
DRIVER
J2-8
J2-22
J2-15
J2-4
J2-5
J2-6
J2-16
J2-18
J2-17
J2-19
J2-12
J2-9
J3-1
J3-4
J3-3
J3-10
J3-11
J3-12
J2-21
J2-14
+24V
F1
R1
DS3
J2-11
J2-13
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV B
SHEET 5 OF 6
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
KVR
L. FOSKIN
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
J1-1
J1-17
J1-13
J1-11
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J1-10
J1-12
J1-16
J1-18
J1-19
+5V +15V +24V
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U3A, U5A)
BUFFER
U9 SW1
FROM
PAGE 1
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 736153
J1-23
J1-21
J1-9
1
2
5
4
+24V
R5 R6
U12
DS6
BUFFER
U8
U4
U6
DATA
LATCH
DRIVER
10
9
8
U3C
13
12
11
U3D
1
2
5
4
+24V
R3 R4
U11
DS5
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
R1
R2
R7
R8
R9
U10
U7
U13
U14
U15
J2-13
+24V
F1
J2-1
J2-6
J2-20
J2-24
J2-22
J2-21
J2-23
J2-5
J2-2
J2-3
J2-4
J2-11
J2-15
J2-16
J2-17
J2-18
J2-19
J2-10
J2-25
J3-2
J4-2
J4-3
J3-1
J3-4
J3-5
J3-6
J3-8
J3-7
J3-12
J3-11
J3-10
J2-9
J2-8
J2-7
J2-12
J4-5
DS3
DS4
DS7
DS8
DS9
U2
U9
U3
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DS4 DS6 DS8 DS11 DS13 DS14 DS17 DS19
* * * * * * * *
J3-23
J3-4
J3-22
J3-3
J3-21
J3-2
J3-20
J3-1
J3-5
J3-24
J3-6
J3-25
J3-7
J3-26
DS1
DS16
DS3
DS18
DS5
DS20
DS7
DS21
DS10
DS22
DS23
DS24
DS12
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
J3-10
J3-29
J3-31
J3-28
J3-9
J3-27
J3-8
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV B
SHEET 6 OF 6
DRAWN
DATE
CHECKED
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
KVR
L. FOSKIN
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
FROM
PAGE 1
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 736894
J1-1
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J1-10
J1-12
J1-18
J1-19
J1-22
J1-20
J1-14
U1
J1-17
J1-15
J1-13
J1-11
+5V +15V +24V
-15V
J2-1
J2-2
J2-3
J2-4
J2-5
J2-6
J2-7
J2-8
J2-9
J2-10
J2-11
J2-12
J2-14
J2-15
J2-16
J2-17
J2-18
J2-19
J2-20
J2-21
J2-22
J2-23
J2-24
J2-25
J3-17
J3-1
J3-2
J3-3
J3-4
J3-5
J3-6
J3-7
J3-8
J3-9
J3-10
J3-20
J3-21
J3-22
J3-23
J3-24
J3-25
J3-26
J3-27
J3-28
J3-29
J3-30
J3-31
J3-32
J3-33
J3-34
J3-35
J3-36
J3-37
J3-18
J3-19
J2-13
J3-16
+24V
+24V
F1
J1-23
J1-21
J1-9
U10
U12
U11
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
R17 R25 R69 R68
DS2 DS9 DS44 DS42 DS15
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2
5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4
U5 U7 U16 U14
U4 U6 U15 U13 U8
U17
DRIVER
J
3
-3
2
J
2
-1
0
J
3
-3
0
J
2
-2
4
J
2
-1
2
J
3
-3
3 U
1
U
1
U
1
U
1
U
1
R30
+24V
K1
J5-1
J5-3
24V FROM
ROOM INTERFACE
R78
Q1
D3
+24V +24V
R
7
7
J
2
-1
1
DS46
R72
DS27 DS29 DS31 DS33 DS35 DS36 DS37 DS39
* * * * * * * *
J2-17
J2-4
J2-16
J2-3
J2-15
J2-2
J2-14
J2-1
J2-5
J2-18
J2-6
J2-19
J2-7
J2-20
DS25
DS38
DS26
DS40
DS28
DS41
DS30
DS43
DS32
DS45
DS34
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
J2-23
J2-22
J2-9
J2-21
J2-8
D2
D1
+15V
-15V
R63
CPLD
* DUE TO SPACE RESTRICTIONS, SERIES RESISTORS ARE NOT SHOWN FOR THE INDICATED LEDS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D
C
B
A
SIZE CAGE CODE DWG NO REV
SCALE SHEET
D
SCHEMATIC
February 28, 2000
Canada Inc.
REVISIONS
ZONE LTR DESCRIPTION DWN CHKD APPROVED DATE
+300V
+500V
C25
.01
200V D21
Emir INC PER ENG. J.C.
R18
1M
2 S.C J.C. 01SEP94
3 Emir INC PER ECO No. 14083 Emir G.SANWALD 27SEP94
A INC PER ECO No. 14084 Emir Emir 27SEP94 G.SANWALD
B INC PER ECO No. 14133 Emir Emir G.SANWALD 20OCT94
C INC PER ECO No. 15473 Emir Emir M.PHILLIPS 10DEC96
D INC PER ECO No. 16111 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 20JUN97
E INC PER ECO No. 16121 Emir Emir D.YAKE 26JUN97
F INC PER ECO No.18348 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 28FEB00
-1000V
C4
.01
600V
C9
.01
600V
C2
.01
600V
C1
.01
600V
C18
.01
200V
C20
.01
200V
C22
.01
200V
C24
.01
200V
C3
.01
600V
C8
.01
600V
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
R17
1M
R9
1M
R8
1M
R7
1M
R1
1K
C15
.01
5
6
4
3
1
2
T1
E2
E3
D11
1N3070
TP5 L1
23 uH
C5
1 uF
NOTES:
1. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS 1/4W 5%
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS
R (1)
START (1)
L (1)
N (1)
SIG (1)
-24V -12V +12V R49
100K
R48
100K
TP4
1
2
3
4
J7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J1
3. TAB "-01" INSTALL ONLY J1-J6, TP5.
START (2)
L (2)
N (2)
R (2)
SIG (2)
1 3 5 7 9 1
1
1
3
1
5
1
7
1
9
2 4 6 8
1
0
1
2
1
4
1
6
1
8
2
0
J6
R45
100K
R44
100K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J2
+50V
C14
.01
200V
C17
.01
200V
C19
.01
200V
C21
.01
200V
C23
.01
200V
+12V
TP1
SPARE
E3
3
2
1
8
4
U1A
LF353N
Q4
Q3
D9
D10
C6
1
11 10
1
2
U2B
14016
R14
220
R13
220
R5
10
R4
10
R3
10
C7
10
+V 2
-V 1
SYNC 3
CT 5
RT 6
DISC 7
CSS 8 COMP 9
SD 10
VREF 16
OSC 4
OUTA 11
OUTB 14
U3
SG3525
C11
.01
4 3
5
U2C
14016
8 9
6
U2D
14016
1 2
1
3
U2A
14016
C12
.01
5
6
7 U1B
LF353N
E2
+12V
-12V
Q2
Q1
D7
D8
TP2
R33
10K
R30
10K
R25
22
R24
20K
R21
1K
R20
1K
R19
20K
R16
1K
R12
220
R11
220
R10
20K
R6
10
C13
2.2nF
R15
10K
R32
121K
R29
2.74K
C16
6.8nF
C10
.01
C26
10
-24V -12V +12V
+12V
R47
1M
R46
1M
R43
1M
R42
1M
R41
1M
R36
1M
R35
1M
R34
1M
R28
49K9
R26
1M
R23
100K
R22
1M
TP3
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
J5
R27
90.9K
R31
475K
C27
0.1
START (3)
L (3)
N (3)
R (3)
SIG (3)
R40
100K
R39
100K
R38
100K
R37
100K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J4
START (4)
L (4)
N (4)
R (4)
SIG (4)
COMPUTER GENERATED
HIGHEST REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
NOT USED
NEXT ASSY USED ON
728399
C27, D21, J7, Q4, R49
TP4, T1, U3
R2
MANUALS
NTS
DRAWN
CHECKED
APPROVAL
ENGINEER
DES/MFG AUTH.
CONTRACT No.
DATE
+12V
AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL
INTERFACE
728401
1 OF 1 LEVEL 3
Emir 07SEP94
Emir 27SEP94
J.CUNNINGHAM 27SEP94
S.CARTWRIGHT 27SEP94
-----------------------
02845
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
F
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
Size
Scale
CAGE Code DWG NO Rev
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
Monday, November 03, 2003
5 5
Canada Inc.
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
5 5
Canada Inc.
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
5 5
Canada Inc.
REVISIONS
_
--- SEE SHEET 1 FOR REVISIONS
HIGHEST REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS
NOT USED
SCHEMATIC
NTS
DRAWN
CHECKED
APPROVAL
ENGINEER
DES/MFG AUTH.
CONTRACT No.
DATE
NEXT ASSY USED ON
Emir
GENERATORS
734630
LEVEL 3
02845
MANUALS
H
29APR99
734628 D
TAB
J1 INPUT OF ASSY 734396 J3 INPUT OF ASSY 734396 J4 INPUT OF ASSY 734396
CHAMBER
TYPE
CHAMBER
TYPE
CHAMBER
TYPE
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
00 **
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
MODIFICATION
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
CHAMBER
TYPE
J2 INPUT OF ASSY 734396
UNIVERSAL A.E.C. TAB CONFIGURATION
"TAB" APPLIES TO ASSY 734757-TAB
PMT = PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE
VACUTEC/SPECIAL 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 44 AID 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 50 PMT 10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 54 PMT 12, 20, 28, 36, 42, 59
NOTE : ** INDICATES CONFIGURATIONS DEFINED ON SCHEMATIC No.
728398
--- --- ---
08OCT99
08OCT99
08OCT99 D.YAKE
D.YAKE
S.CARTWRIGHT
D69 = 10 OHMS, R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
4 5
Canada Inc.
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
4 5
Canada Inc.
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
4 5
Canada Inc.
REVISIONS
_
HIGHEST REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS
NOT USED
SCHEMATIC
NTS
DRAWN
CHECKED
APPROVAL
ENGINEER
DES/MFG AUTH.
CONTRACT No.
DATE
NEXT ASSY USED ON
Emir
GENERATORS
734630
LEVEL 3
02845
MANUALS
H
29APR99
734628 D
TAB
CHAMBER
TYPE
CHAMBER
TYPE
CHAMBER
TYPE
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
50
51
ZIEHM/COMET 2, 43, 46, 47, 71, 72, 73
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
99
MODIFICATION
AID
G.E. (12V) 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45
3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45
PMT
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
CHAMBER
TYPE
ZIEHM/COMET
AID/COMET ION
N/A
3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45
UNCONFIGURED + 12V N/A
AID/COMET ION
7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48; 50
AID 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50
PMT 39, 49
ZIEHM/COMET 39, 48, 51, 52, 67, 68, 74
39, 48, 51, 52, 67, 68, 74 ZIEHM/COMET ZIEHM/COMET
ZIEHM/COMET
37, 53, 56, 57, 63, 69, 70
37, 53, 56, 57, 63, 69, 70
PMT
PMT
37, 54
37, 54
9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 KEITHLEY
N/A
10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 54
N/A
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
SIERRA/NICAL 42, 60
C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED;
R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R52,R71,R75,R80 = 33K
C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS;
D69= 10 OHMS; R52,R71,R75,R80 = 33K
C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
97
98 N/A
N/A
UNCONFIGURED + 12V
UNCONFIGURED + 24V
N/A
N/A UNCONFIGURED + 24V
UNCONFIGURED + 12V
UNCONFIGURED + 12V
N/A
N/A UNCONFIGURED + 24V
UNCONFIGURED + 12V
UNCONFIGURED + 12V
N/A
N/A
UNCONFIGURED + 12V
UNCONFIGURED + 12V
UNCONFIGURED + 24V
R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS; U5, U7-U11, U13, U15= AD708; C9, C19-C21= 2.2uF
C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED. R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
R29= 10 OHMS, R90= NOT FITTED; R5=R8=R9= 2.49K; R83= R84= R85= R86= 7.5K
G.E. (12V) G.E. (12V)
--- --- ---
08OCT99
08OCT99
08OCT99 D.YAKE
D.YAKE
S.CARTWRIGHT
C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED. R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED. R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R84=R85=R86=7.5K
R29 = NOT FITTED. R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
VACUTEC 2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 45 VACUTEC 7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 50 VACUTEC 9, 17, 25, 37, 53, 55 PMT C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED. R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
41, 59
2, 43, 46, 47, 71, 72, 73
41, 59
41, 59
41, 59
41, 59
41, 59
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
3 5
D
Canada Inc.
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
3 5
D
Canada Inc.
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
3 5
D
Canada Inc.
REVISIONS
_
HIGHEST REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS
NOT USED
SCHEMATIC
NTS
DRAWN
CHECKED
APPROVAL
ENGINEER
DES/MFG AUTH.
CONTRACT No.
DATE
NEXT ASSY USED ON
Emir
GENERATORS
734630
LEVEL 3
02845
MANUALS
J
29APR99
734628
TAB
CHAMBER
TYPE
CHAMBER
TYPE
CHAMBER
TYPE
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
00
1 AID 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
MODIFICATION
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
VACUTEC
VACUTEC
KIETHLEY/APELEM
G.E. (12V)
AID/COMET ION
G.E. (24V)
KIETHLEY/APELEM
PMT
AID
G.E. (12V)
SIEMENS
G.E. (24V) 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45
2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 44
3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45
3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45
2, 44
3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 44
3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45
3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45
3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45
3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 44
2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 45
2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 45
VACUTEC
G.E. (12V)
AID/COMET ION
G.E. (24V)
KIETHLEY/APELEM
PMT
AID
AID
PMT
G.E. (24V) 9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55
37, 54
10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 53, 55
10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 53, 55
37, 54
10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 54
9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55
10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 53, 55
9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55
9, 17, 25, 37, 53, 55 VACUTEC
PMT
AID/COMET ION
G.E. (24V)
KIETHLEY/APELEM
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT 41, 59
41, 59
41, 59
41, 59
41, 59
12, 20, 28, 36, 42, 59
11, 19, 27, 35, 42, 58, 60
12, 20, 28, 36, 42, 58, 60
41, 59
11, 19, 27, 41, 58, 60
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R85=R86= 7.5K
R29 = 10 OHMS; R90 = NOT FITTED; R84=R85=R86= 7.5K; R5=R8=R9 = 2.49K
;C29=220pF ; R83= 100 OHMS
CHAMBER
TYPE
39, 49
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 49
ASSY 734630
SWITCH
CLOSURE
KIETHLEY/APELEM
SIEMENS
KIETHLEY/APELEM
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50
7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50
7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50
VACUTEC
G.E. (12V)
G.E. (24V)
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50
7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 49
VACUTEC
7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50
AID/COMET ION
AID
7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50
7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 50
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 49
G.E. (12V)
G.E. (24V)
7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 50
AID
PMT
R29= 10 OHMS; R90 NOT FITTED; R83=R84=R85=R86= 7.5K;R5=R8=R9= 2.49K
--- --- ---
08OCT99
08OCT99
08OCT99
D.YAKE
D.YAKE
S.CARTWRIGHT
ZIEHM/COMET 2, 43, 46, 47, 71, 72, 73 ZIEHM/COMET 39, 48, 51, 52, 67, 68, 74 ZIEHM/COMET 37, 53, 56, 57, 63, 69, 70 PMT 41, 59 R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R52, R71, R75, R81 = 33K
PMT 41, 59
41, 59 PMT
AID
AID
3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45
3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45
AID
AID
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50
KEITHLEY
G.E. (12V)
10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 54
9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55
R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS; D69 = 10 OHMS
R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS; D69 = 10 OHMS; R84=7.5K
2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 45 VACUTEC 7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 50 VACUTEC 9, 17, 25, 37, 53, 55 VACUTEC 41, 59 PMT R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS; D69 = 10 OHMS
41, 59
VACUTEC PMT 2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 45 37, 54
PMT
VACUTEC
37, 54 2, 44
ZIEHM/COMET
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS PMT
2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 44 SIEMENS
37, 53, 56, 57, 63, 69, 70 ZIEHM/COMET ZIEHM/COMET 39, 48, 51, 52, 67, 68, 74 2, 43, 46, 47, 71, 72, 73
7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 49
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R52= R71= R75= R81 = 33K
SIEMENS
41, 58, 61, 62, 64, 65, 66
PMT 39, 49
ZIEHM/COMET
7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 50
PMT
AID 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 AID SIEMENS 9, 17, 25, 37, 53, 54 R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS SIEMENS 11, 19, 27, 41, 58, 59
G.E. (12V) 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45 G.E. (12V) 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50 G.E. (12V) 9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55 G.E. (12V) 11, 19, 27, 35, 42, 58, 60 R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R83=R84=R85=R86= 7.5K
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R84=R85=R86= 7.5K
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; ASSY-72839900, D12-D21=REVERSED FISCHER 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 FISCHER 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50
PHOTODIODE 2, 45
AID
PHOTODIODE 39, 50
3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 AID 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 PHOTODIODE 37, 55 PMT 41, 59
G.E. (12V) 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45 G.E. (12V) 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50 PHOTODIODE 37, 55 PMT 41, 59 R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R85=R86=7.5K
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R85=R86=33K PHILLIPS 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45 PHILLIPS 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50 AID 10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 53, 55 PMT 41, 59
SIEMENS 2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 44 SIEMENS 7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 49 ZIEHM/COMET 37, 53, 56, 57, 63, 69, 70 ZIEHM/COMET 41, 58, 61, 62, 64, 65, 66 R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS;R71= R81 = 33K
FISCHER 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 FISCHER 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 FISCHER 10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 53, 55 PMT 41, 59 R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; ASSY-72839900, D12-D21=REVERSED
PHILLIPS
G.E. (12V) 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45
3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45
G.E. (12V)
PHILLIPS
7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50
7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50
G.E. (12V)
PHILLIPS
9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55
9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55 PHILLIPS
PHOTODIODE 41, 60
11, 19, 27, 35, 42, 58, 60
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R84= R85= R86= 7.5K
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R83= R84= R85= R86= 33K
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
U3-13
U3-5
U3-6
E (4)
X
START (1)
L (1) N (1) R (1)
START (2)
L (2) N (2) R (2)
START (3)
L (3) N (3) R (3)
START (4)
L (4) N (4) R (4)
A1 A2
A3
A4
L (2)
L (3) L (4)
N (3) N (4)
R (2)
R (3) R (4)
U3-12
L (1)
N (1)
R (1)
N (2)
Y Y
Y
Y
Y
+12V +12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
-12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+5V
+24V
+12V +24V
-12V
-24V
-12V
-24V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
+5V +12V
-12V
+5V +12V
-12V
+12V
+12V
+5V +12V
-12V
-3V
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
Wednesday, April 02, 2003
2 5
Canada Inc.
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
2 5
Canada Inc.
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
2 5
Canada Inc.
REVISIONS
HIGHEST REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS
NOT USED
SCHEMATIC
NTS
DRAWN
CHECKED
APPROVAL
ENGINEER
DES/MFG AUTH.
CONTRACT No.
DATE
NEXT ASSY USED ON
Emir
GENERATORS
VDD
VSS
JW6
JW8
JW10
JW12
JW14
JW16
JW18
JW20
JW22
JW24
JW26
JW28
JW30
JW32
JW34
JW36
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
734630
--- ---
LEVEL 3
02845
MANUALS
SEE SHEET 1 FOR REVISIONS
H
29APR99
FROM PAGE 1
RAMP VREF
PTSTOP
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH1
EXP START
M FIELD
R FIELD
L FIELD
RST
VREF
-12Vdc
+12Vdc
DQ
RAMP
CLK
+24Vdc
-24Vdc
GND
734628
* *
*
***
--- --- ---
D.YAKE
D.YAKE
S.CARTWRIGHT
08OCT99
08OCT99
08OCT99
*
D
D16 D16
Q1
MPS8599
Q1
MPS8599
1
2
D64A D64A
2
14
D64B D64B
D22 D22
D9 D9
3
14
D64D D64D
1
3
D64C D64C
D10 D10
R29
10
R29
10
1
5
D64E D64E
D2 D2
C2
0.1
C2
0.1
5
14
D64F D64F
C3
0.1
C3
0.1
1
7
D64G D64G
+
C27
10
+
C27
10
7
14
D64H D64H
D33 D33
C34
0.1
C34
0.1
1
8
D64I D64I
C30
0.1
C30
0.1
8
14
D64J D64J
R109
100
R109
100
C24
0.1
C24
0.1
1
9
D64K D64K
+
C7
330
+
C7
330
9
14
D64L D64L
TP4 TP4
C47
1nF
C47
1nF
D12 D12
1
11
D64M D64M
11
14
D64N D64N
TP3 TP3
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
J1 J1
R22
10K
R22
10K
D48
1N4733A
D48
1N4733A
R89
10K
R89
10K
R19
10K
R19
10K
D44 D44
R110
100
R110
100
D7 D7
C45
1nF
C45
1nF
R111
100
R111
100
71 71
R112
100
R112
100
72 72
R103
100
R103
100
+ C40
330
+ C40
330
D38 D38
73 73
R104
100
R104
100
74 74
-
1
2
V
4
+
1
2
V
1
3
G
N
D
5
D
2
IN
1
S
3
+
5
V
1
2
U16A
DG445DJ
U16A
DG445DJ
R100
100
R100
100
67 67
D40 D40
R101
100
R101
100
D32 D32
68 68
D43 D43
R102
100
R102
100
69 69
R105
100
R105
100
D30 D30
70 70
13 12
U1F U1F
D37 D37
R107
100
R107
100
63 63
R99
100
R99
100
64 64
3 4
U1B U1B
R43
1K
R43
1K
D11 D11
R10
10K
R10
10K
D23 D23
65 65
R11
10K
R11
10K
R6
10K
R6
10K
D24 D24
D25 D25
R12
10K
R12
10K
-
1
2
V
4
+
1
2
V
1
3
G
N
D
5
D
2
IN
1
S
3
+
5
V
1
2
U19A
DG445DJ
U19A
DG445DJ
TP5 TP5
R7
10K
R7
10K
11 10
U1E U1E
D
15
IN
16
S
14
U19B
DG445DJ
U19B
DG445DJ
R13
10K
R13
10K
29 29
TP1 TP1
D
10
IN
9
S
11
U19C
DG445DJ
U19C
DG445DJ
31 31
TP2 TP2
D
7
IN
8
S
6
U19D
DG445DJ
U19D
DG445DJ
33 33
R119
681
R119
681
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
10
11
13
15
14
18
19
20
16
17
J5 J5
35 35
D
15
IN
16
S
14
U17B
DG445DJ
U17B
DG445DJ
D66
1N4728A
D66
1N4728A
D19 D19
D27 D27
21 21
D
10
IN
9
S
11
U17C
DG445DJ
U17C
DG445DJ
23 23
1 2
U1A
4584
U1A
4584
D
7
IN
8
S
6
U17D
DG445DJ
U17D
DG445DJ
D39 D39
D15 D15
D3 D3
25 25
R24
100K
R24
100K
D34 D34
27 27
D4 D4
13 13
D
15
IN
16
S
14
U16B
DG445DJ
U16B
DG445DJ
D
10
IN
9
S
11
U16C
DG445DJ
U16C
DG445DJ
D17 D17 D31 D31
15 15
R23
10K
R23
10K
D
7
IN
8
S
6
U16D
DG445DJ
U16D
DG445DJ
17 17
D47 D47
D42 D42
R15
10K
R15
10K
19 19
R14
10K
R14
10K
55
R90
10
R90
10
D26 D26
77
D36 D36
D14 D14
99
5 6
U1C U1C
R16
10K
R16
10K
11 11
R18
10K
R18
10K
R20
10K
R20
10K
D45 D45
D5 D5
D46 D46
R21
10K
R21
10K
D49
1N4148
D49
1N4148
R5
1K
R5
1K
3
2
7
1
8
4
56
-
+ U2
LM311
-
+ U2
LM311
D8 D8
R27
10K
R27
10K
D20 D20
9 8
U1D U1D
R42
10K
R42
10K
D29 D29
D41 D41
R9
1K
R9
1K
D18
1N4733A
D18
1N4733A
D35
1N4733A
D35
1N4733A
R28
10K
R28
10K
D1 D1
66 66
R8
1K
R8
1K
C46
1nF
C46
1nF
D50
1N4733A
D50
1N4733A
D28 D28
1
7
D68G D68G
R26
10K
R26
10K
7
14
D68H D68H
D13
1N4733A
D13
1N4733A
1
8
D68I D68I
R17
10K
R17
10K
8
14
D68J D68J
R53
100
R53
100
1
9
D68K D68K
9
14
D68L D68L
D21 D21
11
14
D68N D68N
-
1
2
V
4
+
1
2
V
1
3
G
N
D
5
D
2
IN
1
S
3
+
5
V
1
2
U17A
DG445DJ
U17A
DG445DJ
D6 D6
Q3
MPS8599
Q3
MPS8599
1
11
D68M D68M
Q4
MPS8599
Q4
MPS8599
1
12
D68O D68O
R25
10K
R25
10K
Q2
MPS8599
Q2
MPS8599
D69
1N4733A
D69
1N4733A
12
14
D68P D68P
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
E (4)
E (4)
U3-12
A (1)
E (4)
U3-6
E (4)
A (2)
E (4)
E (4)
A (3)
E (4)
E (4)
A (4)
L (4)
R (1)
START (4)
SIG (3)
R (3)
R (4)
L (2)
START (1)
L (3)
R (2)
N (2)
START2
SIG1
START (3)
SIG (2)
N (1)
N (3)
L (1)
SIG (4)
N (4)
X
U3-5
U3-13
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
-12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
-3V
-3V
-3V +12V
+12V
-12V
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
Thursday, October 16, 2003
1 5
Canada Inc.
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
1 5
Canada Inc.
Size
Scale
Sheet
of
SCHEMATIC
1 5
Canada Inc.
REVISIONS
HIGHEST REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS
NOT USED
SCHEMATIC
NTS
DRAWN
CHECKED
APPROVAL
ENGINEER
DES/MFG AUTH.
CONTRACT No.
DATE
NEXT ASSY USED ON
NOTES:
1. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS 1/4W 5%
2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS
Emir
GENERATORS
734630
A Emir
LEVEL 3
02845
MANUALS
INC PER ENG.
J
29APR99
SIG (1)
START (1)
SIG (2)
START (2)
SIG (3)
START
(3)
SIG (4)
START (4)
JW45
JW46
JW50
JW51
JW55
JW56
JW60
JW61
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
JW
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
CW
CW
CW
CW
JW
CW
CH1
CW
CH2
CW
CW
CH3
CH4
SEE SHEET 2
C48, D69, J5, Q4, R120, TP5
U19
D63, D67, J3, J4, R115, R117
JW
734628
*
*
3. FOR COMPONENTS VALUE/TYPE OF ITEMS WITH
SEE SHEET 3 TO 5 FOR A LISTING OF COMPONENT
VALUE CHANGES.
CH1
AEC
TIME
ADJUST
CH2
AEC
TIME
ADJUST
CH4
AEC
TIME
ADJUST
AEC SHORT TIME
COMPENSATION
AEC SHORT TIME
COMPENSATION
4. D69 AND C48 NOT ON PWB LAYOUT.
CH3
AEC
TIME
ADJUST
*
**
*
**
*
**
**
*
Emir D.YAKE 08OCT99
D.YAKE
D.YAKE
S.CARTWRIGHT
08OCT99
08OCT99
08OCT99
B INC PER ECO No. 19065 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 25OCT99
C Emir INC PER ECO No. 19263 28JAN00 Emir S.CARTWRIGHT
D
D INC PER ECO No. 19348 Emir Emir S.CARTWRIGHT 29FEB00
05OCT01 S.CARTWRIGHT Emir Emir INC PER ECO No. 20684 E
F Emir Emir 14NOV01 S.CARTWRIGHT INC PER ECO No. 20781
5. NOT FITTED.
**
14DEC01 Emir Emir G INC PER ECO No. 20859 S.CARTWRIGHT
H INC PER ECO No. 21803 J.H. J.H. S.CARTWRIGHT 01APR03
J INC PER ECO No. 22412 G.F. G.F. 16OCT03 S.CARTWRIGHT
R95
4.99K
R95
4.99K
62 62
R58
1K
R58
1K
C32
0.1
C32
0.1
R118
49.9K
R118
49.9K
R79
1K
R79
1K
R49
10K
R49
10K
R116
49.9K
R116
49.9K
R78
1K
R78
1K
D56
1N4148
D56
1N4148
1 16
R82A
33K
R82A
33K
R91
20K
R91
20K
D57 D57
C9
.22
C9
.22
D58 D58
C20
.22
C20
.22
R121
4.99K
R121
4.99K
R120
49.9K
R120
49.9K
R60
1K
R60
1K
C19
.22
C19
.22
R32
100
R32
100
1
11
D62M D62M
C8
1
C8
1
C28
1
C28
1
11
14
D62N D62N
1
5
D62E D62E
C11
1
C11
1
5
14
D62F D62F
C10
1
C10
1
R39
100K
R39
100K
R84
100
R84
100
R41
100K
R41
100K
R73
100
R73
100
R56
100K
R56
100K
R114
49.9K
R114
49.9K
R80
100
R80
100
R63
100K
R63
100K
R68
1M
R68
1M
R62
100
R62
100
11 10
1
2
U3B
14016
U3B
14016
3
2
1
8
4
+
-
U5A
LF412
+
-
U5A
LF412
R69
1M
R69
1M
2 15
R70B
33K
R70B
33K 4 3
1
4
7 5
U12C
14016
U12C
14016
C35
0.1
C35
0.1
R113
49.9K
R113
49.9K
5
6
7 +
-
U5B
LF412
+
-
U5B
LF412
R92
20K
R92
20K
3 14
R70C
33K
R70C
33K
1 16
R70A
33K
R70A
33K
R108
4.99K
R108
4.99K
3
2
1
8
4
+
-
U18A
LF412
+
-
U18A
LF412
5
6
7 +
-
U7B
LF412
+
-
U7B
LF412
4
13
R70D
33K
R70D
33K
C36
0.1
C36
0.1
3
2
1
8
4
+
- U8A
LF412
+
- U8A
LF412
1 2
1
3
U3A
14016
U3A
14016
6 11 R70F
33K
R70F
33K
5
6
7 +
-
U8B
LF412
+
-
U8B
LF412
7 10 R70G
33K
R70G
33K
3
2
1
8
4
+
-
U9A
LF412
+
-
U9A
LF412
5
6
7 +
-
U9B
LF412
+
-
U9B
LF412
8
9
R70H
33K
R70H
33K
8 9
6
U3D
14016
U3D
14016
C25
0.1
C25
0.1
5 12
R70E
33K
R70E
33K
3
2
1
8
4
+
-
U10A
LF412
+
-
U10A
LF412
C6
0.1
C6
0.1
5
6
7 +
-
U10B
LF412
+
-
U10B
LF412
R30
1K
R30
1K
1 16
R51A
33K
R51A
33K
C18
0.1
C18
0.1
2 15
R51B
33K
R51B
33K
3
2
1
8
4
+
-
U11A
LF412
+
-
U11A
LF412
D55 D55
3 14
R51C
33K
R51C
33K
C1
0.1
C1
0.1
5
6
7 +
-
U11B
LF412
+
-
U11B
LF412
D54 D54
3
2
1
8
4
+
-
U13A
LF412
+
-
U13A
LF412
C38
0.1
C38
0.1
4
13
R51D
33K
R51D
33K
C31
0.1
C31
0.1
R55
1K
R55
1K
5 12
R51E
33K
R51E
33K
R33
100
R33
100
5
6
7 +
-
U13B
LF412
+
-
U13B
LF412
3
2
1
8
4
+
-
U7A
LF412
+
-
U7A
LF412
D59
1N4148
D59
1N4148
C26
0.1
C26
0.1
3
2
1
8
4
+
- U15A
LF412
+
- U15A
LF412
6 11 R51F
33K
R51F
33K
C23
0.1
C23
0.1
7 10 R51G
33K
R51G
33K
R72
10K
R72
10K
5
6
7 +
-
U15B
LF412
+
-
U15B
LF412
8
9
R51H
33K
R51H
33K
C21
.22
C21
.22
C16
0.1
C16
0.1
R76
1K
R76
1K
C5
0.1
C5
0.1
C22 C22
1
12
D62O D62O
C37
0.1
C37
0.1
R37
1K
R37
1K
12
14
D62P D62P
C17 C17
R67
100
R67
100
1
7
D62G D62G
C13 C13
R98
49.9K
R98
49.9K
R59
1M
R59
1M
7
14
D62H D62H
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
J2 J2
C29 C29
R93
20K
R93
20K
D60 D60
R83
100
R83
100
R86
100
R86
100
R97
4.99K
R97
4.99K
R54
100
R54
100
1
8
D62I D62I
C33
0.1
C33
0.1
C39
0.1
C39
0.1
R87
100
R87
100
8
14
D62J D62J
1
2
13
U4A
14016
U4A
14016
R57
100
R57
100
1
1
1
0
12
U4B
14016
U4B
14016
R64
1M
R64
1M
1
2
D62A D62A
2 15
R82B
33K
R82B
33K
2
14
D62B D62B
4 3
1
4
7 5
U4C
14016
U4C
14016
3 14
R82C
33K
R82C
33K
4 3
1
4
7 5
U3C
14016
U3C
14016
8 9
6
U4D
14016
U4D
14016
R88
100
R88
100
1
2
13
U12A
14016
U12A
14016
5 12
R50E
33K
R50E
33K
4
13
R82D
33K
R82D
33K
C48 470pF C48 470pF
6 11
R50F
33K
R50F
33K
7 10
R82G
33K
R82G
33K
1
1
1
0
12
U12B
14016
U12B
14016
6 11
R82F
33K
R82F
33K
5
6
7 +
-
U18B
LF412
+
-
U18B
LF412
7 10
R50G
33K
R50G
33K
8
9
R50H
33K
R50H
33K
8
9
R82H
33K
R82H
33K
8 9
6
U12D
14016
U12D
14016
2 15
R50B
33K
R50B
33K
5 12
R82E
33K
R82E
33K
C41
1nF
C41
1nF
C42
1nF
C42
1nF
3 14 R50C
33K
R50C
33K
R77
1K
R77
1K
C43
1nF
C43
1nF
R61
10K
R61
10K
R38
1M
R38
1M
C44
1nF
C44
1nF
D65
1N4148
D65
1N4148
R66
100
R66
100
3
2
1
8
4
+
- U6A
LF412
+
- U6A
LF412
D61 D61
R65
1M
R65
1M
4
13
R50D
33K
R50D
33K
R35
100
R35
100
5
6
7 +
- U6B
LF412
+
- U6B
LF412
3
2
1
8
4
+
- U14A
LF412
+
- U14A
LF412
1 16
R50A
33K
R50A
33K
22
5
6
7 +
-
U14B
LF412
+
-
U14B
LF412
33
R36
1K
R36
1K
R52
4.99K
R52
4.99K
37 37
R34
100
R34
100
R75
4.99K
R75
4.99K
38 38
R45
10K
R45
10K
R71
4.99K
R71
4.99K
39 39
D51
1N4148
D51
1N4148
R81
4.99K
R81
4.99K
40 40
D53 D53
R106 R106
41 41
D52 D52
C15
.47
C15
.47
42 42
R40
1K
R40
1K
1
9
D62K D62K
C14
.47
C14
.47
43 43
9
14
D62L D62L
C12
.47
C12
.47
44 44
C4
.47
C4
.47
1
3
D62C D62C
47 47
3
14
D62D D62D
R3
100K
R3
100K
R1
100K
R1
100K
48 48
R2
100K
R2
100K
49 49 R85
100
R85
100
52 52
R74
100
R74
100
53 53
R4
100K
R4
100K
R46
100
R46
100
54 54
R47
100
R47
100
57 57
R48
1M
R48
1M
R96
49.9K
R96
49.9K
58 58
R94
20K
R94
20K
R44
1M
R44
1M
59 59
R31
1K
R31
1K

Service AND Installation Manual: CPI Canada Inc

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Service AND Installation Manual: CPI Canada Inc

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CPI Canada Inc.

Indico 100 Rad Service Manual Ch # 740991-00 Rev. A Page 0-1

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen